Home

Digital Wireless Key Telephone System Programming Manual

1. 117 TO SET CURRENT TIME 1 HOUR 000 118 WAKEUP FAIL RING TIME OUT eter ttt 118 D SETREATUBES EMI 120 BROKERS CALL 8 0 120 CAE OR WARD 120 121 CALL WAI ING se eG can 121 CORAS IG tie E lie E eet 122 COLINEACCESS o Uu a eater cc 122 iM LAM E dca DE LIPS 123 DIRECT CO LINE 02 124 DONOT DISTURB MR LI AM LI RM E LR RM 124 ICM RINGDOWN HOT WARM LINE ettet 125 INTERCOM CALLING c cccccceccessececseseeseccessesecsessesecsessesecseseesecaesuesecsesuesessesussessesessesersesarsurssscsacsesessesessesateteeeaee 126 LAST NUMBER OO ree Veer ee 126 MESSAGE WAIT CALL BACK ccccecsecsesecseseesec
2. 50 IDLE CINE SELEC TON 53 INTERCOM UCM BOX Moca deeds Maes Piet ae 54 POW BE EG GIN TRO Leis Ga HM MEN 55 ars Ae A Ie er 55 PAGE Internal Zone 55 PAGE All Call Paging 56 PAGE Meet Me Page 57 PAGE PAGEAGCGESS RESTRIGTION z 505 57 Cus LD o A E 57 22104 4208 gt RENT IE 58 2 oes 59 SMEPBECIREGORIS SA WES iius iato dosi a a cnp 60 STATION 0 62 SPEAKERPHONE 62 STATIONTANG UAGE actor eed Seeder regie s 63 TWO W
3. 19 1 12 WIRELESS CELL TERMINAL CONFIGURATION 0 0 00 0 0 2 2 19 1 13GAIN CONTROL SYSTEM BASE MAIN MENU 5 SUB MENU 14 19 2 SYSTEM FEATURES 2 evt cep ac on eu a vd ee ee ee 23 ADMIN PA S S WVO 24 BNET 23 ALARINISIGNAL O e a ses PE Eee 24 AUDIOBEARERICAPABIEN Y SEU e riu acu DEA EE LUN LAU ce Mund E cw a 25 AUTOSDEEBETEOPIDVIB MESSAGES d ad ee eee ao ide otra i Boe 25 AUTOMATIC FAX TRAN S ER 26 AUTONMATIG PIEIVAGY MULA 27 BACKGROUND 2 raa a nrinn aw DAR ARTE SR 27 BATTERYABACIKSUDPAMENMCI Y D E M e a 28 BUSY CC I E 29 at 29 29 Conference Multi line 30 Conference Unsuperv
4. 4DCO 5 DTMFRX 6TONE 7 DVU O 9 MUSIC2 10 WHTU 2 1 DKTU 2 SLT 3 CO 2 4DCO SMUSIC2 1 WHT WHTU 6 Rx Gain 00 60 065 7 WTU Rx Gain 00 60 2s EE SE S SEC EX ever o MUSIC2 WHTU 15 Fax Transfer CO Line ee ee 16 External Page Port StationNo None 17 DISA DID Forward to Buy Yeno No No Answer YesiNo X No __ O Fwd to DVU Attendant No YES NO NO Answer DVU Rx Gain DVU 168 GDK 20W Programming Manual 18 1 12 inputTye Table Day Night CCR Table 1 2 Input Type Station Other CCR Table OTOU DVU DVU DROP System Speed Internal Page External Page All Call Page Admin Not Assigned 4 Digits Admin Password can be assigned to Password enter Admin Programming mode for only Administrator who knows the Admin Password 20 DVU Setting DATE TIME Prompt DATE TIME DATE TIME Order TIME DATE date amp time DVU Message FIFO FIFO LIFO DVIB message retrieve order is settable Retrieve Order so that station users are able to retrieve latest message or oldest message first when multiple messages are stored in their stations Weekly Time CONDO FP C gt
5. 1 1 7 1 17 Each day belongs to only day zone F2 Zone 2 1 2a 3 ony 4 7 _ Time Zone Each hour belongs to only one time zone Zone 2 Tme 0 24 F3 Zone3 Time 00 24 LDT 00 99 F1 LCR type BOTH INT COL Leading Digit Table total 100 F2 CD 12 digits F3 DMT index 6 digits Total three DMT indices for each time zone1 2 3 e F1 Day zone 1 index to the DMT e F2 Day zone 2 index to the DMT e F3 Day zone 3 index to the DMT DMT 00 99 F1 A Added digit stream 25digits Digit Modification total 100 F2 RP Removal Position 2digits Table F3 RN Removal Number of digits of CODE in each table 2 digits F4 AP Add Position 2digits F5 CG CO group 1digit F6 ALT Alternative DMT index 2digits 172 GDK 20W Programming Manual TABLE 11 1 6 10 STATION GROUP PROGRAM MAIN MENU 11 SUB MENU FLEX KEY TERMINAL MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Cir Term Ucd VM None Deletion by SPD key rogram Ring None Group Member Station No None Max 10 station Deletion by SPD key Attribute None 1 No Answer Timer 0 99 15 1 second Term 2 RingTimer 09 60 3 Overflow STAZ HUNTZ Destination Type Destination DVU 1 STA SYS SPD 2 HUNT 3 DVU 4 SYS SPD 4 Timer 4 Timer 1 First 15 1 second UCD Announcement Timer 2 Second 15 1 second Announcement Timer
6. 2 No Day Night No ring ae 1 Station group ring assignment Flex key 2 Only 1 station group must be assigned for day mode The rule is applied to night mode too But station group for day and night can be different 232 GDK 20W Programming Manual TABLE 13 9 3 ISDN PROGRAM MAIN MENU 4 FLEX TERMINAL susmenu RANSE DEFAULT REMARK 4 Ports button on to operate with the new TEI type 2 No Calling Sub Yes No Address fe Insertion Insertion Fee Digit zee Assigned IE aha Assigned BEN GENE Code Assigned ee LEN Dem _ 01 10 Assigned 10 MSN Table Entry No Not Flex key 1 CO line no 1 8 01 24 Assigned key 2 Station no 2digit or 3digit Or Station Group no 61 64 Flex key 3 MSN no 1 8 Flex key 4 Night StationNo 2digit 3digit Or Group 61 64 Flex key 5 Night MSN 1 8 Flex key 6 Telephone no max 20digit 11 DID Digits 1 DID Received 224 3 Conversion Digit from PX 2 DID First Two DID Received ow 0 9 Digits Conversion Digit No Ignore Digit using received digit 3 DID Second 10 Digits 1234567890 099 rM 2Di s A 34 1 Service Type me Functional Conference Functional N Transfer Code ewe Assigned eet e 21 Assigned E
7. 0 143 PANDOM R eu ea iM del 144 OUT OF RANGE tt rtt EEA EENI rto 145 LOWBATT ERY SM I RE 145 9 WIRELESS TERMINAL FEATURES reete totos Esos 146 tap tc ah el Toate 146 MC 146 AR E 147 E tum e RM E 147 COLINE ACCE Saana e LT 147 COLINE TRANSFER gr D m LR aor 148 DIRECT CO LINE RINGING WIRELESS TERMINAL cccscccscessecsecessesecsecseseesecsesecsucsesecsessesecsuseesesstsetsecseseteeeeee 149 DO NOT DISTURB WIRELESS TERMINAL 22 149 ING et RR ale Beer cea E nine 150 INTERCOM CALLING eter ute 151 LAST NUMBER REDIAI ac naar ac ted MEAM D UE E ELE 151 MESSAGE WAIT CALL 152 PUN ae LM D n T MUI ce 152 STATION SPEED
8. 144224234442222344242222322222222222 Other versions Loop Supervision CO to CO conversation conversation 00002 SMDR Print Head NO STA CO TIME NO EXT LI DURAC START INICIO At ACED NUMERO MARCADO RECIBIDO Off Hook Detection from SLT 104 msec 10 4 msec 10 72 8 msec 10 4 msec 7 E em PEE gt 81 MSEC es Default ICM Answer Mode Mode c Same CORingDetectTime 100msecbasedetecion 5Omsec base detection CO Open Loop Detect Time 100msec base detection 33msec base detection Minimum 33msec open loop can be DVIB Tone Detection when LCO Tone detection from DVIB when LCO Tone detection from DVIB when LCO DISA No Dial Case during Greeting DISA no dial case is ignored DISA no dial case makes the line idle announcement For to know what kinds of tone is detected by DVIB refer to STI document titled CPT Detection Method with GDK 16 DVIB HARDWARE FEATURE OTHERS SPAIN 2 Port LCOB 2 Port LCOB without any option 2 Port LCOB with CPT Detection DVIBE and DTRB Not available Available 228 GDK 20W Programming Manual O Initial Button Configurations Sub Menu 6 of STATION BASE PROGRAM BIN 2Button 8Button 12Button 24 Button 30 Button 44 Button 2 0 02 02 02 02 STA 102 STA 102 STA
9. Meet 6 HOLD SAVE 44 Iu ee ea a eres SLT Last Number Redial LNR cre ey E SLT teenies SLT DND SET WHT U t Call Forward 22 2 0 SET WHT U t SLT Speed Dial Program 1 SET SLT Speed Dial ACCESS SET Alam 8 E t Pick Up i 8 MNA I E o 218 Message Wait Call Back Request PGM 96 2880 2 8 Message Wait Answer JEEP GSC SLT Flash Hook Flash 91 sss c SLT Call Waiting Camp on Hook SLT ICM Busy Tone SLT Message Wait Call Back 7 amp oue Hook Flash 96 SET SLT CO Hold Hook Flash 59 SLT Attendant Clock Set 1 Attendant Admin Program Start PGM 100 Attendant Date Format Change PGM 5 Attendant Attendant Time Format Change PGM 6 Attendant Attendant WHTU Subscribe De subscribe PGM Attendant Version Display PGM 40 Wake Up Program PGM 41 Station Attendant Wake Up Cancel PGM 42 Station Attendant ICM Signal Mode HF TN PV PGM 49 1 2 3 Keyset only Differential Ring PGM 50 1 2 3 4 Keyset only COLR CLIP Key PGM 58 Note 5 BGM PGM 73 B Loop Key PGM 84 B Only Call Wait Key PGM 85 B Only SPEED Key PGM 90 B Only 2 8 Button Only CONF Ke PGM 91 B Only 2 8 Button Only CALL BK Key PGM 92 B
10. ENTER PROMPT NUM S NNTROD NAVSO H9 PRESS amp TOSTARTREC PULSEPPARAGRABACION 5 mvauoPROMPT _ AMSONVAUDO 104 DVU BUSY CORREO VOCAL LLENO GRABANDO perenne 121 v 122 T 243
11. 54 Code Call Forward to is deactivated But user greeting is not deleted To delete user greeting use the procedure described above O To activate Call Forward to DVIB from a Wireless terminal ON OFF 54 7 Recorded user greeting is used If there is a recorded user greeting it is heard To leave voice message wait Talk with normal voice sound after both User Greeting and Beep tone L To hear voice message wait Press CALL BACK button while hearing intercom dial tone Time amp Date prompt for the recorded message is provided and then voice message is played 1 To hear current voice message wait again Press CALL BACK 2 button Time amp Date prompt for the current message is provided and then voice message is played again To hear the next voice message after deleting the current voice message Press FLASH R button The current voice message is deleted and the next message is played L To hear the next voice message after saving the current voice message Press HOLD 2 button The current voice message is saved and the next message is played Conditions 1 10 To record user greeting the station must have the access right to DVIB Otherwise error tone is heard ISDN terminal S port can not record his user greeting and can not receive DVIB message SLT and LKD 2NS user can record his greeting by Code 5 4 7 if DVIB Access YES And
12. In order to transfer calls only from FAX to the FAX station of GDK 20W do not assign CO ring to the FAX station 104 If a CO line is programmed for DISA and for Automatic FAX Transfer as well incoming calls from that CO line are served as DISA calls So if a user wants to call the FAX station just call station 104 by exploiting DISA call So If a user wants to call the FAX station just call station 102 by exploiting DISA call When the FAX machine goes to idle after a FAX call the associated CO line is released If the FAX CO line is disconnected disconnect clear during a FAX call CO line is released and FAX machine becomes idle 26 GDK 20W Programming Manual Programming 1 Auto FAX Transfer CO System Base Program Main Menu 5 Sub Menu 15 2 FAX Tone Detect Timer System Timers Main Menu 6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 22 3 FAX CO Call Timer System Timers Main Menu 6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 23 Hardware 1 is needed 6 AUTOMATIC PRIVACY Description As a default the system provides privacy on all communications If desired the customer may disable the Privacy feature which will allow Attendant station to join the existing CO Line conversations without invitation Operation lt If Privacy is enabled from Attendant or other stations Press a busy LED lit steady CO Line button the station receives busy tone lt If Privacy
13. RN Repeat Timer 4 Overflow STA HUNT Destination Type Destination DVU 1 STA SYS SPD 2 HUNT 3 DVU 4 SYS SPD VM 4 RingTimer 09 99 second 2 2PutMailindex 14 J 1 3 GetMailindex 14 2 J j 4 Overflow STAZ HUNTZ Destination Type Destination DVU 1 STA 2 HUNT SYS SPD 3 DVU 4 SYS SPD 5 Overflow Timer 0000 140 1 2 Overflow STAR HUNT Z Destination Type Destination DVU 1 STA 2 HUNT SYS SPD 3 DVU 4 SYS SPD VM Dialing Mail Flex 1 for Prefix 2 for Suffix Table Suffix Max 12 digits Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Ls Disconnect 173 GDK 20W Programming Manual 11 2 PROGRAMMING 11 2 1 DATABASE INITIALIZATION The System has been pre programmed with certain features that are called default data Table 11 2 1 11 2 10 These features are loaded into memory when the system is initialized The system should always be initialized when installed or at any time the database has been corrupted To initialize the system to default values proceed as follows PROCEDURE DB INIT 1 Press a flex key 1 12 or A V PRESS FLEX KEY 1 12 e Press one of flex key 1 12 as described at Table A2 0 1 e A Change to the next main menu STATION BASE PROGRAM e VW Change to the previous main menu PRINT DATABASE DB INIT STATION 2 Press HOLD SAVE or A W When pressing HOLD SAVE b
14. The system attendant can change the date amp time prompt order so that the date amp time is played as date amp time or time amp date order when a DVIB message is retrieved with the recorded Auto Delete of Not Assigned 000 300 The recorded DVIB messages in the all Retrieved Saved days stations may be deleted after assigned Messages term with admin programming The retrieved and saved messages will be deleted after assigned term When it is set to 000 the DVIB message will not be deleted automatically 1 7 Day of Week 1 Day Start Time 0000 2359 Default 0900 2 Night Start Time 0000 2359 Default 1800 OFF 100 20 msec OFF 025 20 msec OFF 012 20 msec OFF 000 20 msec ACNR Tone Cadence 169 GDK 20W Programming Manual TABLE 11 1 6 5 SYSTEM TIMER PROGRAM MAIN MENU 6 SUB MENU TERMINAL MENU DEFAULT REMARK 1 System Timer Exclusive Hold Recall Timer 000 300 060 1secbase 1 System Hold Recall Timer 000 300 Transfer Recall Timer 000 300 Hold Recall Timer 000 300 6 CORingDetectTimer 1 19 2 100 7 Ring Stop Detect Timer 01 15 06 1 sec base 8 1 1 9 1 1 9 CORelesseGuard Timer 1 01 15 01 f secbase 10 CO Dial Delay Timer 00 99 05 100 msec base 12 Call Forward Busy No Answer Timer 00 99 10 1 sec base 15 Message Reminder Tone Timer 00 60 00 fminbase
15. MON TIME TBL 1DGT 4DGT 2 The dialed digit is matched the day of week Ex DIAL 1 Monday DAY 0900 NIGHT 1800 MON TIME TBL 1DGT 4DGT 3 select the each mode Day or Night dial the digit for mode DAY 0900 NIGHT 1800 selection Day 1 Night 2 e g Dial 1 and dial 4 digits continuously e g 0930 for 09 30 MON TIME TBL 1DGT 4DGT 4 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently DAY 0900 NIGHT 1800 TNO J o mem 0 e woas OO Cs SSS TABLE 12 2 28 2 WEEKLY TIME TABLE NO ITEM DEFAULT REMARK Night EE Night ring mode start time HH MM TABLE 12 2 28 3 WEEKLY TIME TABLE 207 GDK 20W Programming Manual 22 ACNR TONE CADENCE SUB MENU 22 PROCEDURE SYS PGM ACNR TONE CADENC 1 Press one of the flex buttons 1 4 to select a sub menu of ACNR Tone PRESS FLEX 1 4 Cadence ACNR TONE RBT CADENCE 2 f you press the flex button 1 you can program ACNR RBT cadence ON 050 OFF 050 20msec ACNR TONE RBT CADENCE 3 To select the each mode On or Off dial the digit for mode selection On 1 ON 050 OFF 050 20msec Off 2 e g dial 1 and dial 3 digits continuously e g 100 ACNR TONE RBT CADENCE 4 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently ON 100 OFF 050 20msec FLEX KEY LCD DISPLAY ACNR TONE RBT CADENCE h ON 050 OFF 050 20msec ACNR TONE BUSY CADENCE ON 050 OFF 050 20msec ACNR TONE
16. TRNAS PGM key 7 3 To assign the programmed key for DVIB Check Number Status TRNAS PGM key 7 4 To assign the programmed key for DVIB Delete Station Message TRNAS PGM key 7 6 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently If this feature is programmed successfully the LCD will display guard message for next flexible button programming If flexible Button of DVIB Management is selected again programmed feature will be display on LCD To change the Date amp Time order 1 Press the programmed key for DVIB Date amp Time Order or TRNAS PGM key 7 1 The current Date amp Time order will be displayed on the LCD It shows the current setting as admin program Dial digit O DATE TIME or 1 TIME DATE to change the Date amp Time order The changed Date amp Time order will be displayed on the LCD Press HOLD SAVE and the changed Date amp Time order will be stored If Attendant station goes on hook LCD will return to idle To change the DVIB message retrieve order 1 Press the programmed key for DVIB Management and Dial code 2 or TRNAS PGNM key 7 2 The current Retrieval Order will be displayed on the LCD It shows the current setting as admin program Dial digit 0 or 1 LIFO to change the Retrieval order The changed Retrieval Order will be displayed on the LCD Press HOLD SAVE and the changed R
17. change Dial Speed Ratio press the 17 flex button The 1 flex key acts in toggle 66 33 s4 SYS PGM CO SPEED RATIO 2 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently 60 40 PULSE DIAL SPEED RATIO 60 40 66 33 66 33 ON 10PPS Only TABLE 11 2 22 Button Configuration for Dial Speed Ratio Sub Menu 9 of SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM 10 ALARM ATTRIBUTE SUB MENU 10 PROCEDURE SYS PGM ALARM ATTRIBUTE 4 Press flex button 1 to select ALARM ATTRIBUTE ENABLE menu of PRESS FLEX KEY 1 3 ALARM ATTRIBUTE ALARM ATTR ENABLE 2 To make a change Press flex button 1 for toggle setting YES ALARM ENABLE LED On ALARM DISABLE LED move to another sub menu press A or V button Note A SLT must not be assigned to receive signals for either the alarm or Doorbell ALARM ATTR ENABLE 3 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently NO GDK 20W Programming Manual LCD Display of Terminal Menu in ALARM ATTRIBUTE LCD Display FLEX KEY ALARM ATTR ENABLE 1 Alarm Enable YES ALARM ATTR CONTACT TYPE 2 Alarm Contact Type CLOSE ALARM ATTR SIGNAL MODE Alarm Signal Mode REPEAT Alarm Enable No OFF 2 Alarm Contact Type Close ON Close Open Alarm Signal Mode Repeat ON Repeat Once TABLE 11 2 23 Button Configuration For Alarm Attribute Sub Menu 10 of SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM 11 EXTERNAL CONTROL CONTACT SUB MENU 11 By default External control contacts are not
18. to Internal Music There are 3 MOH types PROCEDURE SYS PGM MOH TYPE 1 To change the setting dial MOH type 1 3 INTERNAL DIAL DIGIT 1 3 SYS PGM MOH TYPE 2 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently EXTERNAL DIAL DIGIT 1 3 DIGIT MOH TYPE INTERNAL MUSIC ee A EXTERNAL MUSIC DVU MUSIC TABLE 11 2 26 Button Configuration For Sub Menu 13 of SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM 14 SYSTEM GAIN CONTROL SUB MENU 14 PROCEDURE SYS PGM SYSTEM GAIN 1 Press one of the flex button 1 7 to select Rx Device Type Refer to PRESS RX DEV TYPE FLX1 7 TABLE 11 2 27 SYSTEM GAIN DKTU 2 If you press flex button 1 Rx device is DKTU Digital Keyset Telephone PRESS TX DEV TYPE FLX1 10 Unit Then dial 1 to select DKTU as Tx device type SYSTEM GAIN DKTU lt DKTU 3 Dial new 00 60 10 DIAL GAIN 00 60 SYSTEM GAIN DKTU lt DKTU 4 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently 15 DIAL GAIN 00 60 DKTU Digital Keyset Telephone Unit MUSIC MUSIC2 WHTU MUSIC1 39 WHTU 202 GDK 20W Programming Manual 3 CO LINE DKTU a ST 2 3 25 4 TM 7 MUSIC2 WHTU DKTU SLT NO C2 4 DCO Digital CO LINE Q DVU MUSIC MUSIC2 WHTU DKTU DVU Digital Voice Unit DCO MUSIC2 WHTU DTMF RECEIVER 7 WHTU Wir
19. 1 If Warm Line Timer is greater than Dial tone Timer Idle Line selection for warm line cannot be activated 2 Wireless Terminal can not use Flex button type Warm Line Programming Warm Line Timer System Timers Main Menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu19 Warm Line Selection Station Base Program Main Menu2 Sub Menu7 Hardware 150 GDK 20W Programming Manual 10 INTERCOM CALLING WIRELESS TERMINAL Description The ICM allows a station to call other stations in the system or to access page zones by dialing an applicable number in the numbering plan Operation lt ICM call 1 Press ON OFF button ICM dial tone is heard Dial station number Ringback tone is heard Call party answers Voice connection established Go to idle status Voice connection is released A O N lt To receive an ICM call 1 Telephone rings distinctive ICM ring 2 Press ON OFF button 3 Ringing stops Parties may converse Programming Inter Digit Timer System Timers Main Menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal 18 11 LAST NUMBER REDIAL WIRELESS TERMINAL Description The last number dialed is stored up to 24 digits in the station s Last Number Redial buffer The user may request the system redial the last number without the need to redial the entire number Operation lt gt use Last Number Redial 1 Press ON
20. A station which is permitted access to Page facilities can connect and transmit voice announcements to zones simultaneously Stations must be assigned to an internal zone to receive the page A page warning tone will be provided to the page zone prior to the audio connection The user is allowed to continue the page for a specified period after which the user is disconnected and the page zone returned to idle Operation lt make an All Call page 1 Liftthe Handset 2 Dial the All Call code 0 3 If assigned after the page warning tone make announcement 4 Replace handset Conditions 1 When dialing Code 0 and any internal zones are in use the user will receive ICM busy tone 2 A keyset can not access paging while on hook status If a user pages without lifting the handset programmed activity will be initiated and display will show LIFT HANDSET TO PAGE 3 Stations in DND or busy will not receive a page announcement 4 Stations or ICM boxes not included in an internal page zone will not receive an all call page 5 Pages can be answered by dialing the Meet Me Code 6 or flashing HOLD SAVE button 6 Paging reception for stations is programmable in zone basis via station base Admin Programming 7 This code be flexibly assigned to a Flex button Programming lt Access Station Base 2 Station Attributes Sub Menu Terminal menu3 Hardware None 57 GD
21. Hook Switch Flash Timer 10 msec base This is maximum Hook Flash time 19 Warm Line Timer 01 20 05 1 sec base 20 _ SMDR Start Timer 000 250 000 fsecbase 21 Wake up Fail Ring Timer 00 99 20 1 sec base 2 System Timer 2 4 Call Park Recall Timer 0 600 120 Determines the 3 Digits sec amount of time before a call placed in a call park location will recall the station placing the park 5 Normal Ring To DVIB Timer 0 300 4 When Normal CO ring 3 Digits Sec comes all ring assigned station will ring during Normal Ring to DVIB Timer and the call will be routed to DVIB CCR Inter Digit Timer 000 300 030 This field is used for 3 Digits the CCR inter digit timer in the DISA DID CO line 100ms base When this timer is expired DISA is activated DISA Delay Timer 00 99 3 Digits 1 sec base ACNR Pause Timer 005 300 030 When expired ACNR 3 Digits is activated 1 sec base 170 GDK 20W Programming Manual SUB MENU TERMINAL MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK ACNR Delay Timer 000 300 3 Digits 10 ACNR Tone Detect Timer 000 300 3 Digits 11 ACNR No Answer Timer 2 Digits 1 ACNR Retry Counter 1 Digit 13 ACNR Retry No Tone 171 When ACNR Pause Timer expires and there is no available CO Line in the group this timer is invoked This timer is invoked upon completion of dialing and system considers the CO party as busy in the
22. Insert prefix of COLP number ISDN Program Main Menu4 COLP Table Sub Menu8 Insert the calling station number Ex The calling station 100 seize a ISDN line 01 which is programmed as COLP 01 COLP Table Main Menu4 Sub Menu 8 01 5001 prefix of COLP number and MY AREA CODE 0343 CLI in setup message 03435001100 INTERNATIONAL Insert my nation code if exist ISDN Program Main 4 My Nation Code Sub Menu Insert my area code if exist ISDN Program Main Menu4 My Area Code Sub Menu6 Insert prefix of COLP number ISDN Program Main Menu4 COLP Table Sub Menu8 Insert the calling station number Ex The calling station 100 seize a ISDN line 01 which is programmed as COLP 01 COLP Table Main Menu4 Sub Menu 8 01 5001 prefix of COLP number MY AREA CODE 0343 and MY Nation Code 82 CLI in setup message 8203435001100 SUBSCIBER Insert prefix of COLP number ISDN Program Main Menu4 COLP Table Sub Menu8 Insert the calling station number Ex The calling station 100 seize a ISDN line 01 which is programmed as COLP 01 COLP Table Main Menu4 Sub Menu 8 01 5001 prefix of COLP number MY AREA CODE 0343 and MY Nation Code 82 CLI in setup message 5001100 6 MULTIPOINT WORKING The GDK 20W and other devices can be connected to the same CO NT S bus side Incoming calls to the other ISDN devices with differen
23. To deactivate Call Forward to DVIB from a Station 42 GDK 20W Programming Manual On Hook DND FOR Off Hook DND FOR Code On Hook Call Forward to DVIB is deactivated But user greeting is not deleted To delete user greeting use the procedure described above 43 GDK 20W Programming Manual O To activate Call Forward to DVIB from a Station Off Hook DND FOR Code 7 On Hook Recorded user greeting is used If there is a recorded user greeting it is heard To leave voice message wait Talk with normal voice sound after both User Greeting and Beep tone L To hear voice message wait Press CALLBK button Time amp Date prompt for the recorded message is provided and then voice message 15 played 1 To hear current voice message wait again Press CALLBK button Time amp Date prompt for the current message is provided and then voice message 15 played again To hear the next voice message after deleting the current voice message Press CONF button The current voice message is deleted and the next message is played To hear the next voice message after saving the current voice message Press HOLD SAVE button The current voice message is saved and the next message is played SLT Users To record user greeting from an SLT Off Hook 5 4 7 Code Voice On Hook User greeting is stored permanently and Call Forward to the DVIB is activated To delete user greeting from
24. 1 When a call is received in a ring group the call will be in the ring process before receiving the announcement for Ring Group Announcement time If no Ring Group announcement is record the timer is ignored If there is no available DVIB port the caller will heard the until available port is existed If the timer is set to 0 the call will receive the announcement prior to the ring process 2 To play the ring group announcement the system must have the DVIB 49 GDK 20W Programming Manual Admin Programming 1 Ring Group Ring Timer Hunt Group VM Program Main Menu 11 Hunt Group Program Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 3 Hardware B DVIB is needed 20 HEADSET COMPATIBILITY Description An industry standard headset may be connected to a keyset in place of the handset The station is programmed for headset operation in place of speaker phone operation This allows the headset to be used to make or answer calls Operation lt activate a headset call from a Keyset Press the MON button the MON LED lights steady lt To terminate a headset call from a Keyset Press the MON button the MON LED extinguishes Conditions 1 In the headset mode the hook switch status is also monitored 2 station will still receive paging over the speaker of the keyset 3 gt Paging is heard from the speaker even at the station in headset mode 4 Wireless Terminal LG GAP Phone does not support this feature Progr
25. 2 cece eee eee eee eee teeter eee nne 174 11 2 2 STATION BASE PROGRAM MAIN MENU 2 0 00 175 11 2 3 CO LINE PROGRAMMING MAIN MENU 3 0 emnes 184 11 2 4 ISDN PROGRAM MAIN MENU 41 2 orb E Er t Eten popup Soeur nds 189 11 2 5 SYSTEM BASE PROGRAMMING MAIN MENU 5 sssssssssIIIIIHIIIHHH 194 11 2 6 SYSTEM TIMER PROGRAMMING MAIN MENU 6 208 112 DABEESMAINSMENU stes 211 11 2 8 AUTHORIZATION CODE TABLE MAIN MENU 8 212 11 2 9 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN MAIN MENU 9 0 eee Hm mme 213 214 11 2 11 HUNT GROUP PROGRAM VM TABLE MAIN MENU 11 217 11 2 12 DATABASE PRINT MAIN MENJU 72 220 12 NATION SPECIFIC DOCUMENT iei kao etd iu aee ica Rete 228 129 SPAIN 228 10 GDK 20W Programming Manual 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1 SYSTEM CAPACITIES Max No of Stations Max No of CO lines Max DSS DLS Console per station No of CO line Groups No of Attendan
26. DISA Retry Counter System Base Program Main Menu5 Sub Menu7 DID DISA No Answer Timer System Timers Main Menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu13 Authorization Code Table Authorization Code Table Main Menu8 Hardware None 15 FLASH CO LINE DIAL TONE REORDER Description While on a CO Line a user can request new dial tone to place a new call or when behind a PABX activate a PABX feature The system allows each CO Line to be assigned the type of Flash open loop or ground flash and a Flash duration 96 GDK 20W Programming Manual Operation lt To generate a Flash while on a CO Line from a Keyset Press the FLASH button lt To generate a Flash while on a CO Line from a SLT 1 Press and release the hook switch 2 Dial 51 Programming 5 Flash Type CO Line Base Program Main Menu3 CO Line Attributes Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu4 lt Flash Timer CO Line Base Program Main Menu3 Sub Menu5 lt Switch Flash Timer System Timers Main Menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu16 Hardware None 16 FLEXIBLE CO LINE ACCESS Description Stations are permitted access to outgoing CO Lines based on CO Line Group Access programming Keysets may use Flexible buttons assigned to access a CO Line If allowed stations without individual CO Line appearances can access individual CO Lines using dial codes Operation lt access a CO Line from a K
27. 2 SYSTEM FEATURES 1 Admin Password Description Admin Password can be assigned to enter Admin Programming mode for only Administrator who knows the Admin Password Operation In Admin In Station 100 If admin password is programmed 1 Press the TRNS PGM button and dial Code 2 Dial 4 Digits Admin Password 3 When admin password is matched the confirmation tone is heard Or Otherwise the ERROR tone is heard If admin password isn t programmed 1 Press the TRNS PGM button and dial Code The system doesn t request admin password input O Pc Admin In Admin Remote Local Admin Programming and Other GDK Admin Service If admin password is programmed Select the specific admin service The user will see the GDK Admin Password window Then dial the Admin Password 4 Digits Press the OK button If the admin password is matched the user can access the specific admin service If not the user can t access the QU decor es next step If admin password isn t programmed 1 Just press the OK button without entering the admin password in step 3 2 The user can access the specific admin service O Remote Flash Upload In Admin If admin password is programmed Select Flash upload menu and fill out the User Information window Press the NEXT button and fill out the Remote SW Upgrade window Press the START button The user will see the GDK Admin Passwo
28. Conditions 1 Two LCD Date Formats are Day Month Year DDMMY Y or Month Day Year MMDDY Y Mode 2 Two LCD Time Formats are Ordinary 12 hour Military 24 hour Mode Programming lt LCD Display Mode System Base Program main menu5 Sub Menu4 Hardware 113 GDK 20W Programming Manual 5 DAY NIGHT MODE SERVICE MANUAL Description The system can be placed in Day or Night mode operation manually by the attendant if programmed by the attendant station Ring and COS assignments will follow the Day Night mode operation Operation lt activate Day Night mode manually from an attendant Press the DND button Conditions 1 Stations assigned as night ringing station ring when station is in night mode 2 Stations assigned as day ringing stations do not ring when station is in night mode Programming lt Station Class of Service Station Base Program main menu2 Sub Menu3 lt Line Ring Assignment CO Line Base Program main menu3 Sub Menu External Night Ring System Base Program main 5 System Attribute Sub Menu1 Terminal menu3 lt Attendant Assignment System Base Program main menub5 Sub Menu2 Hardware 6 DVU Management Only Attendant Description This feature enables attendant to control date amp time prompt order or the message retrieve order of the stored message and also the storage area of DVIB Date amp time prompt order is changeable so that the date
29. DID DISA DESTINATION BUSY CASE DESTINATION TONE ERROR CASE DESTINATION TONE 7 DISA RETRY COUNTER 8 SMDR ATTRIBUTE ENABLE PRINTING N PRINT TYPE LONG DISTANCE PRINT INCOM CALL BAUD RATE 9600 BPS 9 PULSE DIAL SPEED RATIO 66 33 10 ALARM ATTRIBUTE ENABLE CONTACT TYPE SIGNAL MODE N CLOSE REPEAT 11 EXTERNAL CONTROL CONTACT 1 2 NO 12 BGM Background Music TYPE 1 INTERNAL 13 MOH Music Hold TYPE 1 INTERNAL 223 GDK 20W Programming Manual 14 SYSTEM GAIN System Feature continued RX DEV TX DEV GAIN DKTU DKTU 26 SLT 33 CO 33 DCO 33 DTMF 8 32 DVU 29 MUSIC1 29 MUSIC2 29 WHTU 26 SLT DKTU 26 SLT 33 CO 33 DCO 33 DTMF 8 32 DVU 29 MUSIC1 29 MUSIC2 29 WHTU 26 CO DKTU 26 SLT 33 CO 33 DCO 33 DTMF 8 32 DVU 29 MUSIC1 29 MUSIC2 29 WHTU 26 DCO DKTU 26 SLT 33 CO 33 DCO 33 DTMF 8 32 DVU 29 MUSIC1 29 MUSIC2 29 WHTU 26 DVU 32 SLT 33 CO 33 DCO 33 MUSIC2 8 WHTU 32 SLT 26 33 DCO 33 WHTU DKTU 26 SLT 33 CO 33 DCO 33 DTMF 8 TONE 32 DVU 29 MUSIC1 29 MUSIC2 29 WHTU 26 15 FAX TRANSFER CO LINE 16 EXTERNAL PAGE PORT NOT ASSIGNED 17 DI
30. Exception table A amp B allow the station that is programmed in STA COS 2 3 amp 4 to have access to certain toll free calls as well as being denied certain calls 1 TOLL TABLES The Allow Deny Tables are organized into 2 sets of tables to support 2 different toll plans at one installed site Each allow table may contain up to 20 number strings and each deny table 10 number strings All bins of allow and deny tables have no entries by default Each number string can contain up to 8 entries including any number 0 9 Don t care stop The following rules should be remembered when setting up the Allow Deny Tables 1 the tables have no entries no restriction is applied 2 If entries are made in the allow table and only there then only those numbers are allowed 3 If entries are made in the deny table and only there then only those numbers are denied 4 If there are entries in both tables the allow table is searched first and if number is found it is allowed If not found the deny table is searched and if number is found it is denied If it is not found in either table it is allowed RULE ENTRY CONDITIONS amp RESULT ALLOW DENY ALLOW TABLE DENY TABLE o i ii Not found denied Not found allowed Not found check deny table Not Found allowed TABLE 11 2 30 Allow Deny Rules Reference CLASS REMARK STA COS 1 No restrictions are placed at the station for dialing STA COS 2 The assignments in the Exception T
31. If a conference master hangs up during conference setup the CONF LED continue to flash and the master can retrieve the waiting member by off hook and pressing CONF button 8 Toestablish a conference the originator must have a CONF button 9 A Wireless Terminal can not be a conference master Programming Hardware None 29 GDK 20W Programming Manual 10 2 CONFERENCE MULTI LINE Description The system will allow maximum 2 Co Lines with one internal telephone The internal station can exit the conference and leave the conference unsupervised Operation To set up a multi line conference 1 Station A which engaged in talking to a CO Line or internal station presses the CONF button The CONF button will light and Party B hears MOH ICM dial tone is received by Station A 2 Station A dials the another external party to be included in the conference Party C 3 When Party C answers Station A presses the CONF button twice and all parties are connected Conditions 1 The CONF button will remain lit on the initiating station throughout the duration of the conference unless unsupervised conference is established In this case the CONF button will flash at 120 ipm 2 A multi line conference is limited to 2 CO lines If the user attempts to increase the conference beyond that limit he will receive error tone Station A may conference by pressing the CONF button Unsupervised con
32. Low number of free SMDR record buffer XXX B Please delete some SMDR record 62 GDK 20W Programming Manual Programming Print System Base Program Main Menu 5 SMDR Attributes Sub Menu 8 Terminal Menu 1 SMDR Save System Base Program Main Menu 5 SMDR Attributes Sub Menu 8 Terminal Menu 5 Record in Details System Base Program Main Menu 5 SMDR Attributes Sub Menu 8 Terminal Menu 6 30 Station Name Display Description You can program your name and people using display phones will see you name instead of your station number Operation To store station name in a display keyset 1 Press TRNAS PGM button at a display keyset 2 Press SPEED button 3 Dial 00 4 Enter your name Up to 7 characters Refer to English Character Set 5 Press HOLD SAVE button To access ICM with Dial by Name 1 Press the SPEED button 2 Press the SPEED button again 3 Dial 1 and stored station names in memory are displayed in alphabetical order Conditions 1 Available characters as a name are A Z space period colon and comma 2 Forentering alpha numeric data see the English Character Set 3 You can enter the station name in SLT by program code 5 5 4 While calling other station or transferring a call the stored station name will be displayed on the LCD of the other party instead of your station number Pressing V key while entering station name the last c
33. Press the TRNS PGM key and dial code 51 2 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently If this feature is programmed successfully the language of stations will be changed as defined value Conditions 1 This feature code can be programmed to flexible button program 2 The pre programmed Station Language Change key will be used as a toggle key 3 Only if English can be selected as the language of station in admin program this feature will not work Admin Programming B language Code Station Base Program Main Menu 2 Language Code Sub Menu 9 33 Two Way Recording Description This feature allows a user to record the conversation while he or she is talking with the CO party which will be saved in its own mailbox Operation If a user presses the RECORD button during conversation with a CO party then the conversation will be recorded at the user s mailbox If the user presses the RECORD button again or just hangs up then the recording will be finished and the user receives a message from DVIB To start recording the conversation 1 Press RECORD button To end recording the conversation 1 Press RECORD button again or replace the handset Conditions 1 Keyset user should have a flexible button programmed for this feature which is called RECORD button Button Program TRNAS PGM flex button TRNAS PGM 4 HOLD SAVE 2 This feature is not available on SLT and Wirele
34. SLT Description A group of numbers can be stored within the system for access by allowed stations Operation lt access a system speed dial number by a SLT 1 Go off hook receive intercom dial tone 2 Dial the speed dial access Code 58 followed by the speed dial bin number 21 thru 99 The system chooses the CO line based on last line in first group access allowed and dials the number Conditions See System Speed Dial Programming lt Speed Dial Access Station Base Program main menu2 Station Attributes Sub Menu1 Terminal menu2 Related Features Hardware None 129 GDK 20W Programming Manual 7 ISDN FEATURES 1 ISDN Devices 1 There are many ISDN Devices ISDN Phone Video Phone G4 Fax PC Card etc GDK 20W supports all ISDN Devices which is compatible with Euro ISDN ETSI ISDN Specification till now on 2 ISDN Devices can call another station on the GDK 20W and access ISDN CO Lines 3 Current LCD Display on ISDN Device is its own Device Feature not GDK 20W System s Feature 2 Supplementary Service for ISDN Device 1 In GDK 20W ISDN Station can access the following features ISDN Sub Addressing MSN Intercom Call CO Line Access CO Line Hold CO Line Transfer Etc gt 2 ISDN Sub Addressing Sub Addressing can be programmed by Station Base Program Main Menu2 ISDN Station Attribute Sub Menu2 Sub Address Terminal Menu its range is YES NO
35. When the SMDR is enabled the calls to be sec 3 Digits printed is set by this SMDR timer The calls exceeding this time limit are printed 209 B a O A GDK 20W Programming Manual TERMINAL MENU DEA RANGE REMARK KEY T 20 00 99 Wake up fail ring invokes on SYSTEM 24 DVU User Record 20 010 255 The maximum duration of a message that can Timer sec 3 Digits be recorded in DVU CCR Inter Digit Timer 000 300 This field is used for the CCR inter digit timer in 3 Digits the DISA DID CO line 100ms base NI System 21 Fail Ring Timer 1 Timer 2 Digits the alarm ring exists during this timer Then if this timer expires the Alarm ring will disappear Timer 2 Digits duration of this timer Timer2 Timer 2 Digits 2 Digits Bl GENE NE NN Timer min 2 Digits Determines the amount of time before a call sec 3 Digits placed in a call park location will recall the station placing the park igits 7 DISA Delay Timer 00 99 When this timer is expired DISA is activated 3 Digits 1 sec base 23 Fax Call Timer 1 1 5 If a fax CO call is not answered until this timer min 1 Digit expires the CO line is released automatically 5 Normal Ring To DVIB 4 0 300 When Normal CO ring comes all ring assigned Timer sec 3 Digits s
36. amp time prompt is played as date and time or time and date order when a DVIB message is retrieved with the recorded date amp time prompt DVIB message retrieve order is settable so that station users are able to retrieve latest message LIFO or oldest message first FIFO when multiple messages are stored in their stations Attendant station user can check the status of the DVIB by confirming available recording time or available number of messages and he also has the ability to delete all messages stored in the selected station range Operation e DVIB DATE amp TIME ORDER gt TRNAS PGM key 7 1 e DVIB RETRIEVAL ORDER gt TRNAS PGM key 7 2 114 GDK 20W Programming Manual DVIB CHECK TIME STATUS gt TRNAS PGM key 7 3 DVIB CHECK NUMBER STATUS gt TRNAS PGM key 7 4 DVIB DELETE STATION MESSAGE gt TRNAS PGM key 7 6 To assign the programmed key for DVIB Management by Attendant station 2 Press TRNS PGM key Select specific flexible Button to be programmed as DVIB Management Then LCD will display current feature status of pressed flex key ex Empty Press DVIB Management Code To assign the programmed key for DVIB Date amp Time Order TRNAS PGM key 7 1 To assign the programmed key for DVIB Retrieval Order TRNAS PGM key 7 2 To assign the programmed key for DVIB Check Time Status
37. means 15 seconds 238 GDK 20W Programming Manual TABLE 13 9 6 TOLL TABLE MAIN MENU 7 FLEX KEY SUB MENU TERMINAL MENU DEFAULT REMARK Allowed Table A Entry No 01 20 Max 8 digit 1 Denied Table A Entry No 01 10 Max 8 digit Allowed Table B Entry No 01 20 Not Max 8 digit Denied Table B Entry No 01 10 Assigned Max 8 digit 5 Canned Table Allow Entry No 01 10 Max 8 digit Canned Toll Table Deny Entry No 01 10 Max 8 digit TABLE 13 9 7 AUTHORIZATION CODE TABLE MAIN MENU 8 SUBMENU FLEX KEY TERMINAL MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK CODE TABLES 01 30 Assigned TABLE 13 9 8 FLEXIBLE STATION NUMBERING MAIN MENU 9 wo SUBMENU TERMINAL MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 NUMBERING PLAN Extension Basic TYPE Basic 2 STA NUMBER 3 2 Digits 3 Digits DIGIT SIZE Each flex key denotes NUMBER corresponding station TABLE 13 9 9 LCR PROGRAM MAIN MENU 10 FLEX wc KEY g LCR 3 way toggle Disable Access DISABLE OVERRIDE ALWAYS Day Zone F1 Zone 1 Day 1 7 Each day belongs to only one day zone F2 Zone 2 Day 1 7 po F3 Zone 3 Day 1 7 EE Time Zone F1 Zone 1 Time 00 24 00 24 Each hour belongs to only one time zone F2 Zone2 Time 00 24 F3 Zone3 Time 00 24 LDT 00 99 None F1 LCR type BOTH INT COL Leading total 100 F2 CD 12 digits Digit Table F3 DMT index 6 digits Total three DMT indices for each time zon
38. 0 even if zero insertion field is Yes 9 My area code field is used to delete area code in CLI incoming call if matched 10 If Zero insertion is true then set MY AREA CODE without leading 0 digit like 343 11 If there is no buffer following warning message will be printed out through RS 232C A WARNING CLI MESSAGE WAITING BUFFER FULL 12 If calling party number type of SETUP message is International type the system puts International access code to the front of calling party number if there is programmed International access code and shows this International code also with calling party number on LCD 13 CLI information will be displayed on LCD as followings Refer to the table for various examples 2 Incoming 1 1 Internatio 1 Received type and 1 On LCD Zero Insertion ion nal Access CLI number in SETUP Code message ENT 2 00 2 National and 0343507901 2 507951 3 National and 0343507951 3 507951 00 00 5 00 5 National and 343507901 5 507951 6 Subscriber and 6 034350795 0343507951 1 7 00 7 International and 7 004928887 4928887777 777 4 National and 0343507951 4 034350795 1 Programming CLIP Station Base Program Main Menu 2 ISDN Station Attributes Sub Menu 2 Terminal Menu 6 CLIS 137 GDK 20W Programming Manual Station Base Program Main Menu 2 ISDN Station Attributes Sub Menu 2 Terminal Menu 7 Incoming Zero Insertion ISDN Program Main
39. 4 2 NIGHT RING 3 ALL RING TABLE 11 2 13 CO LINE RING ASSIGNMENT Sub Menu 7 of CO LINE BASE PROGRAM 188 GDK 20W Programming Manual 11 2 4 ISDN PROGRAM MAIN MENU 4 SUBMENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 TEI Type AUTO FIXED AUTO After you change TEI press RESET button on MBU to operate with the new type 2 CALLING SUB YES NO NO If this field is set ON then ADDRESS GDK send the calling extension number in calling party sub address information of setup message 2 3 INCOMING ZERO INSERTION ZERO INSERTION CHECK DIGIT press SPEED key a puse ok CODE CODE press SPEED key gee ee CODE 10 MSN TABLE 01 24 Not Assigned Flex key 1 line no 1 8 Entry Flex key 2 Day Destination Station Group DVU Note 1 Flex key 3 Day Destination MSN no 1 8 Flex key 4 Night Destination Station Group DVU Note 1 Flex key 5 Night Destination MSN no 1 8 Flex key 6 Telephone no max 20digit YES NO DID DIGIT CONVERSION 1 DID Received Digit 2 4 from PX 2 DID First Two Digits DID nee Conversion Received Digit No 0 9 Ignore Digit using received digit 3 DID Second Digit 10 Digits 1234567890 Conversion 1 Hold Keypad Keypad Retrieve Functional Note 1 ISDN 1 Service 12 ISDN TRANSFER CODE Supplementary Type Conf Functional Code 14 LOOPBACK YESNO NO N
40. 50 stations in STIB second SO When STIB2 is installed in SLOT2 and 3 1 10 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF CO LINES IN GDK 20W 8 PORTS CO 1 8 STIB2 or LCOB2 in SLOT 2 and 3 4 BRI in STIB 2 0 or 4 in LCOB2 18 GDK 20W Programming Manual 1 11 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF PORTS STATION CO IN GDK 20W 38 PORTS NUMBER OF PORTS DEFAULT NUMBER DESCRIPTION 100 105 4 Basic ports and 2 Basic slt ports 106 109 for 4 basic DKT ports 110 129 20 Wireless Terminals 20 CO 1 8 8 BRI or 8 LCO CO 1 4 or 130 133 4 BRI 4 SO stations STIB2 on SLOT2 and 3 1 12 WIRELESS TERMINAL CONFIGURATION Number of Cell Recommended Number Number of maximum of Registered Wireless Simultaneous Wireless Base station Terminals Conversation 1 13 GAIN CONTROL SYSTEM BASE MAIN MENU 5 SUB MENU 14 Digital Keyset RX Gain Country DKTU SLT CO DCO DTMF Tone DVU WHTU Music Music Australia 22 19 14 30 8 32 20 22 22 22 27 21 2 f 8 s3 2 1 3 33 Italy 17 13 16 26 8 33 20 26 26 17 _ 32 2 10 9 8 3 32 33 32 10 12 16 32 8 32 20 32 32 10 New Zealand 19 GDK 20W Programming Manual SLT Rx Gain Country DKTU SLT CO DCO DTMF Tone DVU nt EM WHTU Music Music Australia 36 32 32 32 4 46 32 36 36 36 LI gt s2 2
41. A forwarded line call can be transferred back to the original forwarding station effectively overriding the forward A forwarded station receiving the call forward can call the original forwarding station 8 A callback cannot be initiated when station is in call forward 9 If a CO line rings into a station with manual forward the line will sequence to the last station of the chain If the last station is in mode or does not have a direct appearance for CO or LOOP button the call reverts back to the previous station 10 Ifa CO line rings into a station with both manual and preset call forwarding manual call forwarding takes precedence 11 unlimited number of stations can be setup in a manual call forward chain However a station cannot forward to a station that is already a member of his chain 12 the last member of the manual call forward chain is in mode the caller will hear DND tone for ICM call 13 Forwarded data should be battery back up protected 14 Forward type can be flexibly assigned to a flex button Programming lt Forward Station Base Program main menu2 Station Attributes Sub Menu1 Terminal Menu4 Hardware None 5 2 CALL FORWARD BUSY NO ANSWER Description A user can direct the system to re route forward calls to a station when the user s station is busy and or does not answer in a predefined No Answer time Incoming CO Line transferred CO Line an
42. Camp on can not be applied to a station in a conference or paging Station A is camped on to Station B and Station A hangs up then camp on is canceled Camp on tone should be heard at Station B whenever Station A presses Camp on Code If Station A which has a transfer holding Co Line and camps on to Station B goes on hook then the Co Line is transferred to Station B the Co line status changes to exclusive hold In a Wireless Terminal the CO call in exclusive hold can be answered by pressing HOLD 2 button after a Wireless Terminal goes to off hook from idle state If a Wireless Terminal has a held CO line by itself the holding status is displayed on the LCD when a Wireless Terminal goes to off hook from idle state Music source can be programmed in Admin programming MOH Music On Hold type Main Menu 5 Sub Menu 13 With this feature disabled a station hears ring back tone while it is making camp on to another station If station connected CO party transfers CO call to the busy station unscreened transfer and makes camp on the transferring station will hear music instead of ring back tone If the station goes on hook the transferred CO party will hear music continuously until transfer recall timer is expired Programming Hardware None 73 GDK 20W Programming Manual 7 DAY NIGHT CLASS OF SERVICE Description This feature permits station dialing to be limited based on the Station Class
43. Code 6 Programming lt Access Station Base Program main menu2 Station Attribute Sub Menu Terminal menu3 lt Zone Station Base Program main 2 Sub Menu8 Related Features Hardware None 15 STATION SPEED DIAL SLT Description Each telephone has the capability of programming up to 20 individual speed dial numbers unique to its telephone These numbers are entered and stored by the user and can be recalled by the user at any time Operation lt store station speed dial numbers 1 Dial the SLT speed dial programming Code 55 2 Dial the bin number 01 20 reserved for personal speed dial numbers 3 Dial the number and flashes the hook switch confirmation tone is received lt dial the station speed dial number 1 Dial the SLT speed dial access Code 58 2 Dial the bin for the speed dial number The last choice round robin choice CO line in the CO group will be selected and the number is dialed Conditions See Station Speed Dial 128 GDK 20W Programming Manual Programming lt Speed Dial Access Station Base Program main menu2 Station Attribute Sub Menu Terminal menu2 lt Line Choice System Base Program Main Menu5 System Attribute Sub Menu Terminal Menu5 4 Override 1 CO Group System Base Program Main Menu5 System Attribute Sub Menu1 Terminal Menu6 Related Features Hardware None 16 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
44. DIGIT MAX 4 The current admin password is displayed on the LCD SYS ADMIN PASSWORD 2 assign Admin Password enter 4 digits number Otherwise to delete the 1234 DIGIT MAX 4 admin password press SPEED button ex 1234 Then Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently And the entered admin password will be displayed on LCD SYS PGM DVU SETTING 1 Press one of the flex buttons 1 3 to select a sub menu of DVU SETTING PRESS FLEX KEY 1 3 DVU SET DATE TIME ORDER 2 When you press flex button 1 in DVU SETTING the current status will be DATE TIME displayed on the LCD To program use the 1 flex key for toggle setting Refer to Table 3 4 1 The changed status will be displayed on the LCD DATE TIME LED TIME DATE LED Off If you want to go to another menu DVU SETTING press A or V Button DVU SET DATE TIME ORDER 4 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently DATE TIME 206 GDK 20W Programming Manual LCD Display of Sub Menu DVU SETTING LCD Display FLEX KEY DVU SET DATE TIME ORDER 1 DATE TIME Prompt Order DATE TIME DVU SET DVU MSG RETRIEV 2 DVU Message Retrieve Order FIFO DVU SET MSG AUTO DELETE Auto Delete Day of Saved Messages 000 DAYS DIAL DAY 0 300 21 WEEKLY TIME TABLE SUB MENU 21 PROCEDURE SYS PGM WEEKLY TIME TBL 1 Dial one of the entry no 1 7 to select a sub menu of Weekly Time Table DIAL ENTRY NO 1 7
45. Dialing Table Station Group Program Main Menu 11 VM Dialing Table Sub Menu 2 Hardware 67 GDK 20W Programming Manual 3 INTERCOM FEATURES 1 AUTO RELEASE OF MON BUTTON Description After activating certain features Call Forward etc if the Keyset is in the Monitor or Speaker phone mode the Keyset will automatically return to idle and the LED of the MON button will extinguish Operation Operation of this feature is automatic Conditions 1 If the user enters wrong data and error tone is received Station will not go idle until the programming is correct and confirmation tone is received 2 This feature applied all of the feature in program mode This feature also applied to Call Back Call Forward Programming Hardware None 2 AUTOMATIC SPEAKER ACTIVATION Description A station can without lifting handset or pressing the MON button place an intercom call with a DSS Flexible button place a CO Line call with speed dial or gain access to a CO Line by pressing the associated button Selection places the telephone in the on hook dialing mode activating the speaker phone or monitor mode based on the station type and the station programming Operation lt use Automatic Speaker Activation for an outside call 1 Select a CO Line 2 Dial desired number 3 Liftthe Handset to converse privately lt use Automatic Speaker Activation for an internal call 1 Press desired DSS bu
46. ERROR CADENCE ON 050 OFF 050 20msec ACNR TONE S DIAL CADENCE ON 050 OFF 050 20msec TABLE 12 2 28 4 ACNR TONE CADENCE 11 2 6 SYSTEM TIMER PROGRAMMING MAIN MENU 6 1 SYSTEM TIMERS PROCEUDURE SYS TMR 1 Press flex button to select Timer group PRESS FLEX KEY 1 2 A Move to the next main menu TOLL TABLE PROGRAM V Move to the previous main menu SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM SYS TMR 1 2 Press one of the flex key 1 24 to select timer PRESS FLEX KEY 1 24 TIMER 1 EXCL HOLD RECALL 3 Current timer value is displayed on the LCD If you want to change 300sec DIAL TIME 0 300 this value enter new value in digit TIMER 1 EXCL HOLD RECALL 4 Press HOLD SAVE to update database permanently LCD will displays 250sec DIAL TIME 0 300 the changed time of the timer 208 GDK 20W Programming Manual summae 1 Recall Timer 060 000 300 Determines the amount of time before call 3 Digits placed on exclusive hold will recall the station placing the hold 2 5 Hold Recall Timer 030 000 300 Determines the amount of time before a call placing the hold 3 030 sec 1 System Timer 1 000 300 Determines the amount of time a transferred call 3 Digits Transfer Recall Timer will ring the station receiving the transfer and how long it will recall the station transferring the call 4 Tim
47. F1 LCR type Leading total 100 3 way toggle BOTH gt INT gt COL Digit Table F2 CD 12 digits F3 DMT index 6 digits meaning of 6 digits each pair 2 digits means the index to the DMT for the each time zone 1 2 3 e F1 Day zone 1 index to the DMT e F2 Day zone 2 index to the DMT e F3 Day zone 3 index to the DMT DMT 00 99 F1 A Added digit stream 25410115 Digit total 100 F2 RP Removal Position 2digit Modification F3 RN Removal Number of digits of CODE in each table Table F4 AP Add Position 2digits F5 C CO group 1digit F6 ALT Alternative DMT index 2digits TABLE 11 2 36 Button Configuration For LCR 215 GDK 20W Programming Manual Flex TERMINAL MENU 9 type 3 way toggle INT look up this entry only for internal dialing gt INT COL COL look up this entry only after dialing CO Access Code BOTH look up this entry for both INT and COL 12 digits To be compared with the dialed digits by a user TABLE 11 2 37 Button Configuration For Table Main Menu 10 Sub Menu 4 Flex TERMINAL MENU 9 Added Digit None 25 digits Normal digits 0 9 stream Special characters CallBK Pause FLASH Billing code Extension number SPEED Delete Added Digit stream Removal 01 12 Index to CD stream in Lead table to be removed Position 3 Number of digits 00 12 Remove digits in CD stream up to this count t
48. FLEX KEY 1 2 SYS PGM ADMIN PASSWORD 19 Admin Password DIAL DIGIT MAX 4 SYS PGM DVU SETTING 20 DVU Setting PRESS FLEX KEY 1 3 SYS PGM WEEKLY TIME TBL 21 Weekly Time Table DIAL ENTRY NO 1 7 SYS PGM ACNR TONE CADENC 22 ACNR Tone PRESS FLEX KEY 1 4 195 GDK 20W Programming Manual 1 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTE SUB MENU 1 SYS 1 Press one of the flex buttons 1 6 to select a sub menu of SYSTEM ATTRIBUTE PRESS FLEX KEY 1 6 SYS ATTR HOLD TYPE 2 When you press flex button 1 in SYSTEM ATTRIBUTE menu the current SYSTEM status will be displayed on the LCD To program use the 15 flex key for toggle setting Refer to Table A6 1 1 The changed status will be displayed on the LCD SYSTEM LED On EXCLUSIVE LED Off e If you want to go to another menu in SYSTEM ATTRIBUTE press A or V Button SYS ATTR HOLD TYPE 3 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently EXCLUSIVE LCD Display of Terminal Menu in SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES LCD Display FLEX KEY SYS ATTR HOLD TYPE 1 HOLD Preference SYSTEM SYS ATTR AUTO PRIVACY 2 Auto Privacy YES svs ATTR EXT NIGHT RING 3 External Night Ring SYS ATTR MULTI LINE CONF 4 Multi Line Conference YES SYS ATTR CO LINE CHOICE 5 Line Choice LAST SYSATTR OVR 1 COGRP 6 Override 1 CO Group NO SYS ATTR NIGHT DVU 7 Night DVU NO SYS ATTR MUSIC ON 8 Music on Camp on CAMPON
49. FLEX KEY 1 5 LCR ACCESS MODE 2 F1 Change LCR access mode Press flex key 1 to select LCD access mode To change setting press flex key 1 for 3 way toggle setting Whenever pressing F1 the LCD will be changed like DIS OVR gt ALL toggle Press HOLD SAVE to save the change DAY ZONE FLEX KEY 1 3 3 2 Set the day of week zone 3 zone 1 M TU W TH F SA SU 2 3 Press flex key 2 to select Day Zone menu To set this day zone press flex key appropriating to day zone number DAY ZONE 2 DIAL DAY 1 7 Dial the associated day 1 M TU W TH F SA SU 2 3 For example if you want to set Saturday as zone2 dial 6 Saturday Press HOLD SAVE to save the change LCD will be changed like 1 M TU W TH F SU 2 SA 3 TIME ZONE OF DAY ZONE 4 F3 Set the time of day zone 3 zone PRESS FLEX KEY 1 3 TOD Press flex key 3 to select Time Zone menu To enter each time zone press flex key Ex Flex key 1 time zone of day zone1 TOD1 To enter value dial time zone number amp time range 5digit TIME_ZON 1DGT 4DGT Time zone SPEED Delete specified time zone range If time zone is 1 then time zone range is assigned as 00 24 Time zone 1 cannot be deleted completely LCR LDT TABLE 0 5 4 Program the Leading Digit Table LDT DIAL ENTRY NO 00 99 Press flex key 4 to select LDT Table menu Dial entry number 00 99 to specify LDT entry number The number in the 19 LCD means filled table number LDT
50. In Digital Keyset press HOLD SAVE button twice See also Dial By Name Feature Not Implemented Yet Conditions 1 station speed dial bin can contain 24 digits including pause button pulse to switchover flash command FLASH button display security as first digit 2 ACOLine can be programmed for use with an individual speed number 3 The system will attempt to dial out on the specified line if it is busy it will choose another line within the same group 4 lines within a group are busy busy tone will be received when accessing the station speed number 9 If no Co line is programmed the 1st group access allowed is used to select lines 6 Station speed numbers are protected by battery backup memory 7 Co line is presented to a direct appearance on the telephone If there is no direct appearance the line is presented to the LOOP button 8 Timing between sending digits must be a minimum of 80ms 9 A pre selected CO line overrides any programmed line 10 When a station which does not have Speed Dial Privilege tries to access speed bin error tone is heard Programming Speed Dial Access Station Base Program Main Menu2 Station Attributes Sub Menu1 Terminal Menu2 4 Override 1 CO Group System Base Program Main Menu5 System Attribute Sub Menu1 Terminal Menu6 Hardware None 31 4 SPEED DIAL SYSTEM Description Within the system memory s
51. Line Base Program Main Menu DISA Type Sub Menu 4 2 DISA Delay Timer System Timer Main Menu 6 System Timer 2 Sub Menu 2 Terminal Menu 7 36 GDK 20W Programming Manual 16 Direct Call Pick Up Description An ICM and CO calls can be picked up by another station Operation To assign Direct Pick up button to flexible button TRNAS PGM FLEX 7 HOLD To pick up the call of other station From 1 A user hears a tone ringing ICM CO ringing of other station 2 Lift handset or press MON button 3 Dial Code 7 and the station number or press Pick up button and the station number to be answered 4 user picks up the call To pick up the call of other station From SLT 1 A user hears a tone ringing ICM CO ringing of other station 2 Lifthandset 3 Dial Code 7 and the station number and the station number to be answered 4 user picks up the call Conditions 1 When picking up a transferred CO line or incoming CO line the line is automatically connected 2 user must have the CO button or LOOP button to pick up a CO line 3 About the multiple call on a station the pick up will be performed according to PLA transferred line recall incoming CO ICM Ring in order 4 f more than one call which have the same priority is ringing at the telephone the oldest call is pick up 5 Queue callback cannot be picked up via directed call pick up a station at
52. Manual user are converted to the proper signal for the CO Line and sent over the CO Line Operation Operation of this feature is automatic as programmed Conditions 1 When line signal type is Pulse speed dialing with is not available Programming lt Line Signal CO Line Base Program Main Menu3 CO Line Attribute Sub Menu1 Terminal Menu2 Pulse Dial Speed Ratio System Base Program Main Menu5 Sub Menu9 Hardware None 31 SPEED DIAL 31 1 SPECIAL SPEED DIAL COMMANDS Description Speed Dial numbers can be programmed to include special commands in addition to dialed digits These commands include lt Flash open loop Pause lt Blank Display When special command is entered into a speed dial number it takes the place of a digit reducing by one the remaining space in the speed dial number Operation lt To enter a special command while programming a Speed Dial number Press or dial as below Fora Flash press the FLASH button lt Fora Pause press the CALL BK button lt Blank the Display dial at first position of speed bin Continue as shown under Speed Dial Conditions 1 In Speed Dial Number the pause command it displays as P in LCD acts differently according to Analog ISDN CO lines respectively If the pre programmed CO line is analog CO line or CO line is selected among analog CO lines the system will send the fo
53. OFF e7 button 2 Press REDIAL c button lt use Last Number Redial on a Wireless Terminal 1 Press REDIAL 9 button 2 Press ON OFF button Conditions 1 When last number redial in system is activated the user will hear the number being transmitted to the central office 2 previously used CO line is busy another line within the group will be seized 3 LNR is protected from power failures Programming CO Line Choice System Base 5 System Attribute Sub Menu Terminal Menu5 Hardware 151 GDK 20W Programming Manual 12 MESSAGE WAIT CALL BACK WIRELESS TERMINAL Description A station can activate call back or message waiting when calling a station which is busy does not answer or is DND A station may receive message wait from up to 5 other stations or call back from up to 1 other station in the system The station who have the message can call the parties who left the message wait Operation To leave a message wait to an idle station that does not answer Press CALL BACK L button leave a message wait to a station DND Press CALL BACK L button To leave a call back to a busy station Press CALL BACK L button When the receiving station returns to idle the initiating station rings When the initiating station answers the receiving station is signaled and the call back request is removed If the
54. Only 2 8 Button Only DND Key PGM 93 B Only 2 8 Button Only MUTE __________ 95________ 2 8 REDIAL Key PGM 97 B Only 2 8 Button Only Last Number Redial LNR SPEED REDIAL i12 12 GDK 20W Programming Manual FEATURES CODES REMARKS Call Park 601 606 Direct Call Pick Up 7 51 Speaker Headset Button PGM 57 SMDR PRINT PGM 81 Attendant SMDR DELETE PGM 82 Attendant ABORT PRINTING PGM 83 Attendant DVIB Date amp Time Order 71 Attendant DVIB Retrieval Order PGM 72 Attendant DVIB Check Time Status PGM 73 Attendant DVIB Check Number Status PGM 74 Attendant PGM 76 Attendant TRANS PGM 4 Attendant MON DND FOR 7 MON DND FOR 7 MON DND FOR 7 MON DND FOR TRANS PGM 1 Attendant To Set Current Time 1 Hour late TRANS PGM 2 Attendant Station Pilot Number 61 64 VM MSG Wait Enable 8 VM MSG Wait Disable 9 TRANS PGM 75 TRANS PGM 77 Two Way Recording TRANS PGM 4 Button Only 1 Numbering Plan can be changed according to nation 2 B Button program is available 3 If a flexible button is programmed as a certain function with the same function already programmed in another flexible button then the old one is cleared 4 WHTU Wireless Handset Telephone Unit Note 1 Call Forward to DVIB is activated after recording User Greet
55. Operation lt use Last Number Redial from a Keyset 1 Lift the Handset or press the MON button 2 Press the REDIAL button 3 orPress the SPEED button and dial Conditions When last number redial is activated the user will hear the number being transmitted to the central office If the previously used CO line is busy another line within the group will be seized If there is no CO button the call will be presented on the LOOP button LNR is protected from power failures OX 09 A pre selected CO line overrides any programmed line Programming Hardware None 31 3 SPEED DIAL STATION Description Each station in the system has the capability of programming up to 20 individual speed dial numbers unique to it s telephone with each bin containing up to 24 digits The numbers are entered and stored by the user and can be recalled by the user at any time Operation lt To place a call using Station Speed Dial from a Keyset 1 Lift the Handset or press the MON button 2 Press the SPEED button 3 Dial the Station Speed Dial bin 01 20 lt store Station Speed Dial numbers from a Keyset 1 Press the TRNAS PGM button 1 2 Press the SPEED button 3 Dial the Station Speed Dial bin 01 20 4 If desired press the CO Line button 5 Dial the desired telephone number max 24 digits 108 GDK 20W Programming Manual 6 Press the HOLD SAVE button
56. Press TRNAS PGM button intercom dial tone is received the first CO line is placed on exclusive hold and the recall timer is activated 2 Seize a CO line and dial external party number to receive the transfer 3 Replace the handset on hook To perform a screened CO line transfer with 1 Press TRNAS PGM button intercom dial tone is received the CO line is placed on exclusive hold and the recall timer is activated 2 Seize a CO line and dial external party number to receive the transfer 3 When the external party answers announce transfer 4 Replace the handset go on hook Conditions 1 If transferred CO line does not have answer information for analog line system can not check the transfer state 110 GDK 20W Programming Manual answer or not answer and do not present recall to transferring station B During call transfer to external number screened transfer if you press the original incoming CO flex button the outgoing call is disconnected and the original incoming call is connected B If both transferred line and outgoing line is Analog CO line the outsider party will be connected during unsupervised Conference Timer B station presses the other CO key or dials Co Access code for outgoing co call and dial the digit for transfer destination At this time if the station user doesn t dial any digit and goes on hook the other CO will be immediately released and the station user will
57. Press TRNAS PGNM and dial Code 4 2 Dial announcement type 3 announcement number If there is already a recorded announcement the number dialed the recorded announcement will be played If user doesn t dial any digit in 3 seconds after the end of recorded announcement play user can select announcement type again for GDK 20W goes to the above step 2 automatically 4 Dial source number for recording Dial 1 when the external MOH will be used as a source for recording or dial 2 when DKTU will be used If you selected external MOH you will hear the sound of external MOH so that it is possible to start recording the announcement at the time that you want 38 GDK 20W Programming Manual 5 Dial to start recording Start the announcement after you hear confirmation tone 6 At the end of the announcement dial HOLD SAVE to finish recording To delete system announcements from Attendant 1 Press TRNAS PGN and dial Code 4 2 Dial announcement type 3 announcement number Only when there is a recorded announcement in the number dialed the recorded announcement is played 4 Dial during the play to delete the announcement System Greetings and DVIB MOH Announcement type 1 Number Announcement Name Description Day Time System Greeting When DISA call comes during day mode Night Time System Greeting When DISA call comes during night mode lt Circular and Terminal Hunt Group When Ring
58. Ring YES NO 4 Multi line Conference YES NO 5 CO Line Choice Last Choice Last Choice Round robin 6 Override 1 CO Group YES NO 7 NightDVU YESNO 8 Music on Camp on So 2 Attendant STA No 100 ICM box cannot be 2Digit or 1 Station assigned as attendant 3Digit station poe uec 3 Set System Date Time 3 1 24 DD MM YY 12 DD MM YY 2 24 MM DD YY 3 12 DD MM YY 4 12 MM DD YY DID DISA Destination 2 Error Destination Tone ATD Tone DISA Retry Counter 190 J 3 8 SMDR 1 SMDR Print Enable YES NO Attributes SMDR Recording Call Type All Ar e Distance Print Incoming Call YESINO NO SMDR Print Baud Rate RS 232C 7 19200Bps 8 38400Bps Dial Speed Ratio 60 40 or 66 33 66 33 10 PPS Only 10 Alarm 1 NT 2 3 eternal Controt 1 12 1 3 1 mu 2 External 3 Both 13 MOH Type 1 Inetrnal 2 External 3 DVIB 1 System Digital Keyset Rx Gain 00 60 1 DKTU Gain Control 2 SLT 3 CO 4 DCO 5 DTMF RX 6 TONE 7 DVU 8 MUSIC1 9 MUSIC2 10 WHTU DA 167 GDK 20W Programming Manual m ww cue La ee SUB MENU Kev TERMINAL MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK System SLT Rx Gain 00 60 Gain Control 3 4 DCO 5 DTMF RX 6 TONE 7 DVU 8 MUSIC1 9 MUSIC2 O WHTU 2 CO Rx Gain 00 60 1 DKTU 2 SLT 3 CO 4 DCO 6 TONE 8 MUSICT 9 MUSIC2 10 WHTU 4 Digital CO Line Rx Gain
59. Second Announcement When a call is in the waiting queue for UCD Second Announcement time after UCD First Announcement e Bist Group Greeting Hunt Group Ring Hunt Group Greeting ssid When aren Ring Ti fore group egies Timer for the group expires 7 DVBMOH MOHinDVIB eee in DVIB SLT MW Indication Announcement If SLT has message wait this announcement is heard when off hook ES SLT MW Indication Announcement If SLT has message wait this announcement is heard when off hook Off net Call forward Announcement When the ring is transferred to off net 10 Group Overflow When the overflow Announcement destination is DVU and the overflow timer is expired Operation For the Ring Group Announcement Refer to DVIB System Greetings and Prompts feature 1 With pressing announcement type Dial 1 Announcement Type1 System Greeting DVIB 2 Dial announcement number 6 If the timer is set to 0 For Announcement Of Ring Group 1 If the user calls the ring group the caller hears the ring group announcement 2 After the announcement the caller will hear the RBT If not For DVU Announcement Of Ring Group 1 All members of ring group are received the ring group ring 2 Thecall will continuously ring until ring group announce timer 3 Then the caller will hear the ring group announcement 4 After the announcement the caller will hear the RBT Conditions
60. Timer for the group expires Greeting When a call is in the waiting queue for UCD First UCD Group First Announcement Announcement time UCD Group Second When a call is in the waiting queue for UCD Second Announcement Announcement time after UCD Group First Announcement Ring Group Announcement When Ring Timer for the group expires If SLT has message wait this announcement is heard when SLT MW Indication Announcement off hook Off net Forward Announcement Group Overflow Announcement System Prompts Announcement type 2 Number Announcement Name Description When DISA caller does not dial any digit in IDP time Retry Prompt To prompt DISA caller to dial again Be Pu 22 em DND Prompt When called station is in DND Invalid Prompt When DID DISA call is invalid EN ce uem rM _ When a call within No Nd Time Transfer Attendant Prompt When DID DISA call is forwarded to attendant station Authorization Code Prompt To prompt DISA caller to dial Authorization Code Record Start Prompt To prompt the caller to leave voice message Time Out Prompt 7 Conditions 1 System Greetings and Prompts can be recorded only at the attendant in the system 2 There is no time limit when attendant records system greetings and prompts 3 If the DVIB is not installed it is not possible to record system announcements Erro
61. VM unit After all the digits are sent the caller is connected to the VM unit 4 port will send information for the number of messages for example 8 station number number of messages 5 Recorded message is saved for Station A and CALLBK LED on Station A starts to flash Station A can hear voice message by pressing CALLBK or dial the VM pilot number 6 When there is any message after retrieve the message VM port will send the information to clear the message wait indication For example 9 station number Conditions 1 When internal station dials individual VM port number instead of group number then in band stream for VM is not sent 2 Anincoming CO ring i e a ring assignment does follow forward to VM group 3 When CO ring is assigned only one station in system and the station is in call forward mode to group Circular Terminal UCD or Ring then incoming CO ring is routed to group 4 When CO call is transferred to a station and the station is in call forward mode to group Circular Terminal or UCD then transfer call is routed to group Programming Group Type Assignment Station Group Program Main Menu 11 Hunt Group Program Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 1 Group Member Assignment 1 Station Group Program Main Menu 11 Hunt Group Program Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 2 Group Attributes Station Group Program Main Menu 11 Hunt Group Program Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 3 VM
62. WIRELESS TERMINAL Description Each telephone has the capability of programming up to 20 individual speed dial numbers unique to its telephone These numbers are entered and stored by the user and can be recalled by the user at any time Operation lt gt store station speed dial numbers 1 Press ON OFF button 2 Press FUNCTION 79 button 3 Press SPEED A e button 4 Dial the bin number 01 20 reserved for personal speed dial numbers 5 Dial the telephone number 6 Press FUNCTION 53 button to save lt dial the station speed dial number Press ON OFF button Press SPEED button Dial the bin for the speed dial number The last choice round robin choice CO line in the CO group will be selected and the number is dialed Conditions Programming Speed Dial Access Station Base Program main menu2 Station Attribute Sub Menu1 Terminal menu2 Choice System Base Program Main Menu5 System Attribute Sub Menu1 Terminal Menu5 5 Override 1 CO Group System Base Program Main Menu5 System Attribute Sub Menu Terminal Hardware 153 GDK 20W Programming Manual 15 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL WIRELESS TERMINAL Description A group of numbers can be stored within the system for access by allowed stations Operation lt access a system speed dial number 1 Press ON OFF button 2 Press SPEED
63. a Finand Italy 729 12 CO Line Rx Gain Country DKTU SLT CO DCO DTMF Tone DVU us EA WHTU Music Music Denmark 34 32 16 20 32 39 32 32 32 34 Ema 32 32 32 92 3 3 Germany 35 Netherlands New Zealand Note In Italy all tones provided during conversation should be decreased by 5db 20 GDK 20W Programming Manual DCO Gain Table Belgium 21 29 26 32 38 36 32 37 37 21 emak f s2 32 1 s2 a s2 32 _ Finland DVU Rx Gain External Music NO NO TN RN NO O 0219040 O C2 0210215 C2 Ro N C2 C2 C2 C2 CO Co 10 gt N NO JNM RN h2 C2 GO OO C2 1 O NO NO C2 NO C2 m e O C2 OO N C2 N NIN OIO e NIN C2 C2 NO e O C2 C2 21 GDK 20W Programming Manual DTMF RECEIVER Rx Gain Wireless Handy Terminal Unit Country DKTU SLT CO DCO Tone DVU Int Ext WHTU Music Music Netherlands 32 24 10 21 8 33 32 33 33 32 6 3 8 32 20 32 32 10 8 32 8 33 32 26 26 30 1 Norway 30 24 3 Sweden New Zealand 22 GDK 20W Programming Manual
64. assigned for day night 2 A ringing SLT is considered as busy Programming lt Line Ring Assignment CO Line Base Program main menu3 CO Line Ring Assignment Sub Menu Terminal Menu Related Features Hardware None 9 DO NOT DISTURB SLT Description A telephone user allowed DND can place his telephone in DND Operation lt activate 1 Lift handset and dial the Code 53 receive confirmation tone and hang up lt 1 Lift handset dial the Code 53 receive confirmation tone and hang up Conditions 1 If not allowed to the station into then an error tone is presented when attempting to invoke 2 When in DND the station will receive a DND warning tone when lifting handset 3i Attendant can override the DND in the telephone by initiating Camp on Programming Access Station Base Program main menu2 Station Attributes Sub Menu1 Terminal menu1 124 GDK 20W Programming Manual Related Features Hardware None 10 ICM RINGDOWN Hot Warm Line Description Station can be programmed so that when lifting handset Idle line selection can be activated Hot Line or when lifting handset and user takes no further action for warm line timer then idle line selection is activated Warm Line Hot warm line can be programmed as access to CO line access to CO group or station number Operation When a user takes no
65. available CO line in the group this timer is invoked ACNR Delay Timer When ACNR Delay Timer expires Invoke ACNR Delay Timer again if there is no available CO line ACNR is activated otherwise ACNR Tone This timer is invoked upon completion of dialing and system considers the CO party as busy in Detect Timer the case that CPTU cannot detect the valid tone type until this timer expires ACNR Tone This timer is invoked upon completion of dialing and system considers the CO party as busy in Detect Timer the case that CPTU cannot detect the valid tone type until this timer expires ACNR No Answer This timer is invoked after system detects ring back tone or voice from CO party After this timer Timer expires ACNR feature is canceled ACNR Retry This counter is decreased every time station retries ACNR ACNR is canceled if this counter is Counter set to O ACNR No Tone When a tone detect timer expired or not tone is detected retry tone detect until this counter is Retry Counter expire If this counter is expired the system assumes busy tone is detected B User using keyset without REDIAL button such as 2 8 btn keyset must program REDIAL button TRNS PGM Flex TRNS PGM 97 HOLD SAVE In mode when predefined line is busy available line in the same group will be seized The number of ACNR Retry Counter is decreased only when CO line is seized and number is dialed A station user must have a CO b
66. button 2 Press the SPEED button again 3 1 1 U 2 S 3 I Intercom U User Speed bin S System Speed bin and stored names in memory are displayed in alphabetical order To search names in LCD by entering character 1 LCD displays two names User Speed bin or System speed bin 2 Enter alpha numeric data with 2 dial pad keystrokes per character then LCD displays names which are started with the user input in alphabetical order cursor points to the first line in LCD Ex When you dial 45 3 Entering another alpha numeric data then LCD displays names started with the updated user input first two characters in alphabetical order cursor points to the first line in LCD It is continued until user stops entering the alpha numeric data When you dial 97 4 The matched name is displayed To search names in LCD by scrolling 33 GDK 20W Programming Manual pou a LCD displays names Press DOWN key with cursor on the first line then cursor points to the second line in LCD Press UP key with cursor on the second line then cursor points to the first line in LCD Press DOWN key with cursor on the second line next two lists outside LCD are displayed To show the dial number related to the name for the speed bin 1 2 3 Cursor points a name displayed in LCD Press FLASH button and the dial number related to the name is displayed Press FLASH button once more the name related
67. call park location will recall the station placing the park Normal Ring To DVIB Timer 0 300 When Normal CO ring 3 Digits comes all ring assigned station will ring during Normal Ring to DVIB Timer and the call will be routed to DVIB CCR Inter Digit Timer 000 300 This field is used for the 3 Digits CCR inter digit timer in the DISA DID CO line 100ms base DISA Delay Timer 00 99 When this timer is expired 3 Digits DISA is activated 1 sec base ACNR Pause Timer 005 300 030 When expired ACNR is 3 Digits activated 1 sec base 237 GDK 20W Programming Manual menu wey TERMINALMENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK TERMINAL MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK System ACNR Delay Timer 000 300 When ACNR Pause Timer expires and 3 Digits there is no available CO Line in the group this timer is invoked ACNR Tone Detect Timer 000 300 This timer is invoked upon 3 Digits completion of dialing and system considers the CO party as busy in the case that CPTU cannot detect the valid tone type until this timer expires 1 sec base ACNR No Answer Timer 10 50 This Timer is invoked after system 2 Digits detects CO ring back tone or voice from CO party After this timer system retries ACNR 1 sec base ACNR Retry Counter This is decreased every time station retries ACNR ACNR is canceled if set to 0 Retry No Tone 1 means 5 seconds GDK 20W will wait this value to decide NO TONE
68. calls and can signal stations as assigned in the system Operation lt gt To call Box 1 Lift the Handset or press the MON button 2 ICM Box intercom number or press the DSS Flexible button for the ICM Box 3 After warning tone announce call lt To place call from an ICM Box Press CALL button assigned stations ring lt answer an ICM Box call lift handset or press MON button lt To place ICM Box in mode Press DND button Conditions 1 An ICM Box can be part of a zone page group 2 ICM Box originated call is not answered within programmed period call is terminated and the associated DSS LED at all key station will extinguish and the CALL LED on ICM box will extinguish 3 The call can be terminated by pressing the ICM Box CALL button while the CALL LED lights steady Upon disconnection the CALL LED will extinguish 4 DND is programmable as allow or disallow for each ICM Box in station basis Admin Programming 5 alert tone is presented to stations assigned in station base Admin Programming This Admin programming is also used for Alarm signal 6 box cannot be part of a conference 7 An ICM can not receive Incoming CO Transferred CO line call 8 Box can not receive Call Back Message Wait and Call Wait 9 Call forward to an ICM Box is not available Call forward is not allowed both by Admin programming and by Call Fo
69. current DVIB announcement will be repeated again 7 system announcement from 11 to 19 can be used for CCR 8 Call routing will be decided according to current DVIB system announcement So maximum depth is 9 9 The external user can dial during the DVIB announcement or inter digit time 5 second after the announcement 10 If caller does not dial any digit within inter digit time 5 second after the DVIB announcement the call will be routed to DID DISA error destination 88 GDK 20W Programming Manual 11 The incoming CCR call will be served or disconnected after the programmed DVIB announcement according to CCR table program 12 If the call is routed by system speed dial in CCR table the call will be charged to the programmed station it is same as Station off net call forward 13 If the call is routed by system speed dial then the call will be charged to the CO line It is same as incoming off net call forward 14 When destination is programmed PAGE in CCR Table and the DISA caller dials the digit the call will be paged stations and any station can not Meet me After some period station will be idle automatically and LCO line will be disconnected 15 Page from CO line can t be answered by pressing the HOLD SAVE button or the code of meet me answer If station try to answer a meet me page request from CO error tone amp LCD message will be occurred 16 DID line You can assign DVU as the
70. deg Nees cece aaa ee eb Nace hs ces hae ccs tee thats tte ke cece ad 104 OFF HOOK SIGNALING cx bostes suite acd 105 PREFERRED LINE ANSWER 105 PULSE TONE CO LINE 5 0202 105 oye ed I MM M DUM 106 Special Speed Dial Commands 106 Speed Dial Last Number Redial LNR 107 Speed Dial Station 107 Speed Dial System 108 TRUNKTO TRUNK CO TO CO TRANSFER ds coti a Ae 109 UNIVERSAL NIGHT ANSWER UNA ee ee ee ee ee 110 S ALTENDANT FEATURES uae 112 Pr EIN EAINT Ec 112 ATTENDANT oe Dade e 112 GDK 20W Programming Manual clad teeta 113 DATE TIME DISPLAY FORMAT 113 DAY NIGHT MODE SERVICE 114 DVU MANAGEMENT ONLY ATTENDANT 0 9 114 NORMAL RING TO DVIB ONLY BY ATTENDAN 6
71. display language in admin program This feature enables the user to change the language of station only by dialing station language code TRNS PGM 51 The each station user can change the language by pressing the programmed button or dial station language code This code key will be used as a toggle type for two language Operation To assign the programmed key for Station Language Change by station Press TRNS PGM key 2 Select specific flexible Button to be programmed as Station Language Change key Then LCD will display current feature status of pressed flex key and current date time 3 Press TRNS PGM key 5 1 4 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently If this feature is programmed successfully the LCD will display guard message for next flexible button programming 5 flexible Button for Station Language Change key is selected again STA LANG CHANGE will display on LCD To change the language of stations n the Attendant 1 Press the LED of Station Language Change button Or Press the TRNS PGM key and dial code 51 2 Dialthe range of station Dial the language of stations 4 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently If this feature is programmed successfully the language of stations will be changed as defined value 64 GDK 20W Programming Manual To change the language of station Other Station 1 Press the LED of Station Language Change button Or
72. each CO Line to be assigned a Flash duration Operation lt To generate a Flash while on a CO Line from a Wireless Terminal 1 Press FLASH R button Programming Flash Type CO Line Base Program main menu3 CO Line Attributes Sub Menu Terminal menu4 lt Flash Timer CO Line Base Program main menu3 Sub Menu5 Hardware 5 COLINE ACCESS WIRELESS TERMINAL Description A Wireless Terminal are allowed or denied access to the CO lines Operation lt access a CO line 1 Press ON OFF button 2 Dial the CO access code 9 81 through 84 for access of CO Line Groups 1 through 4 respectively If there is an idle CO line CO dial tone will be heard and dialing may continue If all CO lines are busy the caller receives intercom busy tone 147 GDK 20W Programming Manual lt terminate the outgoing call 1 Press ON OFF button Individual CO lines can be accessed by dialing Code 88 and the line number 1 through 6 if it can be allowed CO Individual access Conditions 1 A Wireless Terminal may place outgoing calls on Co Line Groups 1 through 4 depending upon the CO Line Group privileges assigned to that telephone Toll restriction is applied by station COS Programming lt Group Access Station Base Program main menu2 CO Group Access Sub Menu4 Hardware 6 CO LINE TRANSFER WIRELESS TERMINAL Description CO Lines may be transferred by a
73. from the top indicates data transmission and 4 LED from the top indicates data reception 3 When program upgrade procedure ends in failure or is halted the user can retry to upgrade by doing the entire procedure all again 4 If the ROM files you want to send are invalid program upgrade will not be started 5 If there is any station that is not idle or there is DVIB port that is not idle system rejects this feature so that software upgrade is not started So MOH Main menu 5 sub menu 13 must not be set as DVIB digit 3 Therefore system accepts this feature only when all stations are idle and all DVIB ports are idle Programming 1 SMDR Baud Rate System Program Main Menu 5 SMDR Attribute Sub Menu 8 Terminal Menu 4 Hardware 1 is needed 2 LIII L ILL o EMEN Description GDK 20W MBU software can be updated through ISDN BRI Line interface at the Remote PC Operation 1 Connect ISDN telephone line to PC ISDN card 2 And connect the ISDN T interface line to BRI port of GDK 20W 3 Run GDK Admin program in PC 4 Adjust Communication Port Setting in PC Port Type must be ISDN Refer to GDK Admin User s Manual Select Flash Upload of Transfer menu bar Enter GDK 20W ISDN line telephone number and 2 binary file name to download Press Next button If next window appears press Start Upgrade button You can see the S W upgrade process For more information refer to the GDK Admin User
74. further action for warm line timer after lifting handset Idle Line Selection Feature is activated as programmed Conditions 1 If Warm Line Timer is greater than Dial tone Timer Idle Line selection for warm line cannot be activated 2 SLT not use Flex button type Warm Line Programming Warm Line Timer System Timers Main Menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu19 Warm Line Selection Station Base Program Main Menu2 Sub Menu7 Related Features Hardware None 125 GDK 20W Programming Manual 11 INTERCOM CALLING SLT Description A non blocking ICM call is available to all station in the system The ICM allows a station to call other stations in the system or to access page zones by dialing an applicable number in the numbering plan Operation lt an ICM call 1 Lift Handset ICM dial tone is heard 2 Dial station number Ring back tone is heard 3 Call party answers Voice connection established 4 Go to idle status Voice connection is released an ICM call 1 Telephone rings distinctive ICM ring and pause etc Telephone must be equipped with standard ringer 2 Lift Handset 3 Ringing stops Parties may converse Conditions Programming Inter Digit Timer System Timers Main Menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu18 Related Features Hardware None 12 LAST NUMBER REDIAL SLT Description The l
75. he can retrieve recorded DVIB message by Code 5 7 When user retrieve his message this message is deleted automatically when he hang up for SLT and LKD 2NS does not have CONF for delete function But if LKD 2NS has programmed CONF key then recorded message is deleted when user presses CONF after hearing message There is no time limit when user records his greeting There are time limits when a station or a CO party leaves a voice message to a station These time limits are controlled by Valid User Message Timer System Timer Main menu 6 System Timer 2 Sub Menu 2 Terminal Menu 2 and DVU User Record Timer System Timer Main Menu 6 system Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 24 The first is minimum time and the second one is maximum time The message that is shorter than minimum time is not saved And when the maximum time has passed confirmation tome is heard and the message is saved for destination station If a user presses CALLBK key to hear voice messages and there is another message that contains only station number without voice message then the message only with station number will be answered first Order when answer Message wait with station number gt DVU message wait gt message wait gt VM Group message wait When user hears left DVU message message time and date prompt are heard before recorded message is played When a call internal or DID DISA comes to a station where use
76. initiating station is busy or does not answer in 30 seconds a message wait will be left at that Station Conditions 1 station can leave only one of callback or message A new request overrides a previous 2 Station which forwards his calls to another station cannot leave a message wait If a station leaves a message to the station in forward status the message is left at the forwarding station 3 Call back to a station in a conference or paging is allowed Programming MSG Wait Reminder Timer System Timers main menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu15 Hardware None 13 PAGING ACCESS WIRELESS TERMINAL Description A Wireless Terminal may access all Page zones by dialing Page access code Operation 1 Press ON OFF button 2 Dial Page access 0 3 Conditions 1 Stations denied access to paging will receive error tone when the Page Access is dialed 2 Stations dialing the Page Access when any page port is busy will hear ICM busy tone 3 signals from telephones can be transmitted through the paging port after access 4 page announcement can be answered with a Meet Me by dialing the Code 6 152 GDK 20W Programming Manual Programming lt Access Station Base Program main menu2 Station Attribute Sub Menu Terminal menu3 lt Zone Station Base Program main 2 Sub Menu8 Hardware 14 STATION SPEED DIAL
77. night greeting is played to the CO party Operation Operation of this feature is automatic Conditions 1 This feature is activated only in night mode 2 This feature applies only to the DISA CO lines 3 To activate this feature DISA type Main Menu 3 Sub Menu 4 must be programmed as Night or Full DVU announcement Main Menu Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 7 must be set as Yes all the DVIB ports are busy then external CO party hears ring back tone When one of DVIB ports becomes idle external party hears Night greeting and after that CO line is disconnected 5 When this feature is activated night greeting is heard to the CO party before the line is disconnected Programming Night DVU 1 System Program Main Menu 5 System Attributes Sub Menu 1 Night DVU Terminal Menu 7 DISA Type 1 CO Base Program Main Menu 3 DISA Type Sub Menu 4 DVU Announcement 1 CO Base Program Main Menu 3 CO Attributes Sub Menu 1 DVU ANNC Terminal Menu 7 2 Hardware 3 1 DVIB is needed Note gt Touse this feature software must be applicable for BASIC III version 2 x or 105 GDK 20W Programming Manual 28 OFF HOOK SIGNALING CO CALLS Description A busy station will receive audible ring signals for incoming CO Line calls when CO ring is assigned to the station These off hook signals can be programmed as a muted ring or as a single burst of normal ring Both signal
78. of Service assignments Separate COS assignments are programmed to each station for day and night operation Dialing restrictions applied are the result of the interaction of COS assignments as shown below COS 1 No Restriction COS 2 Allow Deny Table A COS 3 Allow Deny Table B COS 4 Allow Deny Table A and B COS 5 Not Allow first digit 0 Canned Toll Table Allow Deny COS 6 Max 8 digits Not allow first digit O Canned Toll Table Allow Deny COS 7 Internal Call Only Operation Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed Programming Station Class Of Service Station Base Program main menu2 Sub Menu3 Access Codes System Base Program main menu5 Sub Menu5 lt Toll Tables Toll Table main menu7 Hardware When the system is installed behind a PABX and PABX Trunk Access Codes are assigned restrictions are applied only after a PABX Access code is dialed as the first digit s 74 GDK 20W Programming Manual 8 DO NOT DISTURB DND Description A station can be programmed to allow the user to activate Do Not Disturb DND While in DND the station will not receive ring for CO Lines transferred calls intercom calls and will not receive paging announcements Only the attendant can contact the DND station Operation lt activate Do Not Disturb press the DND button lt deactivate Do Not Disturb press the DND button Conditions 1 Astati
79. possible holding CO Line Call send 4 Keypad Facility and dial the station No to transfer the call then connected CO Line Call is held and user can hear Intercom Dial Tone Retrieving Held CO Line send 4 Keypad Facility then the unanswered CO Line Transfer Call is retrieved Please consult your ISDN Device s Manual for sending Keypad Facility after connection Etc ISDN station accesses the above features Other features are not supported currently ISDN station cannot accept additional ring when it is used whether the ring is external or internal It is recommended to use ISDN S port with DATA terminal instead of pure voice terminal When GDK 20W system uses Extension numbering plan when ISDN station dial CO access code e g 881 and telephone number he can not make a call because of all digit are reported with Keypad facility 131 GDK 20W Programming Manual 2 The Features of ISDN CO Line T Interface 1 Normal CO Line Features Normal CO Line Features of STIB BRI is the same as Analog CO Line Normal CO Line Features are described GDK 20W Manual Consult your GDK 20W for normal CO Line Features 2 MSN GDK 20W will receive some called party number from PX via DID line then looks up the MSN address TABLE ISDN Program Main Menu 4 MSN Table Sub Menu 9 to provide ring signal to an ISDN internal port GDK 20W will send the information including the called party number to the ISDN station that i
80. presses the CONF button The all parties receive a warning tone Conditions 1 To set up conference the telephone must have a CONF button 2 unsupervised conference timer will be reset if the internal party reenters the conference 3 unsupervised conference is governed by the conference timer Programming B Multi Line Conference System Base Program main 5 System Attributes Sub Menu Terminal menu4 m Unsupervised Conference Timer System Timers main menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu14 Related Features Hardware None 11 Day Night Mode Change Automatic Description The system can be placed in Day Night mode operation automatically if weekly time table is programmed and auto Day Night mode is chosen by the attendant station Attendant stations can change the specific ring service mode by pressing DND button According to pressing DND button the ring mode will be changed day night auto sequentially In this mode ring mode follows the weekly time table that be set in admin System base program Main menu5 Weekly time table Sub menu 21 Day Night time program Terminal menu 1 7 The default value of weekly time table is 18 00 18 00 09 00 18 00 Fri 09 00 18 00 Sa 00 00 Sun 00 00 Each table s default setting is the same as above value Operation To change Day Night Auto Ring Mode 1 To enter night mode press the DND FOR
81. receive the CO recall ring for transferred CO party Programming lt Transfer Recall Timer System Timer Main Menu 6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 3 Hold Recall Timer System Timer Main Menu 6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 4 Attendant Recall Timer System Timer Main Menu 6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 5 33 UNIVERSAL NIGHT ANSWER UNA Description When CO lines are programmed for UNA and the system is placed into the night mode users can answer incoming CO Line calls employing dial codes Operation lt Inthe Night mode with a CO Line ringing the Night Bell 1 Liftthe Handset or press the MON button receive Intercom dial tone 2 Dial the UNA Code 69 the oldest ringing CO Line will be connected If no CO Lines are ringing error tone is heard Conditions 1 Code 6 9 can be programmed in a flexible button Programming lt UNA operation CO Line Base Program Main Menu3 CO Line Attributes Sub Menu1 Terminal Menu3 lt Line Ring Assignment CO Line Base Program Main Menu3 Sub Menu7 External Night Ring System Base Program Main 5 System Attributes Sub Menu Terminal Menu3 Hardware None 111 GDK 20W Programming Manual 5 ATTENDANT FEATURES 1 ATTENDANT ASSIGNMENT Description Any station in the system can be programmed as an attendant However only one attendant can exist in the syste
82. s Manual O Po NOD n Conditions 1 ISDN card installed inside the PC must support CAPI 2 0 which is the standard interface spec in order to use ISDN channel in PC In addition it must support HDLC as a B channel protocol And CAPI2032 DLL should be found in the System directory of Windows which means that driver for Windows 95 is properly installed 2 QGDK 20W PC Admin software for is needed for this feature Remote access is available only for BRI 4 Ifthe line is of type DID users have to make call to any station or station group except ISDN station S port GDK 20W accepts the call only in this case In other cases the line connection will be rejected by GDK 20W 5 When the line is released during this feature just dial the phone number again If the line was E 157 GDK 20W Programming Manual properly disconnected the line will be connected immediately Users need not exit from software in order to dial again 6 When S W upgrade is in progress all functions of GDK 20W except for upgrade don t work 7 f S W upgrade is being done successfully 3 and 4 LED of GDK 20W will toggle continuously 34 LED from the top indicates data transmission and 4 LED from the top indicates data reception 8 When program upgrade is finished because of failure or is halted the user can retry to upgrade by doing the entire procedure all again If the ROM files you want to send are invalid program upgrade p
83. status the station will receive ICM Error tone 6 To adjust Voice Gain use UP DOWN Keys Programming lt Inter digit Time System Timers main menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu18 Hardware None 12 MESSAGE WAIT CALL BACK Description A station can activate call back or message waiting when calling a station which is busy does not answer or is DND A station may receive a message wait or call back from up to 5 other stations in the system The station receiving the message can call the parties who left the message wait Operation lt Toleave a message wait to an idle station that does not answer Press the CALLBK button receives confirmation tone and hang up The CALLBK LED at the receiving station will flash at 30 ipm lt leave a message wait to a station in Press the CALLBK button The CALLBK LED at the receiving station will flash at 30 ipm lt answer a message wait Press the flashing CALLBK button The station leaving the message will receive intercom ring leave a call back to a busy station Press the CALLBK button receives confirmation tone and hangs up 77 GDK 20W Programming Manual When the receiving station returns to idle the initiating station rings and the CALLBK LED will flash When the initiating station answers the receiving station is signaled and the call back request is removed If the initiating station is busy or does not a
84. the DISA caller to try another call 3 the DISA caller is connected to another CO line loop current detection circuitry is connected to the outgoing CO line to automatically release CO lines 4 the DISA caller is connected to another CO line disconnect timer is invoked When this timer expires the call is automatically disconnected This timer applies even though the CO line has loop detect capability The unsupervised conference timer is used for the disconnect timer 5 Ifa DISA line is programmed not to require an Authorization code the system will immediately provide ICM Dial tone after answering the incoming call 6 When a programmed DISA line has been accessed by an incoming DISA caller the associated LED for the line will show steady busy on all keysets except the attendants station which will flash at a 240 ipm flutter to indicate a DISA call has accessed that line A DISA line caller can only access a station if that station has the CO line appearance button If a DISA line is programmed to require an Authorization code and the DISA caller enters an invalid code the DISA caller will be disconnected 9 Pulse type CO line is not available for DISA 10 If there is no answer from the station that receives incoming DISA CO ring the call is transferred to attendant station Programming DISA Mode CO Line Base Program Main Menu3 Sub Menu4 DID DISA Destination System Base Program Main Menu5 Sub Menu6
85. the appropriate alarm signal to assigned stations lt To terminate the alarm signal while idle Dial 65 confirmation tone is heard and the alarm signal is terminated at all assigned stations If the Alarm condition is cleared the system will rearm the alarm alarm Clear the alarm condition and reset terminate the alarm signal The preceding steps can be done in any order to rearm Conditions The alarm contacts must be dry no voltage current source connected 2 A Single Line Telephone and Wireless Terminal doesn t receive signal for the Alarm 3 The alarm signal will terminate when reset by any keyset assigned to receive the alarm signal and will rearm when both the alarm condition is cleared an reset by a keyset The two actions may occur in any order 4 Aflex button can be programmed for Alarm Reset Programming lt Alarm ICM Box Signal Station Base Program main menu2 Station Attributes Sub Menu1 Terminal menu8 lt Alarm Enable System Base Program main 5 Alarm Attributes Sub Menu10 Terminal menu lt X Alarm Contact Type System Base Program main 5 Alarm Attributes Sub Menu10 Terminal menu2 lt Alarm Signal Mode System Base Program main 5 Alarm Attributes Sub Menu10 Terminal menu3 Hardware An external contact must be connected to the Alarm input on the MBU This contact must be dry no voltage current source connect
86. the left side And then press a flex key 1 to change the current value Press HOLD SAVE to update the database permanently A V Go to the other same level menu TRANS PGM Go to the Admin start menu REDIAL Go to the 1 level upper menu 11 1 4 BUTTON DEFINITION Buttons are used for the following purposes in the Admin program mode Lan JEN NO C2 HOLD SAVE Update the system database permanently TRANS PGM Move to the start of admin program menu REDIAL Move to the 1 level upper level menu SUB MENU gt MAIN MENU TERMINAL MENU gt SUB MENU E Move to the next menu in the same level Round robin DND 1 terminal menu of STATION ATTRIBUTE gt SPEED DIAL ACCESS 2 terminal menu of STATION ATTRIBUTE Move to the previous menu in the same level Round robin Ex 1 INITIALIZATION 1 main menu gt PRINT main menu Ex 2 STATION CLASS OF SERVICE 3 sub menu of 274 main menu gt ISDN STATION ATTRIBUTE 2 sub menu of 2 main menu C SPEED Clear database of the current terminal menu FLEX KEY 1 Used for selecting a menu main sub terminal responding to the number 2 Also used as toggle key for entering data if entered value has only 2 case number i e Yes No Enable Disable N DIGIT Used for entering data by dialing 160 GDK 20W Programming Manual 11 1 5 ADMIN PROGRA
87. time 13 DID DISA No Answer 20 00 99 A DID call will be forwarded to the attendant if Timer 2 Digits station is busy or does not answer within this time Unsupervised CONF 00 99 Determines the amount of the time an Timer min 2 Digits unsupervised conference can continue after the The CO Release Guard Timer controls the time 2 Digits necessary to guarantee idle loop state when the line is released 100ms Preset Forward Timer 0 a O initiator of the conference has exited the conference 15 MSG Wait Reminder 00 00 60 Determines the amount of time between Tone Timer min 2 Digits repeated reminder tones to a key telephone with a message waiting Hook Switch Flash Timer 10ms 001 250 This timer determines how long the user could 3 Digits depress the hook switch in order for it to be considered a FLASH Timed Break Recall For SLT 100ms 2 Digits is needed to activate as a door open relay using external page relay 0 0 1 Inter Digit Timer 5 1 20 The time between digits cannot exceed Inter sec 2 Digits digit timer or error tone is received Warm Line Timer Co 2 User takes no action after lifting handset or O pressing the MON button and warm line timer sec 2 Digits is expired then idle line selection for warm line is activated 20 SMDR Timer 000 000 250
88. to the dial number is displayed toggle To dial each station or speed dial number 1 Cursor points a name But you may dial number digit 2 to select second speed number 2 Press HOLD SAVE button then the stored number is dialed Conditions 1 Available characters a name A Z space period colon and comma 2 LCD displays 2 names for DKTU 3 If user dials a group I S U which has no entry error tone is heard 4 You should enter System Speed dial in only Attendant station If you try to enter System Speed Dial in the other station error tone will be heard 5 Ifa station without LCD tries to activate this feature error tone is heard 6 In SLT and no only station name can be entered 7 When there is no matched name for the user input while searching a name error tone is heard 8 Speed Dial which has only phone number without name will not be listed by the Dial by Name 9 Pressing CALLBK button the last letter of user input is deleted and previous matched name is displayed If you press just 1 digit to enter a character only the digit will be deleted There is no change in the LCD And if pressing CALLBK button without entering any letter system takes no action 10 If the user input letters are all erased with CALLBK button the LCD will display the first name in alphabetical order The cursor will also indicate the first 11 Scrolling and entering charac
89. using an outgoing CO line Operation lt activate a Station Off Net Call Forward condition 1 The handset is lifted or MON button pressed and dial tone is received 2 Press the DND FWD button and then dial Code 5 off net 3 Press CO button if needed and dial Speed bin No 4 Replace the handset Go on hook 5 When the forward is accepted confirmation tone is received and DND FWD LED flashes at 30 ipm Station goes to idle status automatically a Station Off Net Call Forward condition 1 In idle status press the DND FWD button or in off hook status press DND FWD button and dial Code 2 DND FWD LED is extinguished Station goes to idle status automatically Conditions 1 Call Forward will remain engaged until manually released by the station 2 Forwarding is unconditional and occurs immediately when a station calls an off net forwarded station 3 The call to a station is not answered until the outgoing CO line has been seized and the digits have been out pulsed The calling station will receive ICM Ring back tone until answered Upon answer the station will receive whatever CO progress tones apply i e Ring back Busy Error announcement etc 4 If Station Call Forwarding is denied off net forwarding is denied also 5 Ifa speed bin is programmed under a flex button the user may go off hook depress the DND FWD button and dial Code 5 then press the flex button
90. when user answers Wakeup ring TRNAS PGM Code 41 Wakeup time 4 digits When user answers Wakeup ring then user hear DVIB MOH announcement DVIB MOH has been played since MOH type is set as DVIB MOH outside party may not hear DVIB MOH announcement from the beginning To hear DVIB MOH during setup a Conference call When a conference call is established if one party is waiting while conference mater makes an other call for conference MOH is provided Conditions announcement is recorded before user sets MOH Type 3 2 At least one channel is available for MOH when user sets Type 3 3 When DVIB MOH is used one DVIB port is used for MOH attendant can not record or delete system announcement and prompts 4 Programming 1 MOH Type Main Menu 5 Sub Menu 13 Hardware 1 DVIB is needed 25 3 48 GDK 20W Programming Manual 19 DVU Announcement with Ring Group Description Ring Group supports DVU announcement If the call is not answered until ring group announce timer the caller will hear ring group announcement System Greetings and DVIB MOH Announcement type 1 Day Time System Greeting When DISA call comes during day mode 2 Night Time System Greeting When DISA call comes during night mode 3 Circular and Terminal Hunt Group When Ring Timer for the group expires Greeting 4 UCD Group First Announcement When a call is in the waiting queue for UCD First Announcement time UCD Group
91. without lifting the handset by activating the speaker phone or monitor mode If the speaker phone is disable or the keyset is not speaker phone equipped the user must lift handset to converse Operation lt use on hook dialing for an outside call 1 Press the MON button 2 Select a CO Line 3 Dial desired number 4 Lift the Handset to converse privately lt use on hook dialing for an internal call 1 Press the MON button 2 Dial desired number 3 Lift the Handset to converse privately Conditions The system will allow dialing a number in the numbering plan without pressing MON button first 2 To terminate an unanswered call press the illuminated MON button Then call is terminated and MON LED is extinguished 3 When auto speaker disabled user should lift handset or press MON button to activate system feature 4 When using a keyset with a speakerphone the microphone is active unless the MUTE button is pressed 79 GDK 20W Programming Manual Programming lt Speaker phone Headset Station Base Program main menu2 Station Attributes Sub Menu1 Terminal Menu6 lt Auto Speaker Selection Station Base Program main menu2 Station Attributes Sub Menu1 Terminal Menu Hardware None 16 To Leave DVIB Message by CALLBK key during ICM Call Description User can leave voice message wait to a station which has access to DVIB during ICM call instead of station num
92. 1 10 104 105 2 Hunt Group Member CIR TERM HUNT GRP 9 Hunt Group Attribute PRESS FLEX KEY 1 2 217 GDK 20W Programming Manual TERMINAL MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 Cir Term Ucd VM None Ring None Station No None Max 10 stations 3 eee eee None Attribute Cir 1 No Answer Timer 0 99 Term 2 Ring Timer 0 99 sec C C If calls sent to the called station is unavailable or unanswered in this no answer time the call is proceeded to the next listed station in the group If this timer expires after a call comes in the group the system announces the greeting if exists Destination Type 1 STA 2 HUNT 3 DVU 4 SYS SPD 180 If all stations in the group are busy when a call is received for the group the call may continue to wait for an available station in the group If queued the call may be sent to a UCD announcement when the queue period exceeds the queue to the 19 announcement timer If the timer is to 0 the call will receive the full first announcement prior to the hunting process The second announcement can be provided if the call continues to wait beyond the queue to the 27 announcement timer The second message can be repeated until the is answered or is disconnected when the queue period exceeds the Announcement Repeat Timer Destination Type 1 5 2 3 DVU 4 SYS SPD 180 1 second 3 Overflow Destinatio
93. 100 112 D SEC 10 Data Line Security STA 100 112 DVU ACCS 11 DVU Access YES 2 2 STA 100 112 TWO WAY 12 Two way Recording NO STA ATTR 100 112 DID RIN 13 DID Ring NO STA 100 112 3 1HKZ 14 Bearer Capability 3 1KHz NO 176 GDK 20W Programming Manual FLEX TERMINAL DEFAULT REMARK KEY MENU LED STATION YES ON Enables DND to be activated by the station ATTRIBUTE Speed Dial YES ON Allows access to system speed dial by the station Access YES ON Allows access to paging by the station Call Forward YES ON Enables Call Forward to be activated by the station 5 PLA YES ON The allowance to answer calls by simply lifting handset or pressing MON button with the answering priority Speaker YES ON Operate with Speakerphone Phone Auto Speaker Allows accessing a CO line or place a DSS call by pressing Selection appropriate CO or DSS button without lifting handset or pressing the MON button m Signaling Automatic Station1 YES While on a CO line the station user seizes another CO line by Hold Station2 16 NO depressing the CO button The first CO line goes on Hold automatically Security busy state DVU Access YES ON Enables a station to forward calls to DVIB 12 Two Way NO OFF Enables a station to use two way recording feature Recording p 1 07 DID ring NO OFF Enables a station to use DID ring feature 14 Bearer YES Only for Station 12 13 with Italy version Cap
94. 102 STA 102 STA 102 STA 108 STA 108 STA 108 STA 109 STA 109 STA 109 STA 110 STA 110 STA 110 STA 112 STA 112 STA 112 Empty Empty Empty Empty Empty Empty Empty Empty 229 GDK 20W Programming Manual 2 Admin Default Tables Note Values which are country specific are represented as bold amp italic characters TABLE 13 9 1 STATION BASE PROGRAM MAIN MENU 2 No SUB MENU TERMINAL MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 STATION 1 DND Do Not Disturb YES NO YES ATTRIBUTE 2 SpeedDialAccess YES NO 5 3 PageAcess 7 YES NO YES 4 Call Forward Access YES NO YES 5 PLA Preferred Line Answer YES NO YES gt 6 Speaker Phone Headset__ SP HEAD Speaker Phone 7 Auto Speaker Selection YES NO 5 8 ICM Box Signaling YES NO YES 0 Hold YES NO Station1 YES Station2 34 NO 10 DataLineSecuriy YES NO 11 DVU Access YESNO YES J 12 TwoWayrecordng YES NO NO 13 1010 Ring YES NO NO Determine the destination of an incoming DID call If this field is set as Yes the original destination of DID call receives the ring But if itis set as the original destination is ignored and the ring is distributed according to wm ring assignment 14 Bearer Capability 3 1KHz YES NO 2 ISDN STATION Address YE
95. 2 Station Attributes Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 11 2 DVU User Record Timer System Timer Main Menu 6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 24 3 Valid User Message Timer System Timer Main Menu 6 System Timer 2 Sub Menu 2 Terminal Menu 2 4 DID DISA Forward To DVIB for Busy Case 5 _ System Base Program Main Menu 5 DID DISA Destination Sub Menu 17 Terminal Menu 1 6 DID DISA Forward To DVIB for No Answer Case 7 System Base Program Main Menu 5 DID DISA Destination Sub Menu 17 Terminal Menu 2 8 DID DISA Forward To DVIB for Attendant No Answer Case 9 System Base Program Main Menu 5 DID DISA Destination Sub Menu 17 Terminal Menu 3 Hardware 1 DVIB is needed 18 2 DVIB Voice Announcement with DID DISA Line Description Recorded system greetings and prompts can be used for voice guided DID DISA Operation DID MSN Line Admin Field Action and Announcements Provided Busy DND DID DISA Forward To DVIB No Refer to DID DISA Busy Destination 5 6 1 below for Busy Case 5 17 1 Yes Busy DND Prompt Record Start Prompt Beep Tone Recorded message is saved for the station in busy DND DID DISA Busy Destination Tone Incoming call is released immediately 5 6 1 with DID DISA ATTD Ring is distributed to all the stations that are assigned CO Forward To DVIB for Busy ringing If there is no station assigned ringing the call goes to a L attend
96. 2 13 E 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 4 DENY TABLE 01 10 8 DIGIT 1 2 E 3 E 4 5 6 E 7 E 8 9 10 E CANNED TOLL TABLES 1 ALLOW TABLE ENTRY 01 10 MAX 8 DIGIT 1 E 2 E 3 E 4 E 5 6 E 7 E 8 E 9 E 10 E 2 DENY TABLE ENTRY 01 10 8 DIGIT 1 E 2 E 3 E 4 E 5 E 6 E 7 E 8 E 9 10 225 GDK 20W Programming Manual Authorization Code Table Flexible Numbering Plan LCR Database AUTHORIZATION CODE TABLE ENTRY 01 30 5 DIGIT 2 SE 4 E 5 6 E 7 E 8 E 9 10 E 11 12 E 13 E 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 E 23 E 24 25 E 26 27 28 29 30 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN 1 NUMBERING PLAN TYPE BASIC 2 STA NUMBER DIGIT SIZE 3 3 FLEXIBLE STA NUMBERING 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 LCR DATABASE 1 ACCESS MODE DISABLE 2 DAY ZONE 1 M TU W TH F SA SU 2 3 3 TIME ZONE FOR DAY ZONE 1 1 00 24 2 00 24 3 00 24 FOR DAY ZONE 2 1 00 24 2 00 24 3 00 24 FOR DAY ZONE 3 1 00 24 2 00 24 3 00 24 4 LDT TABLE ENTRY LCR TYPE CODE DMT_INDEX_OF_DAY_ZONE 123456789012E E E 98 99 BOTH 5 TABLE ENTRY ADDED DIGIT R_POS R_NO A_POS CGRP ALT_DMT 98 3467992457 99 226 GDK 20W Programming
97. 6 Toll restriction will be based upon the COS of forwarding station 7 calling station and Off net forwarding station must have an appearance CO LOOP for the outgoing Off Net line The call will not be forwarded if a CO or LOOP button is not programmed 8 SMDR printout will reflect transferred and outgoing calls like the DISA call record 71 GDK 20W Programming Manual 9 speed dial no with a flash in it when used for Off Net Call Forwarding will dial all digits before the flash command but will not perform the flash or dial digits after the flash has occurred 10 Forwarded data should be battery back up and protected 11 Acallback can be initiated when station is in call forward off net 12 Call Forward type can be flexibly assigned to a flex button 13 When user makes CO to CO call by transferring CO to the station in off net forward mode this CO to CO call is controlled by the Unsupervised Conference Timer if all the CO lines are analog lines So this CO to CO call is automatically disconnected after the Unsupervised Conference Timer has expired But if CO to CO call includes at least one ISDN CO line this call is not controlled by the Unsupervised Conference Timer So this call is disconnected when ISDN CO line hangs up Programming lt Forward Station Base Program main menu2 Station Attributes Sub Menu1 Terminal Menu4 Hardware None 5 4 Call Forward Incoming CO Line Off Net Descriptio
98. 7 Announcement ATTR 1 8 TN DETEC 8 CPT Tone Detect NO 184 GDK 20W Programming Manual FLEX TERMINAL DEFAULT MENU RANGE Len REMARK CO Line Type PBX CO When marked PBX a 1 or 2 digit dial code may be entered after which toll restriction is applied Eaa CO Dial DTMF Pulse DTMF ON line be programmed to be either tone or dial pulse YES NO NO OFF The allowance of Universal Night Answer service PL ash Type Ground LOOP OFF Flash types of CO Line are Loop Flash timed break and Loop Ground Flash Only loop type is supported DISA Account YES NO O OFF When accessed another CO line in the system by DISA line you should enter authorization code if this flag is set 6 Loop Supervision YES NO NO OFF 7 DID DISA YES NO YES ON This field determines whether DVU announcement for Announcement DID DISA and Hunt group announcement are provided or not to CO line 8 CPTTone Detect YES NO NO OFF TABLE 11 2 10 Button Configuration for CO LINE Attribute Sub Menu 1 of CO LINE BASE PROGRAM 2 ISDN CO LINE ATTRIBUTE SUB MENU 2 PROCEDURE CO PGM 1 Enter CO line Range ex 1 4 ENTER CO RANGE 1 8 1 4 2 Press flex button 2 to select CO LINE ISDN ATTRIBUTE PRESS FLEX KEY 1 7 PGM 1 4 ISDN ATTRIBUT 3 Press flex button 1 to select ISDN COLP menu of ISDN ATTRIBUTE PRESS FLEX KEY 1 4 CO PGM IS
99. AS PGM button Dial 4 2 Dial station range to be alerted if a single station is to receive alerting enter an in place of the second station Press the HOLD SAVE button register a Wake Up time from a station 1 2 3 4 5 Press the TRNAS PGM button Dial 4 1 Dial 4 digit hour and minute for alerting Dial for wake up alarm until cancellation if not wake up alarm is canceled automatically after the first wake up alarm ringing Press the HOLD SAVE button lt cancel a Wake Up time from a station 1 Press the TRNAS PGM button 2 Dial 4 2 3 Press the HOLD SAVE button Conditions 1 wake up signaling if user lifts handset the user receives MOH 2 Ring signal 30 Secs On amp 90 Secs Off 3 times After that the ring signal will be transferred to Attendant station LCD at Attendant displays the designated station 3 Time hh mm must be entered Military Format 4 During wake up ring when user goes to off hook the wake up will be answered will be heard and the RS 232C message will be printed If user goes to off hook during wake ring pause time 90 seconds only the RS 232C message will be printed as answered Programming lt Wake up Fail Ring Timer System Timer Program main menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu21 Hardware None 66 GDK 20W Programming Manual 35 Voice Mail Group Description The system can accommodate m
100. AULT TERMINAL MENU LED RANGE REMARK 1 SMDR Print NO OFF YES NO The system can be set to real time print either all Enable outgoing calls or only limit set by SMDR timer in SYSTEM TIMER PROGRAM Main Menu 6 Print Type All Call All Call The system can be set to record either all outgoing calls or ON Long only long distance calls exceeding time limit set by SMDR YES NO If this option PIC is set to YES all incoming calls are printed with either all outgoing calls or long distance calls Note SMDR output for incoming calls does not include CLI 8 Rate 2400 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 baud Distance timer The long distance calls are identified by SMDR long 3 Print Incoming NO OFF Call information 6 5 SMDR Save NO OFF YES NO The system can be set to record either all outgoing calls ALL or only limit set by SMDR timer in SYSTEM TIMER PROGRAM Main Menu 6 distance code programming 4 SMDR Print Baud 1 The baud rate for the printer can be set to 300 600 1200 Record In Detail YES ON YES NO If this field is set as NO the customer can see not the detailed call information but information of total call total metering count and total cost for individual station for SMDR Save Record Otherwise the customer can see TABLE 11 2 21 Button Configuration for SMDR Attributes Sub Menu 8 of SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM 9 DIAL SPEED RATIO SUB MENU 9 PROCEDURE SYS CO SPEED RATIO 1
101. AY RECORDING saci oh 64 GDK 20W Programming Manual OTP ALARM nial 65 66 5 ne kind esI EE 67 AUTOTRELEASE BITTON eo uq 67 AUTOMATIC SPEAKER ACTIVATIOD 5 225 55 otto ebat dne ets ua tt tete ee PR e e sen petente 67 CALL ANNOUNCE W HF ANSWER BACK eu Pre Eee e perse Eta tienes 68 CALLE VI BIS aulicis end 68 GALL FORWARD eec 68 Call Forward Unconditional 68 Call Forward Busy No Answer 69 Call Forward Off Net 70 Call Forward Incoming CO Line Off Net 71 CALE WAITING CAMP ON a teh ect I E 72 DAY NIGHT CLASS OF SERVICE 0 9 nL EA LAEE LL EEA LEEA ALEEA E 73 DISTURB nenei ten A 74 ICM DIAL TONE REORDER ICM 02 74 ICM SIGNAL MODE SELECTION cccecscsessecsesecsecsesecsesses
102. Base Station 2 Base Station LCOB LCOB2 STIB STIB2 STA 100 103 DKTU 4 port with 4 Simultaneous 8 Simultaneous 104 105 SLT 2B Wireless Calls Wireless Calls LCOB 2LCO STA 106 109 LKD 2B LCOB2 4 In primary 100 103 STIB 1TO WHTU 110 129 STIB2 1TO 1T0 1S0 CO CO1 CO8 or 1 4 and 4 SO Station 130 133 1 8 GDK 20W STATION CONFIGURATION WITH LKD 2B DEFAULT STA NUMBER 4 2B 2slt 100 105 4 LKD 2B Primary devices and 2 slits 106 109 Secondary devices of 100 103 LKD 2B DKTU 110 129 Wireless Telephones 130 133 4 SO stations two STIB2 SLOTs 1 LKD 2B occupies 4 station numbers one for the Primary device and the other for the Secondary device It can be connected to Basic 4 DKT ports 2 If LKD 2B is connected to any 4 DKT port in MBU it occupies only 1 station number for the Primary device It means that the station can not have any Secondary device even if there is DTIU or SLIU for the Secondary device In it 3 LKD 2B without either DTIU or SLIU Basic LKD 2B occupies 1 station number for the Primary device 4 Note DTIU SLIU are the sub boards in LKD 2B for the Secondary device DKTU or SLT 1 9 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF STATIONS IN GDK 20W 34 PORTS 100 105 4 Basic ports and 2 Basic slt ports 106 109 4 Secondary devices for 4 basic DKT ports 20 110 129 Registrable Max Wireless Telephones Max Simultaneous Wireless Call 12 4 130 133 4
103. CK UP Description Tone ringing Intercom calls incoming CO Lines recalling CO Lines and transferred CO Lines can be answered by a station other than the ringing station Operation lt answer a call ringing at a station in your system 1 Liftthe Handset 2 Dial Pick Up code 66 Conditions 1 If an announced transfer is picked up the CO Line will be connected to the pickup station 2 or P terminated ICM call cannot be picked 59 GDK 20W Programming Manual 3 Ringing station will be picked up first When there is no ringing station then Muted Ring will be picked up second The user must have a LOOP button or the CO button to pick up a CO line If more than one call is ringing at the phone and call pick up is done the pick up will be performed using the preferred line answer order 1 ICM ring 2 transferred ling 3 recall 4 incoming CO 6 If more than one call which have the same priority is ringing at the telephone the oldest call is pick up T When picking up a transferred CO line or incoming CO line recall intercom call the line is automatically connected 8 This code can be flexibly assigned to a Flex button Programming Hardware None 28 STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SMDR Description Station Message Detail Recording SMDR will provide details on both incoming and outgoing calls Based on programming the system will output incoming and or outgoing Local and or
104. CO 1 or 4602 eos 00 i662 Cae 80 STA 104 STA 104 STA 104 STA 104 STA 108 STA 108 STA 108 25 44 Empty Empty MINININ NI AJOJN TABLE 11 2 7 Initial Button Configurations Sub Menu 6 of STATION BASE PROGRAM FLEX KEY TYPE 1 24 1 User Button iu O o o o o Line 1 8 eo S TABLE 11 2 8 Button Configuration For Flexible Button Assignments Sub Menu 6 of STATION BASE PROGRAM 181 GDK 20W Programming Manual 7 WARM LINE SELECTION SUB MENU 7 Idle Line Selection for a station is which is assigned to warm line is activated when user takes no action for Warm Line Timer after lifting handset or pressing MON button Warm line is programmable at Sub menu 7 of STATION BASE PROGRAM All stations are not assigned any Idle Line Selection by default PROCEDURE STA PGM 100 133 1 Select WARM LINE SELECTION menu by pressing a flex key 7 PRESS FLEX KEY 1 8 STA PGM 100 133 WARM LIN 2 LCD will show the current status Dial type and number serially Refer CO4 DIAL TYPE 1 4 Table 11 2 9 The changed status will be displayed on the LCD e Press SPEED button to delete Warm Line Selection e SLT can t program Warm Line Selection STA PGM 100 133 WARM LIN 3 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently COGRP3 DIAL TYPE 1 4 TABLE 11 2 9 Button Configuration for Warm Line Sele
105. CO Line using TRANSFER I button 2 If the station initiating the transfer hangs up before completing the dialing of a station number the line will immediately recall the station 3 If a Wireless Terminal tries to transfer a call to a key station in HF or PV mode and the key station doesn t answer the Wireless Terminal may retrieve the call by pressing TRANSFER button Programming lt Transfer Recall Timer Station Timers main menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu3 lt Hold Recall Timer Station Timers main menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu4 148 GDK 20W Programming Manual Attendant Recall Timer Station Timers main menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu5 lt Hook Switch Flash Timer Station Timers main menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu16 Hardware 7 DIRECT CO LINE RINGING WIRELESS TERMINAL Description A Wireless Terminal can be arranged as direct ringing CO lines Operation A Wireless Terminal designated as a direct ringing line will ring when the CO line rings in The Wireless Terminal rings in the CO line distinctive mode When the Wireless Terminal answers by pressing ON OFF button they are directly connected to the CO line Conditions 1 Ringing can be assigned for day or night 2 Aringing Wireless Terminal is considered as busy Programming lt Line Ring Assignment CO Line Base Program
106. CO line by depressing the CO button The first CO line goes on Hold automatically Conditions 1 The CO lines that are put on Hold by this feature will follow the Hold Preference 2 is no limit to the amount of lines that can be put on Hold by this feature 3 AWireless Terminal does not support this feature Programming lt Preference System Base Program Main Menu5 System Attribute Sub Menu1 Terminal Menu1 lt Automatic Hold Station Base Program Main Menu2 Station Attribute Sub Menu1 Terminal Menu9 Related Features Hardware None 3 AUTOMATIC PAUSE INSERTION Description The system will automatically insert a timed pause in a Speed Dial or Redial number if a Flash or PABX access code is included in the number Analog CO Line only Operation Operation of this feature is automatic Conditions 1 The automatically inserted pause does not count as a digit stored in speed dial numbers 2 Pause Timer is determined by CO parameter programming 3 P for Pause will be displayed onto LCD in case of a programmed pause command only Programming Pause Timer System Timers Main Menu6 System Timer 1 Sub menu 1 Terminal Menu Hardware None 85 GDK 20W Programming Manual 4 Call Park Description A CO line connected to a station can be placed into a parking location and can be retrieved by the originating or any other station if the corresponding park cod
107. CR Database Print Printed only when LCR feature is included 10 HUNT Table Prit P 1 AllDatabase Prit Print Above 9 menu serially TABLE 11 2 41 Button Configuration for DATABASE Print Main Menu 12 Printing Example 220 GDK 20W Programming Manual Printing Example This printing example is in case of GDK 20W system Station Database CO Line Database STATION DATABASE lt STA 100 gt 1 STATION ATTRIBUTE DND SPDA PAGE FWD PLA SPK ASPK IBOX AHLD DSEC DVU_ACC 3 1KHZ N Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N 2 ISDN ATTRIBUTE SUB ADDR LONG SHORT MSN COLR COLP CLIP CLIS N N N N Y Y 3 COS DAY 1 NIGHT 1 4 CO GROUP ACCESS 1234 5 PRESET CALL FORWARD NOT ASSIGNED 6 FLEX BUTTON ASSIGNMENT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CO1 CO2 CO4 STA100STA101 STA102 STA103 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 STA104 STA105 STA106 STA107 STA108 STA109 STA110 STA111 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 STA112 STA113 STA114 STA115 USER USER USER USER 7 WARM LINE NO 8 PAGE ZONE 1 9 LANGUAGE CODE NORWAY gt except for UK IT and SP STA 101 Printed like above for another station to range end station CO LINE DATABASE 1 CO LINE ATTRIBUTE TYPE SIGNAL UNA FLASH DISA ACT SUPERVISN DID DISA VOICE CO DTMF LOOP N N N 2 ISDN CO LINE ATTRIBUTE COLP DID RN CALL NO TYPE DID USE 0 0 2 N 3 CO GROUP 1 4 DISA TYPE NO DISA 5 CO FLASH TIME 10 10ms 6 CO LOOP SUPERVISION TIME 5 100ms 7 CO RING ASSIGNMEN
108. D DISA FWD TO DVU BUSY CASE NO ANS CASE ATTD NO ANS CASE 224 GDK 20W Programming Manual System Timer Exception Tables SYTEM TIMER SYSTEM TIMER 1 EXCLUSIVE HOLD RECALL TIMER 60sec SYSTEM HOLD RECALL TIMER 30sec TRANSFER RECALL TIMER 30sec RECALL TIMER 30sec ATTENDANT RECALL TIMER 1min CO RING DETECT TIMER 2 100msec CO RING STOP DETECTION TIMER 6sec PAUSE TIMER 3sec CO RELEASE GUARD TIMER 1sec CO DIAL DELAY TIMER 5 100msec PRESET CALL FORWARD TIMER 10sec CALL FORWARD BUSY NO ANSWER TIMER 10sec DID DISA NO ANSWER TIMER 20sec UNSUPERVISED CONF TIMER 10min MSG WAIT REMINDER TONE TIMER Omin HOOK SWITCH FLASH TIMER 50 10msec DOOR OPEN TIMER 20 100msec INTER DIGIT TIMER 5sec WARM LINE TIMER 5sec SMDR TIMER Osec WAKE UP FAIL RING TIMER 20sec FAX TONE DETECT TIMER 5sec FAX CO CALL TIMER 2min DVU USER RECORD TIMER 30sec SYSTEM TIMER 2 1 DVU FORWARD ANSWER TIMER 4sec 2 DVU VALID USER MSG TIMER 4sec HUNT DISCONNECT TIMER 1min EXCEPTION TABLES 1 ALLOW TABLE A ENTRY 01 20 MAX 8 DIGIT 1 E 2 E 3 E 4 E 5 6 E 7 E 8 E 9 E 10 E 11 E 12 E 13 E 14 E 15 E 16 E 17 E 18 E 19 E 20 E 2 DENY TABLE ENTRY 01 10 MAX 8 DIGIT 1 E 2 E 3 E 4 E 5 E 6 E 7 E 8 E 9 10 E ALLOW TABLE B 01 20 MAX 8 DIGIT 1 E 2 E 3 E 4 E 5 E 6 E 7 E 8 E 9 E 10 E 11 E 1
109. D SAVE button only when Hold Preference is set as System Hold lt To place a CO Line on System Hold from an SLT Make Hook flash and dial 5 9 only when Hold Preference is set as System Hold lt a CO Line on System Hold from a Keyset 1 Liftthe Handset or press the MON button 2 Press the CO Line button 3 or Dial 8 and the CO Line number To access a CO Line on System Hold from a SLT 1 Lift the Handset 2 Dial 8 3 Dial 8 and the CO Line number Condition System Hold is not available in a Wireless Terminal Programming lt Hold Preference System Base Program Main Menu5 System Attribute Sub Menu1 Terminal Menu1 lt System Hold Recall Timer 99 GDK 20W Programming Manual System Timers Main Menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu2 lt Hold Recall Timer System Timers Main Menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu4 Attendant Recall Timer System Timers Main Menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu5 Hardware None 21 HOLD PREFERENCE Description A user can place a CO Line call in a waiting state so that others may or may not access the held CO Line System and Exclusive Hold respectively Operation Operation of this feature is automatic as programmed Programming lt Hold Preference System Base Program Main Menu5 System Attribute Sub Menu1 Terminal Menu1 Hardware None 22 INCOMIN
110. DD NNNNNNN YY gt SSSIf This is printed when 1 DID destination station is determined 2 DISA caller dials station number Type3 4 XX DDDDDDDDDD NNNNNNN YY gt SSSIf This is printed when a station answers incoming calls 89 GDK 20W Programming Manual Line Feed 0x0A Control Character 0x06 Control Character 0x06 Blank ASCII space XX CO Line Number YY SSS DDD DD CLI Calling Line Identification NNN NN Name of speed bin that is matched with CLI ex gt LGE SW TEAM Speed bin number that is matched with CLI ex gt 30 Ringing extension number Answer extension number il 9 3 To display CLI Name Both CLIP and CLI Name Display should be programmed as Yes To print out incoming call s CLI 1 Print Incoming call Main menu 5 8 3 should be programmed as Yes When incoming calls come with CLI at If CLI number is matched with a speed dial bin and the speed dial bin has a name the name will be shown But if it is not matched or saved without name then only CLI number will appears When incoming calls are answered the lower right part of LCD time indication part is replaced by 00 00 00 N indicating connection time To see the CLI Name when user retrieves CLI Message Wait at DKTU 1 CLI message wait will be shown on LCD 2 Press CALLBK key 3 Then message contents name or number date and time will be shown on LCD Date will be displayed with MM DD fo
111. DN ATTR COLP 4 LCD will show the current status Dial COLP number then entered data will COLP NO 0 10 be displayed on LCD CO PGM ISDN ATTR COLP 5 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently 3 DIAL COLP NO 0 10 01 10 Indicate a entry of Outgoing COLP table ADM 4 8 DID RN 00 99 00 Do not ignore 01 99 Indicate a ignored called party number DID RN DID Remove number from called party information Unknown number International type National number Not used Subscriber number type Not used Not used Not used No send COLP CONOOBR co TYPE OF CALLING NUMBER 4 DID Use YES NO Note If LCO line is set as DID it is not guaranteed that incoming LCO call will be correctly handled by the system It is strongly recommended that LCO should not be set as DID TABLE 11 2 11 ISDN CO Line Attribute Sub menu 2 of CO LINE BASE PROGRAM 1 COLP COnnected Line identification Presentation 185 GDK 20W Programming Manual 3 Line Group Assignment SUB MENU 3 CO groups should be assigned according to CO Type etc Default gives CO Group 1 for all stations There can be 4 CO groups PROCEDURE Enter CO line range Ex 1 4 ENTER CO RANGE 1 8 CO PGM 1 4 PRESS FLEX 1 7 CO PGM 1 4 GROUP ASSIGN 3 To program dial a digit appropriating to CO group number 1 DIAL GRP 1 4 CO PGM 1 4 GROUP ASSIGN 4 Press HOLD SAV
112. Default NO If ISDN Station is allowed sub addressing by admin program in any station user who wants to call to ISDN station has to dial the station No and sub address for that ISDN station For using ISDN Station s Sub Address there is further program on the ISDN Devices Please consult your ISDN Devices manual for programming ISDN Device s Sub Address Sub Address is useful to the following Features for decoding the single ISDN Device from ISDN Devices on the same S Interface bus 1 Intercom Call to ISDN Station 2 DID Call to ISDN Station 3 DISA Call to ISDN Station On the other features Sub Addressing does not effect ISDN Station s behavior 3 ISDN MSN Addressing MSN Addressing can be programmed by Station Base Program Main Menu2 ISDN Station Attribute Sub Menu2 MSN Terminal Menu3 its range is YES NO Default NO If ISDN station is allowed MSN addressing by admin program in any station user who wants to call to ISDN station has to dial the station No and MSN address for that ISDN station For using ISDN Station s MSN Address there is further program on the ISDN Devices Please consult your ISDN Devices manual for programming ISDN Device s MSN Address 130 GDK 20W Programming Manual MSN Address is useful to the following Features for decoding the single ISDN Device from ISDN Devices on the same S Interface bus 1 Intercom Call to ISDN Station 2 DID Call to ISDN Station 3 DISA Call to ISD
113. E 4 3 Party 10 Digits Not Conference Code Assigned Loopback Yes No No 233 GDK 20W Programming Manual TABLE 13 9 4 SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM MAIN MENU 5 DELE TERMINAL MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK SYSTEM 1 Hold Preference SYS EXC ATTRIBUTES YES NO External Night Ring YES NO Multi line Conference YES NO 5 CO Line Choice Last Choice Last Choice Round robin 64 Override 4st CO Group YES NO 7 Analog Long Short Long Short Short Spain version only RUE Night DVU YES NO YES NO SET SYSTEM STA No 100 ICM box cannot be 2Digit or 3Digit 4st assigned as attendant station DATE TIME LCD DISPLAY 1 4 3 1 24 DD MM YY MODE 12 2 24 MM DD YY DD MM YY 13 12 DD MM YY 4 12 MM DD YY PBX ACCESS CODE MAX 2 Digits Not Assigned 4 PBX Access Code DID DISA 1 Destination ATD Tone fone pn DESTINATION 2 Error Destination ATD Tone DISA RETRY DISA Retry Counter COUNTER SMDR 1 SMDR Print Enable YES NO NO ATTRIBUTES SMDR Recording Call All Call da EA All Call Type da EA 3 Print Incoming Call YES SMDR Print Baud Rate 1 300Bps RS 232C 2 600Bps 3 1200Bps 4 2400Bps 5 4800Bps 6 9600Bps 7 19200Bps 8 38400Bps 60 40 or 66 33 10 PPS Only 66 33 1 Alarm Enable YES NO NO Alarm Contact Type Close Open Alarm Signal Mode Repeat Once External Control 1 First Contact None Con
114. E button for updating database permanently GRP2 DIAL GRP 1 4 Press flex button 3 to enter LINE GROUP ASSIGNMENT menu of LINE BASE PROGRAM S 4 DISA TYPE SUB MENU 4 PROCEDURE 1 Enter line range 1 4 ENTER RANGE 1 8 CO PGM 1 4 2 Press flex button 4 to enter DISA TYPE menu of CO LINE BASE PRESS FLEX KEY 1 7 PROGRAM PGM 1 4 DISA TYPE 3 To program Dial a digit 0 3 0 No DISA 1 Day DISA 2 Night DISA 3 Day Night DISA Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently C CO PGM 1 4 DISA TYPE DAY DIAL TYPE 0 3 SUBMENU DEFAULT REMARK DISA TYPE NO DISA Each CO line in the system can be programmed as DISA Direct Inward System Access line and DISA types are like this DISA U 1 Day Only D 2 Night Only N 3 Day Night Both B TABLE 11 2 12 CO DISA TYPE Sub Menu 4 of CO LINE BASE PROGRAM 5 FLASH TIMER SUB MENU 5 User can initiate an open loop or ground flash across a CO line for receiving CO dial tone or transferring a PABX In this case flash maintains for CO Flash Timer Default of CO Flash Timer is 50 PROCEDURE CO PGM 1 Enter CO line range Ex 1 4 ENTER CO RANGE 1 8 CO 1 4 2 Press flex button 5 to enter CO FLASH TIMER menu of CO LINE BASE PRESS FLEX KEY 1 7 PROGRAM LCD shows the current flash timer CO PGM 1 4 FLASH TIME 3 Enter CO Flash Ti
115. EY 1 17 sub menu number If you press A or V button same level menu message will be displayed on LCD one after another 194 GDK 20W Programming Manual LCD Display of Sub Menu in SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM LCD Display FLEX KEY SYS PGM ATTRIBUTE 1 System Attribute PRESS FLEX KEY 1 6 SYS PGM ATTENDANT ASSIGN 2 Attendant Assignment 100 DIAL STA NO SYS PGM SET DATE TIME 3 Setting System DATE TIME 98 04 22 13 21 10DIGIT SYS PGM LCD DISPLAY MODE 4 LCD DATA TIME Display Mode 12 DDMMYY DIAL MODE 1 4 SYS PGM PBX CODE 5 PBX Access Code PRESS FLEX KEY 1 4 SYS PGM DID DISA DEST 6 DID DISA Destination PRESS FLEX KEY 1 2 SYS PGM DISA RETRY COUNT 7 DISA Retry Counter 3 DIAL DIGIT 1 9 SYS PGM SMDR ATTRIBUTE 8 SMDR Attribute PRESS FLEXKEY 1 4 SYS PGM CO SPEED RATIO 9 Pulse Dial Speed Ratio 66 33 SYS PGM ALARM ATTRIBUTE 10 Alarm Attribute PRESS FLEX KEY 1 3 SYS PGM EXT CONTACT 11 External Control Contact PRESS FLEX KEY 1 2 SYS PGM BGM TYPE 12 BGM Background Music Type INTERNAL DIAL DIGIT 1 3 SYS PGM MOH TYPE 13 MOH Music On Hold Type INTERNAL DIAL DIGIT 1 2 SYS PGM SYSTEM GAIN System Gain PRESS RX DEV TYPE FLX1 7 lt gt SYS FAX TRANS LINE 15 FAX Transfer CO Line 0 DIAL DIGIT 1 8 SYS PGM EXT PAGE STATION 16 External Page Station DIAL STA NO SYS DID DISA FWD TO DVU DID DISA Forward to DVU PRESS FLEX KEY 1 3 SYS PGM CCR TABLE CCR Table PRESS
116. F NO KEYPAD DTMF This field determines that ISDN station sends digit in DTMF or FACILITY keypad facility after connected Table 11 2 3 ISDN STATION ATTRIBUTES SUB MENU 2 of STATION BASE PROGRAM 178 GDK 20W Programming Manual 3 STATION COS SUB MENU 3 Default gives all stations COS 1 for day and night operation Each station must be assigned a class of service which governs that station s toll restriction for the day and night operation Table 11 2 4 PROCEDURE STA 100 133 1 Select COS menu by pressing a flex key 3 PRESS FLEX 1 8 STA 100 133 cos 2 Dial 2 digit 11 77 for Day Night COS LCD displays the current COS 11 DIAL 2 DIGITS D N A Move to the next terminal menu CO LINE GROUP ACCESS Move to the previous terminal menu ISDN STATION ATTRIBUTE STA PGM 100 133 cos 3 Press HOLD SAVE or A V 22 DIAL 2 DIGITS D N HOLD SAVE updates database permanently LCD displays the current COS STA COS 1 No restrictions are placed at the station for dialing STA COS 6 The leading digits can not be a Long Distance code Only 8 digits maximum can be dialed STA COS 7 Not use a CO Line Only allowed to make an intercom call and to receive any calls STA COS 5 The leading digits can not be Long Distance code TABLE 11 2 4 Station Class Of Service Sub Menu 3 of STATION BASE PROGRAM 4 CO LINE GROUP ACCESS SUB MENU 4 If you want to change CO line gro
117. G CO RING ASSIGNMENT TO HUNT GROUP Description Incoming CO ring DID MSN DISA can be assigned to Station Group so that incoming CO call will hunt for an idle station in the group according to Hunt Type Circular Terminal UCD and Ring Operation Conditions 1 Hunt group has the precedence for ring assignment So if the CO ring is assigned to a hunt group and any internal station that is not a member of that group then ring is distributed only to hunt group 2 The system does not give ring to the station in DND or Call Forward 3 The call will continue to route until each station in the group has been tried The call will remain at the last station of the group 4 the stations in the Hunt Group are busy busy tone provided to the CO line 5 the stations in the Hunt Group are busy the call is queued and CO party hears ring back tone As soon as any station in the group becomes idle it receives the ring from the queued line This does not apply to Ring Group and DID MSN DISA ring If all the stations in Ring Group are busy the DID MSN DISA call is not queued but is routed in the same way as it is routed when outside caller dialed a busy station DID DISA Busy Destination Main menu 5 sub menu 6 terminal menu 1 Programming Line Ring Assignment Base Program Main Menu Sub Menu 7 Terminal Menu2 Group Type Assignment Station Group Program Main Menu 11 Hunt Group Program Sub Me
118. GDK 20W Programming Manual Digital Wireless Key Telephone System Programming Manual MODEL GDK 20W GDK 20W Programming Manual ISSUE 1 0 ISSUE 1 1 ISSUE 1 2 ISSUE 2 0 ISSUE 2 1 ISSUE 2 2 ISSUE 3 0 DATE 1999 08 1999 10 2000 12 2001 03 2001 06 2001 11 2002 05 REVISION HISTORY DESCRIPTION Initial Release Revised Admin Programming 1 Nation Specific Document for UK is modified BASIC version S W is released and some new features are implemented The BASIC Ill features are included in the Feature Description amp Admin Programming parts Separated section of BASIC III Features is removed The BASIC III features are as follows n Circular Terminal hunt group an incoming call will continued to be routed until every station in the group has been tried When Circular Terminal UCD group member presses button while ringing the ring at the station stops and the next available member starts ringing When a CO line call is transferred to hunt group the transferred CO line call will follow the hunt process Intercom call and CO line transfer to ring group are available DID Day Night Destination DID DISA CO line calls and internal calls made to the busy station in call forward to DVIB is routed to DVIB LCR feature is also applied after seizing CO line by pressing CO key or LOOP key DKTU user can have multiple LOOP keys Night DVU Main Menu 5 Te
119. INE GROUP ee teer cue pull DL I LP 92 CO LINE RELEASE GUARD 2 tert 92 QUEUING natis imet ectetur eee tee ette aote trt adhe ede teet 93 DID MSN DAY NIGHT DESTINATION eerte tereti 94 DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS EE LE EAI EEE EEE 94 FLASH CO LINE DIAL TONE 0 95 FLEXIBLE CO LINE ACCESS scie te tmi tte editi dee e edet n n etit te tide tete tud 96 FLEXIBLE CO LINE RING ASSIGNMENT 0 97 FLEXIBLE CO LINE RING 97 HOLD EXCLUSIVE W RECALL tecti 97 HOLD 2 5 RB Dn Ue ee bind 98 eee teet idle ca itte aae ite etie ti 99 INCOMING CO RING ASSIGNMENT TO HUNT 2 99 ECRAEEASTIOCOSTROUTING Set ced bec E P LUE 100 LCR WITH DISA ACCESS 3 bn eio 102 MULTIPLE LOOP KEYS ute tdt ote tede e i tette tis bia 102 MUSIC Dus cd fet scade LL 103 NS Iliescu ct reed atta
120. K 20W Programming Manual 26 3 PAGE MEET ME Description A user may respond to a page from any station and connect to the paging party for a private conversation Operation lt respond to Meet Me page 1 Dial Meet Me code 6 or press flashing HOLD SAVE button 2 Connection with paging party is establish and zone returns to idle Conditions 1 During a page paged person goes to the first available station and dials the Code 6 or press the flashing HOLD SAVE button 2 A station may answer a Meet Me Page from any station regardless of paging assignment 3 This code can be flexibly assigned to a Flex button Page can be responded from any station in the system regardless of page group assignment and page accessibility Programming Hardware None 26 4 PAGE ACCESS RESTRICTION Description Stations can be programmed such that they are denied access to page zones When so programmed the station can not connect to or make a page announcement Operation Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed Conditions When station programmed for paging access restriction can still answer meet me page request 2 An error tone is presented to the user if the station is restricted from page access Programming lt Access Station Base Program main menu2 Station Attributes Sub Menu Terminal menu3 Hardware None 26 5 External Paging Description 58 GDK 20
121. KK 153 SYSTEM SPEED LEEA EEEIEE EEA EEEE EE n 154 STATION NUMBER RECOVERY akan 154 10 PC RELATED FEATURES 155 erwies 155 PC ADMIN ae ee LE M M M E 155 SOFTWARE UPGRADE tate ly ae 156 GDK 20W Programming Manual SOFTWARE UPGRADE S REMOTE 2t mena eet e be eus Lu nadie CE DH 157 QE PEdXeclicullcme 159 ut zii P 159 SENI iS DEG e M 159 11 1 2 ENTER THE PROGRAMMING uix st aera etra paa 159 157432 MOW PIROGRA Me E pe syed ue 159 BUTTON DERINITION LER 160 TETS SADMIN PROGRAMMING INDEX et erem 161 DEEFAULT VALUES 2 Roa ene S 163 cie ET 174 11 2 1 DATABASE INITIALIZATION MAIN MENU 1
122. LD SAVE button for updating database permanently ISDN Hold Code Max 10 Digits Not Assigned ISDN Retrieve Code Max 10 Digits Not Assigned 50 ISDN 3 Conference Code Max 10 Digits Not Assigned TABLE 11 2 17 Button Configuration for ISDN Supplementary Code Sub Menu 13 of ISDN PROGRAM 193 GDK 20W Programming Manual 7 LOOP BACK SUB MENU 14 Loop Back is used only for test Default value of Loop Back is No ISDN PROGRAM 1 Press flex button 14 of the 1 14 PRESS FLEX KEY 1 14 ISDN PGM LOOP BACK 2 Current assigned Loop Back is displayed on LCD e Press flex key to change ISDN PGM LOOP BACK 3 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently YES 2 11 2 5 SYSTEM BASE PROGRAMMING MAIN MENU 5 To change system parameters select the main menud by pressing flex key When programming LCD LED s indicate current programmed data and programming status If the programmer enters correct data then LCD and LED s show the entered data and the data is stored in the temporary buffer area After pressing the HOLD SAVE button all data in the temporary buffer same as LCD LED s show their status are copied into permanent system memory ADMIN PROGRAM START 1 If you select SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM following message will be displayed on PRESS FLEX 1 12 LCD SYS PGM 2 Press one of the FLEX key 1 17 which you want Each flex key number means PRESS FLEX K
123. Long Distance only calls will be output The format of the individual call records is illustrated below NO STA CO TIME START DIALED ACG CNT COST ACT CODE AAA DD DD DD FF FF FF II KKKKK 555555555 VVVVVVVVVVVV NNNN 4 digit sequence number range 0001 9999 AAA 2 3 digit station call originator field BB 2digit CO line accessed field DD DD DD A 8 digit call duration field HH MM SS FF FF FF An 8 digit month day and year of call origination MM DD YY 5 digit time of day call origination H A Call type indicator incoming O outgoing T transferred t Incoming transfer Dial digit field 24 digit 2 digit Account Group field Not Implemented Yet KKKKK 5 digit Metering count field Not Implemented Yet 555555555 9 Digit call cost field Not Implemented Yet VVVVVVVVVVVV 12 Digit account code field Not Implemented Yet Operation Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed and printer attached Conditions 1 call is ended by a power failure then no SMDR record will be produced for the call 2 For ISDN line outgoing call call duration for SMDR is counted when CONNECT message from network So when user hangs up before remote party does not answer then call duration O 00 00 00 is printed even though LCD call duration shows some time Programming lt SMDR Start Ti
124. M Conditions 1 Both Keypad protocol and functional protocol are implemented 2 FLASH and HOLD keys or pre programmed SUPP HOLD are needed for this feature SUPP HOLD key can be made by Code TRNAS PGN 75 3 ISDN Call Hold feature is available during conversation 4 The line which is associated with this ISDN supplementary service can not be transferred to other stations or can not be retrieved from other stations And the held channel can be retrieved only by the station which held the channel before 5 When a call is on hold the associated LED for the line will flash at 480 IPM in the station that uses the line And all the LED s will be ON busy in the other stations 6 When a call is on hold and the user make a new call the associated LED for the line at the station will be ON Programming ISDN Service ISDN Program Main Menu 4 ISDN Supplementary Service Sub Menu 13 Terminal Menu 1 ISDN Hold Code ISDN Program Main Menu 4 ISDN Supplementary Service Sub Menu 13 Terminal Menu 2 ISDN Retrieve Code ISDN Program Main Menu 4 ISDN Supplementary Service Sub Menu 13 Terminal Menu 3 134 GDK 20W Programming Manual 4 ISDN Broker Call Description This feature allows a station user engaged in one ISDN line to hold that call and can originate another call by using the same channel Once the second call is established the originating station may alternate betw
125. MMING INDEX FLEX KEY MAIN MENU FLEXKEY SUBMENU INITIALIZATION Station Database Initialization DB INIT CO Line Database Initialization ISDN Tables Database Initialization System Feature Database Initialization System Timer Database Initialization Toll Table Database Initialization Authorization Code Table Database Initialization Flexible Station Number Initialization Flexible Button Program Initialization LCR Database Initialization Hunt Group Voice Mail Table initialization All Database Initialization STATION BASE PROGRAM Station Attribute STA PGM ISDN Station Attribute Station Class Of Service CO Line Group Access Preset Call Forward Flex Buttons Assignment Warm Line Selection Page Zone Language Code CO LINE BASE PROGRAM CO Line Attribute CO PGM ISDN CO Line Attribute Group Assignment DISA Type CO Flash Timer CO Loop Supervision Timer CO Line Ring Assignment ISDN PROGRAM TEI Type ISDN PGM Calling Sub Address Incoming Zero Insertion Outgoing Zero Insertion Outgoing Check Digit My Area Code My Nation Code Internal Code COLP Table Entry no 01 10 MSN Table Entry no 01 24 DID Digit Conversion Table Transfer Code Supplementary service Loop back SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM System Attribute SYS PGM Attendant Assignment Setting System Date Time LCD Date Time Display Mode PBX Access Code DID DISA Destination DISA Retry Counter SMDR Attributes Pulse Dial Speed Ratio Alarm Attributes External Control Contact BGM Back G
126. Manual Station Group VM Table HUNT GROUP PROGRAM HUNT GROUP 61 1 HUNT GROUP TYPE NONE 2 HUNT GROUP MEMBER NOT ASSIGNED 3 HUNT GROUP ATTRIBUTE NOT ASSIGNED HUNT GROUP 62 1 HUNT GROUP CIR 2 HUNT GROUP MEMBER 100 101 3 HUNT GROUP ATTRIBUTE CIR TERM NO ANSWER TIMER 5sec CIR TERM RING TIMER 20sec HUNT GROUP 63 1 HUNT GROUP TYPE NONE 2 HUNT GROUP MEMBER NOT ASSIGNED 3 HUNT GROUP ATTRIBUTE NOT ASSIGNED HUNT GROUP 64 1 HUNT GROUP TYPE NONE 2 HUNT GROUP MEMBER NOT ASSIGNED 3 HUNT GROUP ATTRIBUTE NOT ASSIGNED VOICE MAIL DIALING TABLE PUT MAIL PREFIX P SUFFIX E GET MAIL PREFIX P SUFFIX E BUSY PREFIX P 3P SUFFIX E NO ANSWER PREFIX P 4P SUFFIX E ERROR PREFIX P 5P SUFFIX E PREFIX P 6P SUFFIX E DISCONNECT TBL Database Print above all 227 GDK 20W Programming Manual 12 9 SPAIN 1 Features NONPROGRAMMABLE DATA AND FEATURES FEATURE OTHERS SPAIN Dialed digit service after ISDN CO Dialed digits are saved into LNR Dialed digits are not saved into LNR remote party answer 2 digits and displayed on LCD digits and not displayed on LCD Dial Tone Detect Manual and Not available Dial Tone Detect Dial Tone Detect time Not available 12 Seconds ss When no dial tone CO goes to idle Time to the first digit to PX when gt 3 seconds lt 3 seconds O G Call LCO Shorter pause time than
127. Menu 4 Sub Menu 3 My Area Code ISDN Program Main Menu 4 Sub Menu 6 My Nation Code ISDN Program Main Menu 4 Sub Menu 7 International Access Code ISDN Program Main Menu 4 Sub Menu 8 Hardware 7 ISDN Loop Back ON OFF Description ISDN Loop Back feature is controlled both by hardware switch SW1 2 GDK 20W MBU and software Admin programming The switch SW1 2 must be turned on in order to enable Loop Back function Otherwise it is impossible to use Loop Back feature In addition Loop Back feature should be enabled in Admin programming If this feature is not enabled both by hardware and software Loop Back is ignored and normal operation is assumed This prevents users from enabling Loop Back feature by setting the switch SW1 2 ON by mistake while setting SW1 1 For database protection Operation Conditions 1 When user programs Loop Back as Yes and sets SWT7 2 at position On then all SO and TO port maximum 3 ports are in loop back mode 2 When user programs Loop Back as Yes and sets SW 2 at position On then data from outside system are loop back so data from outside can not be sent into system 3 This feature is only for ISDN type approval So during normal use do not program Loop Back as Yes nor set SWT7 2 at position On Programming ISDN Loop Back On Off ISDN Program Main Menu 4 Sub Menu 14 Hardware 1 Switch SW1 2 on GDK 20W MBU 8 ISDN Transpare
128. N Busy Tone 0 35 sec ON 0 35 sec OFF Repeat 0 3 sec 0 3 sec OFF Repeat EU 0 2 sec 0 2 sec OFF Repeat Sweden 0 25 sec ON 0 25 sec OFF Repeat Denmark 0 5 sec ON 0 5 sec OFF Repeat CO Ring Back Tone New Zealand 1 sec ON 3 sec OFF Repeat 1 sec ON 2 sec OFF Repeat CO Ring 1 sec ON 4 sec OFF Repeat Italy 0 4 sec ON 0 4 sec OFF 0 4 sec ON 2 sec OFF Repeat LCR Dummy CO Dial Tone j Contnuus O Confirm Tone 1 2 osama Ree 0 5 sec OFF Repeat 0 8 sec OFF Repeat 0 2 sec 0 3 sec OFF 0 7 sec 0 8 sec Off Repeat Others Continuous Error Tone Finland 0 2 sec ON 0 2 sec OFF Repeat Italy Warning Tone 0 25 0 0 2 sec OFF 3 Times 00 intercom Ring 0 6 sec ON 0 2 sec OFF 0 2 sec ON 4 sec OFF Repeat 0 8 sec ON 2 4 sec OFF Repeat Reminder Tone O 5secON 0 5 sec OFF 3 Times Ring Back Tone Australia 0 4 sec ON 0 2 sec OFF 0 4 sec ON 2 sec OFF Repeat New Zealand Denmark 1 sec 4 sec OFF Repeat Finland EU Italy Netherlands Norway 1 5 sec 3 sec OFF Repeat 1 sec ON 5 sec OFF Repeat 1 sec ON 2 sec OFF Repeat SLT SLT RING CADENCE SLT CO Ring 1 sec ON 4 sec OFF Repeat Italy New Zealand 0 4 sec ON 0 2 sec OFF 0 4 sec 2 sec OFF Repeat 1 ON 3 sec OFF Repeat SLT Intercom Ring 1 sec ON 4 sec OFF Repeat 15 GDK 20W
129. N Station On the other features MSN Addressing does not effect ISDN Station s behavior ISDN Intercom Call Any station can call ISDN Devices by dialing station no S Interface has two stations no So user can call ISDN Devices by dialing one of two pre assigned stations no There is no difference between calling ISDN Devices with the two stations no which is assigned the same S Interface If ISDN Device is set to Sub Addressable ISDN it needs further one digit for calling that ISDN Device ISDN CO Line Access CO Line Access of ISDN Device is the same as that of Single Line Telephone SLT CO Line Hold In GDK 20W system does not use DTMF Receiver for recognizing user s dialing digit So if user want to use Hold Transfer Feature on ISDN Device ISDN Device has the capability of sending Keypad Facility Information on the Information Message If possible holding CO Line Call send Keypad Facility then connected CO Line Call is held and user can hear Intercom Dial Tone Retrieving Held CO Line send Keypad Facility then the held CO Line Call is retrieved Please consult your ISDN Device s Manual for sending Keypad Facility after connection CO Line Transfer In GDK 20W system does not use DTMF Receiver for recognizing user s dialing digit So if user want to use Hold Transfer Feature on ISDN Device ISDN Device has the capability of sending Keypad Facility Information on the Information Message If
130. NE BASE PROGRAM MAIN MENU 3 SUB MENU TERMINAL MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK CO Line 1 CO Line Type PBX CO Attributes CO Line Signal Type DTMF Pulse DTMF p Universal Night Answer UNA Yes No 4 Flash Type Ground Loop Loop Only loop type is E L5 DISA Account Loop Supervision Yes No DID DISA Voice Yes No ves 8 CPT Tone Detect 2 ISDN CO Line 1 COLP 00 10 00 Not Assigned Attributes 01 10 indicate an entry of Outgoing COLP table DID_RN 00 99 00 Do not ignore 01 99 indicate an ignored called party number DID_RN DID Remove number from called party information Type of Calling Number 0 Unknown number 1 International type 2 National number 3 Not used 4 Subscriber number 5 Not used 6 Not used 7 Not used 8 No send COLP t em _ YES in emm EE Assign ca A ua T Both Flash Timer Ring to Hunt group 1 000 300 CO Loop 0 20 100 msec base Supervision Timer CO Line Ring 1 Ring to station Station 1 All ring Flex key Round robin Assignment Station2 34 No ring 2 No Day Night No ring 165 GDK 20W Programming Manual TABLE 11 1 6 3 ISDN PROGRAM MAIN MENU 4 FLEX TERMINAL SUB MENU MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK TEI Type Auto Fixed Auto After you change TEI press RESET button 4 Ports on MBU to operate with the new TEI type Calling Sub Yes No If t
131. NO 196 GDK 20W Programming Manual FLEX TERMINAL MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Hold System p If system hold is preferred depress HOLD SAVE button Preference Exclusive and twice for exclusive hold Auto Privacy YES NO ES ON The system can be programmed to override CO line call to gain access to the conversation If privacy is disabled a station privileged to override in PGM 11 joins an existing call in progress Exe When CO lines are marked UNA ring will be sent to LBC1 Ring when an incoming call occurs on those lines during night service Multi Line YES NO O OFF The system allows a conference with multiple CO lines Conference CO Line Choice Last Choice 2 The method of a CO line seizing line group access Round robin Group Night DVU YES NO If Night DVU is enabled DISA CO line are disconnected night mode after night greeting is played to the CO party Music On Camp YES NO NO OFF station can hear music instead of ring back tone when it On makes camp on to another station TABLE 11 2 18 Button Configuration For System Attribute Sub Menu 1 of SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM 2 ATTENDANT STATION SUB MENU 2 Only one station can be assigned as an attendant As a default the first station Ex STN 100 is assigned as a attendant PROCEDURE svs PGM ATTENDENT ASSIGN 1 To assign attendant 100 DIAL STA Enter station number then assigned attendant stat
132. O If this field is set to YES then GDK sends the called extension number in called party number information of setup message to ISDN extension NO COLP YES NO YES see _ CLI NAME Display YES NO this field is ON system checks whether the received CLI is matched with the speed dial data or not If they are matched the speed dial name is displayed DTMF This field determines that PE LEAD ISDN station sends digit in DTMF or keypad facility after connected Day COS Night COS 11 2 Digit 1 Digit Day COS 2 Digi Night COS KEYPAD FACILITY 4 Station CO Group Access 4 Flex CO 4 Station COS 5 Preset Call Station No Not Assigned The ISDN station or ICM box Forward 2Digit or cannot be assigned as 3Digit call forward station 6 Flex Buttons 1 6 Assignment 1 User Button 1 8 2 CO x 3 Reserved 4 LOOP STA No 5 STA SPD Bin 6 SPD xx No 1 99 Not Assigned 1 Flex Button 2 CO Line 3 CO Group 4 Station _______ CU _ _ 2 Page Zone 2 LL pmo 0 Language 1 Under following conditions flex button cannot be assigned as warm line f any station among entered range is SLT or 2B SLT you cannot save input value f you entered the bigger flex button number than stations have you cannot save input value Warm Line Selection 164 GDK 20W Programming Manual TABLE 11 1 6 2 LI
133. O input 6 FLEX BUTTON ASSIGNMENT SUB MENU 6 Flex button program is supported up to 24 Each Flex Button of key station can be assigned as one of the following When a flexible button is programmed as a certain function if there is a flexible button as the same function then the old one is cleared DIGIT to dial TYPE RANGE REMARK ae User Button User can program by button programming procedure x Button CO Group Not available yet gt LOOP STA xxx 100 133 Station No Station number range can be changed 6 9 01 99 Speed Bin TABLE 11 2 6 Button Type For Flexible Button Assignment Sub Menu 6 of STATION BASE PROGRAM STA PGM 100 133 1 Select FLEX BUTTON ASSIGNMENT menu by pressing a flex key 6 PRESS FLEX KEY 1 8 100 133 BUTTON 2 Press a flex key 1 24 to be programmed PRESS FLEX KEY 1 24 STA 100 133 BUTTON 3 The LCD will display the current status of the pressed flex key Dial a digit 1 6 then LCD will display the changed type 01 CO1 DIAL TYPE 1 6 STA 100 133 BUTTON 4 If the pressed type step 4 needs additional data i e Digit 2 3 5 6 dial additional data See Table 11 2 6 01 CO DIAL NO 1 6 STA 100 133 BUTTON PGM 5 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently 01 CO2 DIAL TYPE 1 6 GDK 20W Programming Manual 1 12 Button 44 Button CO 1 CO 1 CO 1 CO 1 CO 1
134. OGRAMMING MAIN MENU 3 When programming LCD and LED s indicate current programmed data and programming status If the programmer enters correct data then LCD and LED s show the entered data and the data is stored in the temporary buffer area To save data permanently press the HOLD SAVE button then all data in the temporary buffer same as LCD and LED s show their status are stored into system memory 1 CO LINE ATTRIBUTE SUB MENU 1 PROCEDURE CO PGM 1 Enter CO line range Ex 1 4 ENTER CO RANGE 1 8 CO PGM 1 4 2 Pressa flex button 1 to enter CO LINE ATTRIBUTE menu PRESS FLEX KEY 1 7 A Move to the next main menu ISDN PROGRAM V Move to the previous main menu STATION BASE PROGRAM CO PGM 1 4 ATTRIBUTE 3 Press a flex button 1 to enter LINE TYPE of CO LINE ATTRIBUTE menu PRESS FLEX KEY 1 7 ATTR 1 4 LINE TYPE 4 To change CO LINE TYPE press flex key 1 for toggle setting CO LCD displays the current status ATTR 1 4 LINE TYPE 5 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently PBX LCD Display of Terminal Menu in CO LINE ATTRIBUTE LCD Display FLEX KEY ATTR 1 8 LINE TYPE 1 COLine Type CO cO ATTR 1 8 SIGNAL TYPE 2 Signal Type DTMF ATTR 1 8 UNA 3 Universal Night Answer UNA NO CO ATTR 1 8 FLASH TYPE 4 CO Flash Type LOOP CO ATTR 1 8 DISA ACCOUNT 5 DISA Account NO CO ATTR 1 8 LOOP 6 Loop Supervision SUPERVS NO CO ATTR 1 6 DVU ANNC
135. Programming Manual 1 6 FREQUENCIES AND TONES A TONE RING DEFAULT FINLAND ITALY NETHERLANDS NEW ZEALAND SWEDEN DIFFERENTIAL RING 1 1000Hz 1020Hz REMINDER TONE 4 CO RING 19 INTERCOM RING 20 ALARM RING 21 CALL WAIT BURST RING 22 QUEUE RING 23 SINGLE ALARM RING 24 e e t DIAL TONE 11 425Hz WARNING 12 J RING ae TONE EIIE RR _RING BACK TONE 6 BUSY TONE 1 ERROR TONE 2 DND TONE 3 CONF TIMEOUT TONE 13 DISSUATION TONE 16 EM EMI RENE PN Reserved 1400Hz HOLD TONE 15 _ 1000Hz ALL CALL PAGE TONE 6 ICM PAGE TONE 7 HFTB WARNING TONE 8 CONFIRMATION TONE 9 SINGLE ERROR TONE 10 __ADMIN ERROR TONE 18 _ LCR Dummy we Dial m 2 1 EUNT X Reserved 1260Hz 1633Hz DUAL HOWLING TONE ae eS DO E 77K RE oman Sela a a CON ep p t 2 e c 16 GDK 20W Pr
136. R Program Main Menu10 Hardware 102 GDK 20W Programming Manual 24 LCR with DISA CO Access Description LCR feature is available when outside caller uses other CO line to make another call if LCR is enabled Operation To use LCR with DISA CO Access from outside 1 Make a call to DISA line 2 Dial CO line access Code 9 3 Dial Authorization code if needed 4 Dial the programmed number in LDT table then modified number is sent to CO line instead of dialed number Conditions Programming DISA Account CO Base Program Main Menu CO Attributes Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 5 DISA Type CO Base Program Main Menu 3 Sub Menu 4 Authorization Code Table Authorization Code Table Main Menu 8 LCR LCR Program Main Menu 10 Hardware None 25 MULTIPLE LOOP KEYS Description DKTU User can have multiple LOOP keys Operation O make a LOOP key at station Press TRNAS PGM key and press a flexible button to program And press TRNAS PGM key and dial 8 6 for LOOP key Press HOLD button to save 1 To make an outgoing call Press one of the pre programmed LOOP keys Then the first available LOOP key LED turns on and user can make an outgoing call To hold the call Press HOLD during CO conversation Then the LOOP key LED starts flashing and outside party hears MOH To seize an held call Press flashing LOOP keys Then the LOOP key LED turns on and user ca
137. S NO this field is set to YES ATTRIBUTE then GDK sends the called extension number in called party sub address information of setup message to ISDN extension 2 Long Short Long Short MSN YES NO If this field is set to YES then GDK sends the called extension number in called party number information of setup message to ISDN extension 4 YESNO ANO 5 COLP YESNO ANO 6 YESNO NO 7 Jeus YESNO CLI NAME Display YES NO NO If this field is ON the system checks whether the received CLI is matched with the speed dial data or not If they are matched the speed dial name is displayed No SUBMENU TERMINAL MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK ISDN STATION KEYPAD FACILITY KEYPAD DTMF This field determines that ATTRIBUTE ISDN station sends digit in or keypad facility after connected 230 GDK 20W Programming Manual STATION COS Day COS Night COS 1177 STATION Group Access 11 2 Digit 48 Digit Day COS 219 Digit Night COS 155 Flex CO GRP 1 X l o Preset Call STA No ot Assigned Forward 2Digit or 3Digit 4th Flex CO GRP 4 The ISDN station or ICM box cannot be assigned as preset call forward station Flex Buttons 1 User Button 1 8 2 00 x 3 Reserved 4 LOOP STA No 5 STA xxx SPD Bin No 6 SPD xx 7 Assignment 2 Page Zone 2 2
138. SE PROGRAM 5 PBX ACCESS CODES SUB MENU 5 Maximum 4 PBX Access Codes are assignable PBX Access Code is 1 or 2 digits number By default PBX Access Codes are not assigned at all PROCEDURE SYS PGM PBX CODE 1 Press one of the flex buttons 1 4 PRESS FLX KEY 1 4 Ex Flex button 1 1 PBX Code PGM PBX cr 1 Current assigned PBX code is displayed on LCD Dial 2 digits or 1 digit for PBX Access code to assign Press SPEED button to delete PBX Access Code SYS PGM PBX CODE 1 3 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently 8 8 198 GDK 20W Programming Manual 6 DID DISA DESTINATION SUB MENU 6 A station can be arranged to forward a DID call to the attendant if the station is busy Vacant or invalid calls are sent to the Main Attendant or busy tone is presented by Admin setting By default Tone is assigned to DID DISA Destination _ PROCEDURE SYS PGM DID DISA DEST 1 Press one of the flex buttons 1 2 To assign DID DISA Busy destination PRESS FLEX KEY 1 2 press flex button 1 Then selected flex button LED will be lit DID DISA DEST BUSY CASE 2 To change Busy destination press flex button 1 Flex button 1 operates TONE toggle Refer to TABLE 11 2 20 DID DISA DEST BUSY CASE 3 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently ATTENDANT FLEX KEY TERMINAL MENU DEFAULT RANGE 1 DID DISA Busy Destination Tone Attendant 2 DID DISA Error Destina
139. Signaling Mode 3 When an ICM call is received the keysets will be signaled in accordance with ICM Signaling Mode 4 At Digital Keyset ICM Answer Mode is T Position by default and ICM Answer Mode should be protected Programming Hardware None 76 GDK 20W Programming Manual 11 INTERCOM CALL Description The system incorporates a non blocking internal communications network intercom which can be accessed by all stations connected to the system A station is allowed to call another station in the system or to access page zones by dialing the applicable number from the numbering plan Operation lt To place an intercom call 1 Lift the Handset or press the MON button 2 Dial the desired station intercom number If the called station is in the Intercom ring mode ring back tone is received If the called station is in the Privacy or HF Answer back mode Intercom call announce tone is received and the calling party can announce the call Conditions 1 ICM Dial tone will time out if action is not taken within Dial Tone Timeout Timer Error tone is received after time out The time between digits cannot exceed Inter Digit Timer or error tone is presented ICM Dial tone is removed after dialing the first digit If dialed station is busy then calling station hears ICM Busy tone e If one of the two stations an ICM call hangs up the other station if on hook status will goes to idle if off hook
140. Spanish Under following conditions flex button cannot be assigned as warm line If any station among entered range is SLT or 2B SLT you cannot save input value Ifyou entered the bigger flex number than stations have you cannot save input value Warm Line 1 4 Not Assigned 1 Flex Button 1 Selection 2 CO Line 3 CO Group 4 Station M 1 231 GDK 20W Programming Manual TABLE 13 9 2 CO LINE BASE PROGRAM MAIN MENU 3 SUB MENU TERMINAL MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 CO Line CO Line Type PBX CO_ CO JJ Attribute CO Line Signal Type DTMF Pulse DTMF X UNA supported DISA Account 6 Loop Supervision Yes No Yes 7 DID DISA Voice Yes No Yes Announcement 8 CPT To ne Yes No Yes LCO Detect ISDN CO Line 00 Not Assigned Attribute 01 10 indicate an entry of Outgoing COLP table 2 DID RN 00 99 00 00 Do not ignore f Not used 01 99 indicate an 3 Type of Calling Number 8 No send COLP ignored called party 4 DID Use Yes No No Do not set this field to YES in LCO 0 Unknown number 1 International type 2 National number 3 Not used 4 Subscriber number 5 Not used 6 Not used number DID RN DID Remove number from called Group Assign oem Night Both Timer party information CO Loop 0 20 100msec Supervision Timer CO Line Ring 1 Ring to station Station 1 All ring Flex key Round robin Assignment Station2 34 No ring
141. T D SPEED Delete data TABLE 11 2 33 Data Entry of Toll Table 11 2 8 AUTHORIZATION CODE TABLE MAIN MENU 8 By default System Authorization Codes are not assigned at all PROCEDURE AUTHOR CODE TABLE 1 Dial 2 digit entry number DIAL ENTRY NO 01 30 AUTHOR CODE TABLE 2 Dial 5 digit authorization code The size of authorization code must be 5 01 DIAL DIGIT AUTHOR CODE TABLE 3 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently 01 12345E DIAL DIGIT Valid Data Function LCD Display SPEED Delete data OO TABLE 11 2 34 Data Entry of Authorization Code Table 212 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN 1 Press one of flex button 1 3 to program Flexible Numbering Plan Refer to PRESS FLEX KEY 1 3 FLEXIBLE STA NUMBERING 4 If you press flex key you can see display to change the Station Number of station 1 24 or station 25 34 NUMBERING PLAN TYPE 2 If you press flex key 1 you can select Numbering Plan Type BASIC To change the value press the 15 flex 19 flex key acts as toggle setting STA NUMBER DIGIT SIZE 3 If you press flex key 2 you can select Station Number Digit Size To change the value press the 15 flex key The 15 flex key acts as toggle setting PRESS FLEX KEY PAGE 1 2 FLEXIBLE STA NUMBERING 5 If you press flex key 1 you can change Number of station 1 24 Press flex button 1 24 and dial 3 digit or 2d
142. T 100 A 101 U 102 U 103 U 104 U 105 U 106 U 107 U 108 U 109 U 110 U 111 U 112 U 113 U 114 U 115 U 61 U 62 U 63 U 64 U CO 2 Printed like above for another CO line 221 GDK 20W Programming Manual ISDN Database ISDN PROGRAM 1 PORT1 AUTO PORT2 AUTO PORT3 AUTO 2 CALL SUB ADDR N 3 INCOMING ZERO INSERTION Y 4 OUTGOING ZERO INSERTION 5 OUTGOING CHECK DIGIT 0 6 MY AREA CODE NOT ASSIGNED 7 NATION CODE NOT ASSIGNED 8 INTERNATIONAL CODE NOT ASSIGNED 9 ISDN COLP TABLE ENTRY 01 10 MAX 10 DIGIT 1 123E 2 E 3 E 4 5 6 E 7 E 8 E 9 E 10 E 10 ISDN MSN TABLE ENTRY 01 24 TEL_NO MAX 20 DIGIT ENTRY CO TEL_NO DAY STA MSN NIGHT STA MSN NO 11 DID DIGIT CONVERSION ROV DIGIT NO 2 DIGIT CONVERSION 2nd DIGIT CONVERSION 1234567890 1234567890 12 ISDN TRANSFER CODE 13 ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SVC ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SVC TYPE HOLD RETRV KEY PAD 3PTY KEY PAD ISDN HOLD CODE NOT ASSIGNED ISDN RETRIEVE CODE NOT ASSIGNED ISDN 3 PARTY CONFERENCE CODE 77 14 LOOP BACK NO 222 GDK 20W Programming Manual System Feature SYSTEM FEATURE 1 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTE HOLD TYPE AUTO PRIVACY EXT NIGHT RING MULTI LINE CONF SYSTEM Y N N CO LINE CHOICE OVR 1st COGRP NIGHT DVU MUSIC ON CAMPON ROUND ROBIN Y N N 2 ATTENDANT STATION 100 3 DATE amp TIME 98 04 21 14 35 4 LCD DISPLAY MODE 12H DDMMYY 5 PABX ACCESS CODE 6
143. UES TABLE 11 1 6 1 STATION BASE PROGRAM MAIN MENU 2 SUBMENU FLEX KEY TERMINAL MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Station 1 X DND DoNotDitub YES NO 5 gt Attributes 2 Speed Dial Access YES NO 6 3 PageActess YES NO 5 O 4 Call Forward Access 7 YES NO YES O 5 PLA Preferred Line Answer YES NO 5 6 4 Speake Phone Z i ete Speo Selection I 8 ICM Box Signaling YES NO X YES Automatic Hold YES NO Station1 YES Station2 34 gt Data Line Security YES NO DVU Access YES NO Two way recording YES NO NO 13 DID Ring YES NO NO DID Ring field Main menu 2 Sub menu 1 Terminal menu 13 is used to determine the destination of an incoming DID call If this field is set as Yes the original destination of DID call receives the ring But if itis set as the original destination is ignored and the ring is distributed according to the ring assignment SUB MENU FLEX KEY TERMINAL MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 163 GDK 20W Programming Manual Station Bearer Capability 3 1KHz YES NO Attributes ISDN Station Sub Address YES NO this field is set to YES then Attributes GDK Sends the called extension number in called party sub address information of setup message to ISDN extension __2__ Leng Short__ Long Short _Short__ MSN YES NO N
144. W Programming Manual A station which is permitted the access to Paging can transmit paging announcements to the External Page port of the system A page warning tone will be sent to the page port before the audio connection Operation lt make an External page 1 Lift the Handset 2 Dial the External Page Code 3 3 After the page warning tone make an announcement 4 Replace handset Conditions 1 If a user dials Code 3 while external page is in use the user will receive busy tone 2 External paging is included in All Call Page Code 0 which means that it is impossible to do External paging during the All Call Page 3 keyset can not gain access to paging in on hook status If a user pages without lifting the handset LIFT HANDSET TO PAGE is shown 4 gt Pages be answered by Meet Me feature dialing Code 6 or pressing the flashing HOLD SAVE button This code can be assigned to a Flex button 6 Assignment of External Page Port and External Contact should be programmed in Admin programming e Programming Page Access Station Base Program Main Menu 2 Station Attributes Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 3 External Control Contact System Base Program Main Menu 5 Sub Menu 11 External Page Port System Base Program Main Menu 5 Sub Menu 16 Hardware 1 To use this feature external equipment must be installed on the programmed SLT port External Page Port 27 PI
145. Wireless Terminal Operation lt To perform an unannounced line transfer 1 While connected to a Co line press TRANSFER I button at Station A Intercom dial tone is received The CO line is placed on Exclusive Hold Transfer Recall Timer is activated 2 Dial the intercom number of idle Station B Intercom ringback tone is heard Station B received intercom ringing 3 Station A goes On Hook status Station B receives CO ringing Transfer recall timer starts 4 Station B answers the transferred CO line by lifting the handset Station A will be recalled if the CO line is not answered within a programmed period of time If Station A is busy or doesn t answer within the programmed time period the transferred CO line will recall the attendant lt To perform an announced CO line transfer to an idle station 1 While connected to a CO line press TRANSFER button ICM dial tone is received The CO line is placed on Exclusive Hold Transfer recall timer is activated 2 Dial the intercom number of idle Station B Intercom ring back tone is heard 3 Station A informs Station B of a transferred call 4 Station A hangs up Station B is connected to the transferred CO line Conditions 1 Wireless terminal cannot transfer a call to another busy single line telephone however a Wireless Terminal can transfer a call to a busy key station When he receives busy tone he can be connected to a
146. a call in case where the calling party can leave a message in case of DID DISA line or intercom call Operation To enable Normal Ring to DVIB feature 1 Attendant programs forward type as Forward to DVIB by DND FWD 7 code Or Attendant presses pre programmed flexible button for Forward to DVIB To disable Normal Ring to DVIB feature 1 Attendant disables Forward to DVIB mode by pressing DND FWD button Or Attendant disables Forward to DVIB mode by pressing MON DND FWD If this feature is enabled 1 When Normal CO ring comes all ring assigned station will ring during Normal Ring to DVIB Timer and the call will be routed to DVIB and the calling party can leave a message at attendant station And the stations will stop ringing 2 When there are left messages it will be displayed in attendant station Attendant can hear these messages by pressing CALLBK button Please refer to the section DVIB User Greeting amp Voice Message Wait for detailed explanation Conditions The same conditions as those of the feature DVIB User Greeting amp Voice Message Wait are applied Please refer to the section DVIB User Greeting amp Voice Message Wait for detailed explanation 1 This feature is enabled when attendant station is in Forward to DVIB mode 2 Itis only applied for normal CO line call 3 When DVU memory is full or DVU number is full the call will not be routed to DVIB and co
147. ability TABLE 11 2 2 STATION ATTRIBUTES SUB MENU 1 of STATION BASE PROGRAM 177 GDK 20W Programming Manual 2 STATION ISDN ATTRIBUTES SUB MENU 2 PROCEDURE STA PGM 100 133 1 Toselect STATION ISDN ATTRIBUTE press a flex key 2 PRESS FLEX 1 8 STA PGM 100 133 ISDN STA 2 To select SUB ADDR menu press flex key 1 PRESS FLEX KEY 1 7 ah ISDN SUB ADDR LCD will show the current status To program SUB ADDRESS press the 1 flex key for toggle setting YES LED On NO LED Off STA ISDN SUB ADDR 4 LCD will show again the changed status Press HOLD SAVE button for YES updating database permanently e A Move to the next terminal menu LONG SHORT e W Move to the previous terminal menu CLIP FLEX KEY FIELD DEFAULT REMARK Sub Address This field determines that ISDN station will use Sub Address or not ON YES OFF NO Long Short This field determines that ISDN station acts in Short passive mode or not ON LONG OFF SHORT 3 MSN NO This field determines that ISDN station will use MSN or not ON YES OFF NO 4 COLR NO Restricts sending Connected Line Number to PX L8 COLP Allows printing Connected Line Number CLIP This field determines whether the caller s ID is printed or not in PRIB BRIB STIB T mode CLIS This field determines whether the call s ID is saved or not when user does not answer CLI NAME This field determines that name will be displayed or not Display ON YES OF
148. able A are monitored for allow and deny numbers STA COS 3 The assignments in the Exception Table B are monitored for allow and deny numbers The assignments in the Exception Table A amp B are monitored for allow and deny numbers The leading digits can not be a Long Distance code The leading digits can not be a Long Distance code Only 8 digits maximum can be dialed Not use a CO Line Only allowed to make an intercom call and to receive any calls TABLE 11 2 31 Station Class Of Service Sub Menu 3 of STATION BASE PROGRAM PROCEDURE TOLL TABLE 1 Press one of flex button 1 5 to program a table Refer to TABLE PRESS FLEX KEY 1 5 11 2 32 Ex FLEX BTN 1 Allow Table TOLL TABLE ALLOW A 2 Dial entry number 01 20 for ALLOW TABLE 01 10 for DENY TABLE DIAL ENTRY NO 01 20 TOLL TABLE ALLOW A 3 LCD displays the selected entry number and current allowed number 01 E DIAL NO Enter new data and each entry can be up to 8 digits LCD will displays the new data e To delete current toll number press SPEED button without entering any data TOLL TABLE ALLOW A 4 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently 01 1234E DIAL NO 211 GDK 20W Programming Manual ITEM DEFAULT ENTRY REMARK ora ALLOW B DENY B ALLOW 01 10 TOLL DENY 01 10 TABLE 11 2 32 Button Configuration for Toll Tables Valid Data LCD Display TE
149. ad or download the Admin database you can use Upload or Download in Transfer menu bar Upload means send Admin DB from PC to GDK 20W Download is the reverse 7 When you upload the Admin database you should reset the system for proper operation with changed admin values Conditions 1 After the user entered Admin mode via Key phone the PC Admin isn t available And the reverse case is the same 2 Local PC admin does not affect any other operations of GDK 20W as the keyset admin doesn t Programming Baud Rate System Program Main Menu 5 SMDR Attribute Sub Menu 8 Terminal Menu 4 Hardware 1 MFB is needed 2 2 Admin Remote Description With GDK 20W PC Admin software user can program the system database via ISDN BRI Line interface at the remote PC with ISDN Card supporting 2 0 or later and HDLC as channel protocol Operation 1 Connect ISDN telephone line to PC ISDN card 2 connect the ISDN T interface line to BRI port of GDK 20W 3 Run GDK Admin program in PC 4 Adjust Communication Port Setting in PC Port Type must be ISDN 5 Dial to GDK 20W in site by using Dial Phone or PhoneBook Dial in CommPort menu When line type is DID type call station number 100 After ISDN line is connected Port Open in CommPort menu changes to Port Close automatically 6 After the successful connection you can use the Admin features of GDK 20W PC ad
150. al station 3 If station A flashes two consecutive hook switches within 2 seconds station A B and C will be in conference Programming None Related Features Hardware None 2 CALL FORWARD SLT Description This feature allows single line telephones to direct intercom calls and transferred CO lines to be forwarded to another station Operation lt activate the call forward condition on a single line 1 Lift handset and dial the Code 54 2 Dial call forward type 1 unconditional 2 busy 3 no answer 4 answer 5 off net 3 Dial the station number where the call is to be forwarded and replace the handset lt deactivate the call forward condition 1 Lifthandset and dial the Code 54 2 Dial and replace the handset Conditions 1 Call Forward will remain engaged until manually released 2 A call cannot be forwarded to a telephone in DND 120 GDK 20W Programming Manual 3 The telephone will give a Call Forward warning tone when the handset is lifted to indicate the telephone is in the Call Forward mode 4 A station denied the use of FWD in programming will receive error tone when the Code 54 is dialed 5 call forwarding station cannot initiate a message wait Programming lt Forward Access Station Base Program main menu2 Station Attributes Sub Menu Terminal menu4 Related Features Hardware None 3 CALL PICK UP SLT Description Tone ringi
151. amming 5 Speaker phone Headset Station Base Program main menu2 Station Attributes Sub Menu1 Terminal Hardware None 21 Hunt Group Overflow Description The call to a station in the hunt group Cir Ter UCD Ring will continue to route until answered or each station in the group has been tried If Overflow Destination is set the call will be routed to the Overflow Destination when Overflow timer is expired Operation When a CO Normal DID DISA ring or an intercom call is received If the call is not answered in overflow time the call is cancelled and re routed to overflow destination as follows according to overflow destination LCD display is for a station in intercom 1 Station number The call is routed to the station after Overflow Timer is expired 2 Station group The call is routed to the station group 3 DVU number Hunt overflow announcement is heard and the call is disconnected 4 gt System speed bin Overflow announcement is heard and the call is forwarded to off net 50 GDK 20W Programming Manual Conditions 1 When overflow timer value is zero this function does not work or is disabled 2 overflow destination is not assigned the call is dropped when the Overflow timer is expired 3 queued call may be taken out of group and directed to an overflow destination 4 gt Calls to an overflow destination of station works the same as intercomm or CO line calls to the stat
152. amp Time order and Retrieval order is also changeable with Admin Programming 4 Only retrieval order of non saved messages will be changed The retrieval order of saved messages is not changed 5 delete messages stored in a certain station there must be an idle DVIB port 6 Only messages of stations that are in idle status can begin to delete their messages And if a station which is in the deleting procedure goes off hook message delete procedure will stop and only the number of deleted messages until then will be displayed with LCD XXX MESSAGES DELETED Programming DVU Access Station Base Program Main Menu 2 Station Attributes Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 11 Date amp Time Prompt Order Change System Base Program Main Menu 5 DVU Setting Sub Menu 20 Terminal Menu 1 Message Retrieve Order Change System Base Program Main Menu 5 DVU Setting Sub Menu 20 Terminal Menu 2 Hardware DVIB is needed 116 GDK 20W Programming Manual 7 Normal Ring to DVIB Only by Attendant Description When the CO line is normal CO type No DISA DID and attendant station is set to Forward to DVIB normal CO line call is routed to DVIB so that the outside caller can leave a voice message in case the predefined Timer expires This feature is enabled when attendant station is in Forward to DVIB This is an enhancement of the existing feature DVIB User Greeting amp Voice Message Wait that forwards
153. an SLT Off Hook 5 4 Code 7 Code On Hook User greeting is deleted and Call Forward to the DVIB is cleared To deactivate Call Forward to DVIB from an SLT Off Hook 5 4 Call Forward to is deactivated But user greeting is not deleted delete user greeting use the procedure described above To activate Call Forward to DVIB from an SLT Off Hook 5 4 7 Recorded user greeting is used If there is a recorded user greeting it is heard L To leave voice message wait Talk with normal voice sound after both User Greeting and Beep tone L To hear voice message wait Dial 5 7 Time amp Date prompt for the recorded message is provided and then voice message is played To delete the voice message Go on hook after or while the voice message is played If users hang up while Time amp Date prompt is heard voice message is not deleted Wireless Terminal users To record user greeting from a Wireless terminal ON OFF lt gt 54 Code 7 Code Voice FUNCTION 79 User greeting is stored permanently and Call Forward to the DVIB is activated To delete user greeting from a Wireless terminal ON OFF 54 7 ON OFF lt gt User greeting is deleted and Call Forward to the DVIB is cleared 44 GDK 20W Programming Manual O To deactivate Call Forward to DVIB from a Wireless terminal ON OFF
154. ant station after Busy DND Prompt announced No Answer DID DISA Forward To DVIB No Call goes to attendant station for No Answer Case 5 17 2 No Answer Prompt Transfer To Attendant Prompt RBT Yes No Answer Prompt Record Start Prompt Beep Tone Recorded message is saved for this station No Answer at DID DISA Forward To DVIB Yes No Answer Prompt Record Start Prompt Beep Tone Attendant for Attendant No Answer Recorded message is saved for attendant station GDK 20W Programming Manual Case 5 173 No Continuous ringing at attendant station 0 Invalid DID DISA Error Destination Tone Incoming call is released immediately 0 5 6 2 ATTD Ring is distributed to all the stations that are assigned CO ringing If there is no station assigned ringing the call goes to attendant station after invalid prompt is announced DISA Line Admin Field Action and Provided Announcements Incoming Call DISA Line Use GDK 20W answers this incoming call System Greeting Day or Night Inter Digit DID DISA Error Destination Incoming call is released immediately Timeout eree Transfer To Attendant Prompt Busy DND DID DISA Forward To DVIB Caller can try again Busy DND Prompt Retry Prompt System Greeting Busy DND Prompt Record Start Prompt Beep Tone Recorded message is saved for this station 5 Invalid Caller can retry again Invalid Prompt Retry P
155. appropriate flashing flexible button programmed as a Park code during the conversation with the outside party 2 The previous call is put on hold or released according to the Admin setting Station Base Program Main Menu 2 Station Attributes Sub Menu 1 Automatic Hold Terminal Menu 9 And parked line is connected To retrieve a parked CO line call from SLT 1 Lift handset 2 Dial the appropriate park code 601 606 When the parked call is not retrieved until the Call Park Recall timer expires 1 The parked call can be retrieved only until the Call Park Recall timer expires 2 Ifthe Call Park Recall timer expires without being retrieved the parked call is excluded from the parking location and recalled to the station that originally parked the call 3 The originator of the call park feature rings until the I Hold Recall timer expires 4 Ifthe I Hold Recall timer expires with being unanswered the attendant is also recalled At this time two stations the attendant and the originator are recalled 5 The recall is maintained until the Attendant Recall timer expires 6 Ifthe Attendant Recall timer expires the call is released immediately 86 GDK 20W Programming Manual Conditions 1 Intercom calls cannot be placed into parking locations 2 station must have a CO button or a LOOP button to retrieve a parked call 3 The park codes 601 606 can be programmed to a flexible button 4 The Park code
156. assigned at all System supports 2 external control contacts PROCEDURE SYS PGM EXT CONTACT 1 Select EXTERNAL CONTROL CONTACT number with one of the FLEX PRESS FLEX KEY 1 3 buttons 1 2 Ex Flex button 1 External Control Contact 1 SYS PGM EXT CONTACT 1 2 If you want to set as LBC dial 1 and station number Or If you want to set LBC101 1 3 NO as DOOR BELL dial 2 only Station number is needed only in LBC setting 0 325330535 To delete the assignment of External Control Contact press SPEED button SYS PGM EXT CONTACT 1 1 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently LBC102 TYPE 1 3 STA NO FLEX KEY TYPE DATA 1 3 1 LBC Loud Bell Control otation No 2 Door Bell pM 3 External Page p TABLE 11 2 24 Button Configuration For External Control Contact Sub Menu 11 of SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM 12 BGM Background Music TYPE SUB MENU 12 By default BGM type is set to Internal Music There are 3 BGM types PROCEDURE SYS PGM BGM TYPE 1 To change the setting dial BGM type 1 3 INTERNAL DIAL DIGIT 1 3 SYS PGM BGM TYPE 2 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently EXTERNAL DIAL DIGIT 1 3 DIGIT BGM TYPE INTERNAL MUSIC EXTERNAL MUSIC BOTH MUSIC TABLE 11 2 25 Button Configuration For BGM Sub Menu 12 of SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM 201 GDK 20W Programming Manual 13 MOH Music Hold TYPE SUB MENU 13 By default MOH type is
157. ast number dialed is stored up to 24 digits the station s Last Number Redial buffer The user may request the system redial the last number without the need to redial the entire number Operation To use Last Number Redial 1 Lift the Handset or press MON button on SLT 2 Dial 52 use Last Number Redial by REDIAL button on SLT 1 Lift the Handset or press MON button on SLT 2 Press REDIAL button on SLT 126 GDK 20W Programming Manual Conditions 1 When last number redial is activated the user will hear the number being transmitted to the central office 2 If the previously used CO line is busy another line within the group will be seized 3 LNR is protected from power failures Programming Line Choice System Base Program Main 5 System Attribute Sub Menu Terminal Menu5 Hardware None 13 MESSAGE WAIT CALL BACK SLT Description A station can activate call back or message waiting when calling a station which is busy does not answer or is DND A station may receive message wait from up to 5 other stations or call back from up to 1 other station in the system The station who have the message can call the parties who left the message wait Operation To leave a message wait to an idle station that does not answer Make a hook lash and dial 56 Toleave a message wait to a station Make a hook flash and dial 56 To leave a call back to a busy s
158. ation in the group Operation 51 GDK 20W Programming Manual make internal call to Group Dial group pilot number 61 64 instead of station number To make an incoming CO call through DID DISA to Group Dial group pilot number 61 64 instead of station number To register Call Forward Unconditional to Group Off Hook Code1 61 64 To register Call Forward Busy to Group Off Hook DND FOR Code 2 61 64 To register Call Forward No Answer to Group Off Hook pND FOR Code 3 61 64 To register Call Forward Busy No Answer to Group Off Hook Code4 61 64 When a Circular Terminal group member presses DND FOR button during ringing The ring stops and the member pressing DND FOR button is in DND mode Then the ring is rerouted to the next idle station in the same hunt group as if Hunt No Answer Timer expires If the ringing member is the last ringing station in Circular Terminal group then the ring is rerouted as if other ring comes into the same group So hunt process also starts again If there is no available member then ring is queued until a member becomes idle When a UCD group member presses DND FOR button during ringing The ring stops and the member pressing DND FOR button is in DND mode Then the ring is rerouted as if other ring comes into the same group If there is no available member then ring is queued until a member becomes idle When a ring gr
159. aximum 4 Voice Mail groups each containing up to 6 stations These stations must be SLT stations This feature provides an interface to connect external VM AA units to the system This interface is done using in band DTMF digits to signal to from the VM unit Voice Mail allows unanswered calls to be handled Auto Attendant allows callers to reach destinations without any operator Stations assigned into a VM group provide a Hunt operation If one station in the group is busy a call will be automatically sent to the next station in the group The hunting type is circular Each VM group can have a Leave and Retrieve Index table associated with it This table allows programmable DIMF sequences to be setup to integrate the phone system with a VM unit Each index table can contain up to 12 digits including special characters The system will light and extinguish Message VM lights The system will also be able to display the number of message on the LCD of telephones connected to the system Operation 1 Station A is forwarded to VM group The forward type can be Unconditional Busy No Answer Busy No Answer A call rings station A and forwards to the VM unit according to the forwarding type The call rings the VM port When the VM port answers the following digit sequence is sent to the VM port LEAVE TABLE PREFIX Station Number LEAVE TABLE SUFFIX The caller continues to hear ring back tone until all the digits are sent to the
160. ber message wait User can leave DVIB Message when calling a station which is busy does not answer or is DND The station receiving DVIB message can retrieve saved DVIB message Operation Keyset User To leave a message wait to an idle station that does not answer 1 Make an ICM call to a station which is idle Ring Back Tone is heard 2 Press CALLBK key User can record his voice message after Record Start Prompt and Beep tone 3 To finish record press HOLD or hang up 4 When user hangs up before valid record time then record is cancelled and station number message wait is saved To leave a message wait to a station in DND 1 Make an ICM call to a station which is in DND DND Tone is heard 2 Press CALLBK key User can record his voice message after Record Start Prompt and Beep tone 3 To finish record press HOLD key or hang up 4 When user hangs up before valid record time then record is cancelled and station number message wait is saved To leave a message wait to a station in busy 1 Make an ICM call to a station which is in busy Busy Tone is heard 2 Press CALLBK key User can record his voice message after Record Start Prompt and Beep tone 3 finish record press HOLD key hang up 4 When user hangs up before valid record time then record is cancelled and call back is activated when station 101 goes to idle SLT User To leave a message wait to an idle station that does not answer 1 Ma
161. ber will not be monitored also System speed numbers are protected by battery backup memory The line is presented to an individual button assigned to the telephone If there is no CO button or LOOP button error tone will be received 8 The duration of DTMF tone must be a minimum of 80ms 9 Apreselected CO line overrides a programmed line for speed dialing 10 The system speed bin are entered at Attendant 11 A CO Line can be programmed to be selected with a particular dialed speed dial bin by pressing that CO button during programming 12 System speed dial numbers are programmed similarly to station speed dial numbers except the speed bin number see station speed dial programming for details Programming Speed Dial Access Station Base Program Main Menu2 Station Attributes Sub Menu1 Terminal Menu2 5 Override 1 CO Group System Base Program Main Menu5 System Attribute Sub Menu1 Terminal Menu6 Hardware None 32 Trunk to Trunk CO to CO Transfer Description Station may transfer a CO line call to the other CO line If the external party on ISDN does not answer the transferred call in the transfer recall time the transferring station will receive recall ring If the call remains unanswered the attendant will also receive recall ring for the Attendant Recall time after which the CO line will be disconnected and return to idle Operation To perform an unscreened CO line transfer with DKTU 1
162. button once at attendant in day mode The DND FOR LED lights steady 31 GDK 20W Programming Manual on 2 To enter auto ring mode press the DND FOR button once at attendant in night mode The DND FOR LED flash 480 IPM in auto ring mode To change day mode press the DND FOR button once at attendant in auto mode The DND FOR LED lights off Conditions Only attendant can access the ring mode changing In auto ring mode day night ring is serviced according to the weekly time table Only ring assigned stations can receive the incoming ring in a any ring mode If both day and night start time are not programmed in weekly time table auto ring mode can t be entered The day start time can t be same to the night start time By default the night ring is serviced all day on Saturday and Sunday in Auto ring mode Admin Programming 1 Station Class of Service Station Base Program main 2 Sub Menu3 2 CO Line Ring Assignment CO Line Base Program main menu3 Sub Menu7 3 External Night Ring System Base Program main 5 System Attribute Sub Menu Terminal menu3 4 Attendant Assignment System Base Program main 5 Sub Menu2 5 Weekly time table program for Auto Day Night System Base Program main menu5 Weekly time table Sub Menu21 Day Night time Terminal 1 7 12 DATA LINE SECURITY amp BEARER CAPABILITY 3 1 KHz Description This feature provides a busy statio
163. case that CPTU cannot detect the valid tone type until this timer expires 1 sec base This Timer is invoked after system detects CO ring back tone or voice from CO party After this timer system retries ACNR 1 sec base This is decreased every time station retries ACNR ACNR is canceled if set to 0 1 means 5 seconds GDK 16 will wait this value to decide NO TONE 3 means 15 seconds Only for CIS GDK 20W Programming Manual TABLE 11 1 6 6 TOLL TABLE MAIN MENU 7 KEY SUB MENU TERMINAL DEFAULT REMARK Allowed Table A Entry No 01 Denied Table A Entry No 01 10 Allowed Table Entry No 01 20 Assigned Denied Table Entry No 01 10 Canned Toll Table Allow Entry No 01 10 Canned Toll Table Deny Entry No 01 10 TABLE 11 1 6 7 AUTHORIZATION CODE TABLE MAIN MENU 8 Authorization Entry No 5 Diait Not Code Table 01 30 9 Assigned TABLE 11 1 6 8 FLEXIBLE STATION NUMBERING MAIN MENU 9 Nof SUBMENU TERMINAL MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK NUMBERING PLAN TYPE S CN Extension Basic STA NUMBER SIZE FLEXIBLE STATION 221 Flex number for Porti 24 FLEX KEY 1 24 T 123 Each flex key denotes NUMBER 2 Flex number for Port24 34 FLEX KEY 1 10 124 133 Corresponding station TABLE 11 1 6 9 LCR PROGRAM MAIN MENU 10 LCR Access 3 way toggle Disable DISABLE OVERRIDE eee eae Day Zone F1 Zone 1
164. ct program code During Admin programming other keysets in the system operate normally When Admin programming LCD and LED s indicate current programmed data and status If the programmer enters correct data then LCD and LED s show the entered data and the data is stored in the temporary buffer area Real system databases is not changed and has no effect on telephone operation unless permanent updating procedure is executed Pressing HOLD SAVE button all data in the temporary buffer same as LCD and LED s show their status is saved into permanent memory Tones are provided to let the programmer know whether data entry is correct confirmation tone or not error tone 11 1 2 TO ENTER THE PROGRAMMING MODE 1 Lift handset or press the MON button on the admin station and hear ICM dial tone optional 2 Press TRANS PGM button and dials confirmation tone heard 3 Enter Admin Password if the password has been set This procedure places the station into the Admin programming mode confirmation tone heard And LCD will displays the first step of Admin programming below LCD ADMIN PROGRAM START PRESS FLEX KEY 1 12 11 1 3 HOW TO PROGRAM 1 There are 12 main menus in the Admin Programming mode 2 Each main program has several sub menus and each sub menu can have several terminal menus sub menus of a menus of a sub menu but some sub menus don t have any terminal menus It means sub menus are terminal menu
165. ction Sub menu 7 of STATION BASE PROGRAM 8 PAGE ZONE SUB MENU 8 Each station is assigned to paging zones A station can be in any or no zone at all International all call is defined as the sum of all zones If station is not in any internal zone it will not receive any page announcement In GDK20W system supports 2 internal paging zones Default assigns all stations to internal page zone 1 PROCEDURE STA PGM 100 133 1 Select PAGE ZONE menu by pressing a flex key 8 PRESS FLEX KEY 1 8 STA 100 133 ZON 2 LCD will show the current status Press flex key 1 2 to change page zone The flex key acts in toggle 1_ PRESS FLEX 1 2 STA PGM 100 133 PAGE ZON 3 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently 12 PRESS FLEX 1 2 182 GDK 20W Programming Manual 9 LANGUAGE CODE SUB MENU 9 User can select a language for LCD display of keyset Normal LCD display during call process follows this language setting But Admin LCD display is exceptional It is only displayed in English PROCEDURE STA PGM 100 112 1 Select LANGUAGE CODE menu by pressing a flex key 9 PRESS FLEX 1 9 STA PGM LANGUAGE CODE 2 LCD will show the current status Dial digit 1 2 to change language code ENGLISH DIAL DIGIT 1 2 STA PGM LANGUAGE CODE 3 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently NORWAY DIAL DIGIT 1 2 183 GDK 20W Programming Manual 11 23 CO LINE PR
166. d ringing Intercom calls are forwarded by this feature Operation activate Call Forward Busy No Answer 1 Liftthe Handset or press the MON button 2 Press the DND FWD button 3 Dial Call Fwd Code 2 busy only 3 no answer only 4 busy no answer 4 Dial station number to receive the calls 5 Replace the Handset go on hook cum A A deactivate Call Forward Busy No Answer from idle Press the DND FWD button lt deactivate Call Forward Busy No Answer from off hook 1 Press the DND FWD button 2 Dial 70 GDK 20W Programming Manual Conditions The number of rings before the call is forwarded is determined by the Call Fwd No Answer timer 2 The Codes 2 3 4 as follows DND FWD Code 2 Station DND FWD Code 3 Station DND FWD Code 4 Station 3 Stations Call Forwarded No Answer will forward incoming CO calls according to the No Answer Ring Timer 4 A callback can be initiated when station is in call forward busy no answer 5 Call Forward type can be flexibly assigned to a flex button Programming lt Forward Station Base Program main menu2 Station Attributes Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu4 lt FWD No Answer Timer System Timers main menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu12 Hardware None 5 3 CALL FORWARD OFF NET Description Stations will be allowed to forward ICM and transferred CO line calls
167. d to that line to detect progress tone only from LCO 3 When the called party answers calling party must lift the handset or press the MUTE button to make a communication with called party Then this feature will be canceled and normal CO line calling sequence will be processed For ACNR No Answer Case 1 When the system detects the Dial Tone RBT tone from line or is received the connect message from ISDN line after ACNR call the ACNR No Answer Timer is assigned 2 Though the called party answers the ACNR No Answer Timer isn t released 3 Only when the calling party lift the handset or press the MUTE button to make a communication the ACNR No Answer Timer will be released and the communication will be made 4 Ifthe called party doesn t answer during No Answer Timer the ACNR feature will be canceled and the CO line will be automatically released and the calling station will go on hook For ACNR Busy Case 1 The system detects the busy tone from LCO line or is received the CAUSE Busy message from ISDN line 2 The ACNR Retry Counter is decreased and the calling station will go on hook If the ACNR retry counter expires the feature will be canceled Otherwise the ACNR Pause Timer will be assigned for next ACNR call 83 GDK 20W Programming Manual Conditions Four timers and Two retry counter can be programmed ACNR Pause When expired ACNR is activated Timer When ACNR Pause Timer expires and there is no
168. destination of MSN Table When DID caller dials MSN Tell number which destination is DVU Day or Night Greeting is presented according to system mode The specific CCR Announcement can not be assigned as destination in MSN Table Programming MSN Table ISDN Program Main Menu 4 Sub Menu 10 CCR Table System Base Program Main Menu 5 Sub Menu 18 DISA Retry Count System Base Program Main Menu 5 Sub Menu DID DISA Busy Destination System Base Program Main Menu 5 DID DISA Destination Sub Menu 6 Terminal Menu1 DID DISA Error Destination System Base Program Main Menu 5 DID DISA Destination Sub Menu 6 Terminal Menu2 Inter Digit Timer System Timer Main Menu 6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu1 Terminal Menu 18 CCR Inter Digit Timer System Timer Main Menu 6 System Timer 2 Sub Menu2 Terminal Menu 6 7 CLI Name Display Print Description For ISDN line when incoming calls comes GDK system checks whether the received CLI is matched with the speed dial data or not If received CLI number is matched to telephone number for a certain speed bin and that speed bin has name and then programmed speed bin name is displayed When incoming ISDN Call is answered the CLI information is printed through RS 232C port Three types of CLI information printed through RS 232C port are listed below Type 1 XX DDDDDDDDDD This is printed when normal rings come DID DISA incoming calls come Type2 DDDDDDDD
169. digits to enter new prefix PUT MAIL PREFIX MAX 12 5 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently P 1 DIAL DIGIT FLEX KEY TERMINAL MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 Put Mail 1 2 Prefix P Flex 1 for Prefix 2 for Suffix Suffix 2 Get Mail 1 2 Prefix P Max 12 digits Suffix 3 Busy 1 2 Prefix PZ 3P Suffix 4 No Answer 1 2 Prefix P 4P Suffix 5 Error 1 2 Prefix P 5P Suffix Prefix P 6P Suffix 7 Disconnect TABLE 11 2 40 Button Configuration For VM Table Program Main Menu 11 Sub Menu 2 219 GDK 20W Programming Manual 11 2 12 DATABASE PRINT MAIN MENU 12 In order to obtain a hard copy printout of the database a printer must be connected to the RS 232C connector user entered Database Print menu while printing is going on the error tone is heard PROCEDURE PRINT DATABASE 1 To print database press one of flex buttons 1 10 Refer to TABLE 11 2 41 PRESS FLEX KEY 1 10 PRINT DB ALL DB 2 print out the selected database press HOLD SAVE button PRESS HOLD SAVE KEY FLEXKEY SUEMENU DATA REMARK j 1 Station Database Print All Station 1 34 DB Print 2 CO Line Database Print All CO 1 8 DB Print 3 ISDN Database Print 1 20 4 j SystemFeateDatabasePrint 5 SystemTimerPrint 1 2 6 TollTablesPrint 1 2 7 Authorization Code TablePrint P 8 Flexible Station Numbering Prit 9 L
170. e button 3 Dial the speed bin number 21 thru 99 The system chooses the CO line based on last line in first group access allowed and dials the number Conditions See System Speed Programming lt Speed Dial Access Station Base Program main menu2 Station Attributes Sub Menu1 Terminal menu2 Related Features Hardware None 16 STATION NUMBER RECOVERY WIRELESS TERMINAL Description This feature is used to recovery station number changed by Admin program Operation recover station number display on Wireless terminal LG GAP LCD 1 Press ON OFF button 2 Press FUNCTION 79 button 3 Dial the station number recovery code 25 Programming Flexible Numbering Plan Flexible Numbering Plan main menu9 154 GDK 20W Programming Manual 10 PC RELATED FEATURES 1 Admin Local Description With GDK 20W PC Admin software user can program the system database via RS 232C interface in PC Operation 1 Connect GDK 20W and PC with RS 232C line 2 Run GDK Admin program in 3 Adjust Communication Port Setting in PC Refer to GDK Admin User s Manual The baud rate of PC and GDK 20W must be the same 4 Select Port Open menu in PC and Port Open menu changes to Port Close menu Then port setup is completed 5 Menu item you can use in PC admin is Admin Sys Speed or Keyset menu bar 6 If you want to uplo
171. e 1 Station 2 Hunt Group 3 DVU 4 DVU DROP 5 System Speed 6 Internal Page 7 External Page 8 All Call Page Admin Not Assigned Order TIME DATE DVU Message Retrieve FIFO LIFO FIFO Order 3 Auto Delete of 000 300 Not Assigned Retrieved Saved days Messages Weekly Time 1 7 Day of Week Table 1 Day Start Time 0000 2359 Default 0900 2 Night Start Time 0000 2359 Default 1800 Candence 20 msec OFF 150 ee 20 msec 010 emm _ 20 msec OFF 050 eee Tae 20 msec OFF 000 236 GDK 20W Programming Manual TABLE 13 9 5 SYSTEM TIMER PROGRAM MAIN MENU 6 TERMINAL MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 System Exclusive Hold Recall Timer 000 300 060 1secbase Timer 1 6 Ring Detect Timer 1 9 100 msec base 7 CO Ring Stop Detect Timer 0115 06 1secbase 8 PauseTimer 1 9 1__ 1 9 CO Release Guard Timer 01 15 01 1secbase 22 15 Message Reminder Tone Timer 00 60 00 1 Hook Switch Flash Timer 10 msec base This is the maximum Hook Flash time 90msec Hook Flash will be detected with this default value 20 SMDRStatTimr 000 250 000 15 2 System Timer 2 2 User Message Timer 00 10 04 1 sec base 4 Call Park Recall Timer 0 600 120 Determines the amount of 3 Digits sec time before a call placed in a
172. e 601 606 is dialed Operation To park a CO line call from DKTU 1 Press TRNAS PGN during the conversation with the outside party 2 Dial park code 601 606 or press the flexible button programmed as Park code 3 Confirmation tone is heard if the call is parked successfully Otherwise ICM busy tone is heard When the call is parked the corresponding Park code flexible buttons in all stations flash at a rate of 120 IPM while the call is parked in a location Or 1 Press the flexible button programmed as a Park code during the conversation with the outside party 2 Confirmation tone is heard if the call is parked successfully When the call is parked the corresponding Park code flexible buttons in all stations flash at a rate of 120 IPM while the call is parked in a location To park a CO line call from SLT 1 Make a hook flash and dial park code 601 606 2 Confirmation tone is heard if the call is parked successfully Otherwise ICM busy tone is heard 3 The corresponding Park code flexible buttons in other stations flash at a rate of 120 IPM while the call is parked in a location To retrieve a parked CO line call from an idle DKTU 1 Lift handset or press MON button 2 Dial the appropriate park code 601 606 or press the appropriate flashing flexible button programmed as a Park code To retrieve a parked CO line call from a DKTU engaged in the conversation with outside party 1 Press the
173. e button Press the TRNAS PGM 81 Press the HOLD SAVE button If flexible button of SMDR Print Code is selected again programmed feature will be display on LCD E To assign the programmed key for SMDR Delete 1 Do the same process as the above 2 Press the TRNAS PGM 82 and press the HOLD SAVE button 3 If flexible button of SMDR Delete Code is selected again programmed feature will be display on LCD To assign the programmed key for Abort Printing 1 Do same process as the above 2 Press the TRNAS PGM 83 and press the HOLD SAVE button 3 If flexible button of Abort Printing Code is selected again programmed feature will be display on LCD To print the saved SMDR Records In the Attendant 61 GDK 20W Programming Manual 1 Press the TRNAS PGM button 2 Dial 81 Confirm tone is heard 3 Enter the station range e g 100 115 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button Then the saved SMDR Record will be printed through RS 232C port To delete the saved SMDR Records In the Attendant pe ge qu m Press the TRNAS PGM button Dial 82 Confirm tone is heard Enter the station range e g 110 115 Press the HOLD SAVE button Then the saved SMDR Record will be deleted and the message SMDR Record STA 110 115 Delete OK will be printed through RS 232C port To abort the saved SMDR Records Print In the Attendant 1 Press the TRNAS PGM button 2 Dial 83 Confi
174. e CO line he can activate broker calls using hook flash 2 A single line telephone cannot transfer a call to another busy single line telephone however a single line telephone can transfer a call to a busy key station When he receives busy tone he can be connected to a CO Line using hook flash 3 If the station initiating the transfer hangs up before completing the dialing of a station number the line will immediately recall the station 4 If a SLT station tries to transfer a call to a key station in HF or PV mode and the key station doesn t answer the SLT may retrieve the call by utilizing a hook flash 1 times Programming Transfer Recall Timer Station Timers main menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu3 lt Hold Recall Timer Station Timers main menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu4 Attendant Recall Timer Station Timers main menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu5 lt Hook Switch Flash Timer Station Timers main menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu16 Hardware None 123 GDK 20W Programming Manual 8 DIRECT CO LINE RINGING SLT Description Single line telephones can be arranged as direct ringing CO lines Operation A SLT designated as a direct ringing line will ring when the CO line rings in The SLT rings in the CO line distinctive mode When the SLT answers they are directly connected to the CO line Conditions 1 Ringing can be
175. e at the station by using the UP DOWN key in the Digital Keyset 2 3 4 The connection for BGM are made with jack connector on the MBU 5 Music is continued one second after going to idle status 6 This feature is available in Keyset Programming System Base Program main menu5 BGM Type Sub Menu12 Hardware When an external music source is assigned the source must be connected to the input terminal on the PMU 8 BATTERY BACK UP MEMORY Description The system database memory is protected from power loss by a long life minimum 5 years lithium dry cell battery Should local power fail the battery will maintain the system memory and proper operation of the system clock Operation Operation of this feature is automatic when installed Programming Hardware The plus battery terminal must be properly connected to the MBU and Switch position 1 on the MBU must be in the on position to properly protect the system memory from a power outage 28 GDK 20W Programming Manual 9 BUSY LAMP FIELD BLF Description When the user assigns a Flexible button on the Keyset as a Direct Station Selection button DSS the LED associated with the button also provides an indication of the status of the assigned station Such status indicators are known as a Busy Lamp Field that is a group of lamps which indicate the busy status of stations Operation Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed by the user Cond
176. e placed in queue for a busy CO line From DKTU 1 Press busy CO or CO GRP button Or Dial Co Access code 9 8x 88x The busy tone is heard ex Dial 881 Press the CALLBK key then confirmation tone is heard then hangs up The CALLBK LED lights steady To request to be placed in queue for a busy CO line From SLT pct Dial Co Access 9 8x 88x The busy tone for busy CO line is heard Make a hook flash and dial Callback Code 56 Then The confirmation tone is heard To cancel the feature from queued station From DKTU 1 Press CALLBK key the CALLBK LED extinguished To cancel the feature from queued station From SLT 1 Liftthe handset 2 reminder tone for co queuing is heard 3 Dial Callback Code 56 4 Conditions 1 A CO can have any number of queues requested at one time 2 A station permits only one CO line queuing request at one time If a station attempt another coline queuing only the later queued request is available 3 When busy CO line is available it selects the oldest station in queue and signals it The signaled station will have the available CO or LOOP button CO or LOOP LED flashes at 80 ipm queue callback The audible ringing will be a distinctive signal The CO line while signaling the queued station will remain steady on all other station and that line is considered as busy when any attempt is done except a queued station 4 The
177. e1 2 3 e F1 Day zone 1 index to the DMT e F2 Day zone 2 index to the DMT e Day zone 3 index to the DMT DMT 00 99 F1 A Added digit stream 25digits Digit total 100 F2 RP Removal Position 2digits Modificatio F3 RN Removal Number of digits of n Table CODE in each table 2 digits F4 AP Add Position 2digits F5 CG CO group 1digit F6 ALT Alternative DMT index 2digits 239 GDK 20W Programming Manual TABLE 13 9 10 STATION GROUP PROGRAM MAIN MENU 11 CIELLZT TERMINAL MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Hunt Group Type Cir Term Ucd None Deletion by SPD key Program VM Ring None Group Member Station No None Max 10 station Deletion SPD key 3 Attribute Answer Timer 999 Timer 0 99 3 Overflow STAZ HUNT Z Destination DVU SYS SPD Destination Type 4 STA 5 HUNT 6 DVU 4 SYS SPD 4 Overflow Timer 000 600 180 iia UCD Timer 2 Second 1 second Announcement Timer wu o Repeat Timer 4 Overflow Destination STA HUNT Destination Type DVU SYS SPD 5 Overflow Timer 000 600 VM 1 Ring Timer 0 99 2 Put Mail Index n 3 Get Mail Index 1 4 8 Overflow STAZ HUNT Z Destination DVU SYS SPD Destination Type 1 STA 2 3 DVU 4 SYS SPD Destination Type 5 Overflow Timer 000 600 Ring 3 Ring Announce Timer 4 Overflow STA HUNTH Destination DVU SYS SPD Table S
178. eceesucsucsesutsuceesucsesarsucsesacsuceesacsussesutsesatsatstsatstsatsssesetscsees 75 INTERCOM mui xu m AU e EE 76 MESSAGE WAIT CAEL BAGIC s ote ee o etes e estie tee ted tie ib tain 76 MESSAGE WAIT REMINDER SIGNAL ettet ttt ettet ttes 77 MICROPHONE 0 78 o SE 1 renis 78 TO LEAVE MESSAGE BY KEY DURING ICM 79 CO S uA ML LM 82 AUTO CALL NUMBER REDIAL ACNR 02 82 AUTOMATIC tates 84 AUTOMATIC PAUSE 0 8680 84 toate Aas Ie cle AN al UN uu nsi ted 85 CALL FORWARD 222 86 CCR CUSTOM CALL ROUTING FOR DID OR DISA serere 87 NEME 0 2 88 RED 90 CONE TRANG ER aa psa tuac Rat 91 COL
179. ed 24 GDK 20W Programming Manual 3 AUDIO BEARER CAPABILITY 3 1KHz Description This feature enables SLT user to make call with 3 1KHz Audio Bearer Capability instead of Speech Bearer Capability when Bearer Capability 3 1KHz is enabled Operation When SLT makes an internal call to S port When the system sends SETUP message to S port 3 1KHz Audio Bearer Capability is used instead of opeech Bearer Capability When a SLT makes an outgoing call with T port ISDN BRI line When the system sends SETUP message to T port 3 1KHz Audio Bearer Capability is used instead of opeech Bearer Capability Admin Programming B Audio Bearer Capability 3 1KHz Station Base Program Main Menu 2 Station Attribute Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 4 Auto Delete of DVIB Messages Description The DVIB messages in the all stations may be deleted automatically after assigned term with admin programming The retrieved and saved messages by pressing HOLD SAVE key will be deleted after assigned term Non saved messages by pressing HOLD SAVE will not be deleted automatically But attendant can also delete non retrieved messages Attendant DVIB Management Delete operation of a certain station s all messages This function works at 12 05 05 AM in a day Operation The retrieved and saved messages in all stations will be automatically deleted after assigned days as programmed While Auto delete status at While the messag
180. ed a pilot number Station Group Number so that the calls to the pilot number will hunt for an idle station in the hunt group When an intercom or transferred CO line is directed to a pilot hunt station group the system will search for an idle station one after another Four hunting processes are available Circular Terminal and UCD Uniform Call Distribution Ring Upon finding an idle station within the group system will make the idle station ring In Circular Hunt calls to a group will go to the next of the station that received an intercom call last If unanswered the call is directed to the next station in the group The call will continue to be routed until every station in the group has been tried The call will remain at the last tried station In Terminal Hunt calls to a group will go to the first station in the group If unanswered the call proceeds to the next station in the group The call will continue to be routed to the next station until reaching the last in the group where the call will remain In UCD Hunt calls to a group will go to the station that has been idle for the longest time If all the stations in the group are busy when a call to the group is received the call may continue to wait queue for an available station in the group In Ring Hunt calls to a group from CO line will go to all the stations that are not in use If all the stations in the group are busy the call may continue to wait queue for an available st
181. ed party number is not matched with MSN table then GDK 16 will treat the call like as DID 3 called CO line number is not programmed then search all tables 4 If there is matched CO line number in MSN address table the system searches only matched entry of the table 5 If there is no answer from the station that receives the DID ring the call is transferred to attendant station regardless of current system mode Day Night Mode 6 If the station that receives the DID ring is busy the call is transferred according to the pre defined DID DISA Busy Case Destination System Base Program Main 5 Sub Menu6 Terminal Menu 7 If the user dialed the invalid DID number the call is transferred according to the pre defined DID DISA Error Case Destination System Base Program Main 5 Sub Menu6 Terminal Menu2 8 Programming DID Use CO Base Program Main Menu ISDN Attribute Sub Menu 2 Terminal Menu 4 MSN Table ISDN Program Main Menu 4 Sub Menu 10 DID DISA No Answer Timer System Timers Main Menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 13 DID DISA Busy Error Case Destination 1 System Base Program Main Menu5 Sub Menu6 Hardware 2 None Note gt To use this feature software must be applicable for BASIC III version 2 x or B x 14 DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS DISA Description DISA allows users to access the system s resources by calli
182. een calls carrying on a private conversation with either party Operation O To hold the current call 1 Press the FLASH key during conversation 2 Press the HOLD key Or 3 Press programmed SUPP HOLD button To make a new call with the same channel 1 Press the FLASH key 2 Press the CO key Or 3 Dial CO Access Code 9 To exchange the party during one conversation 1 Press the HOLD key Then the current call goes on hold and the held call is retrieved Conditions 1 Both Keypad protocol and functional protocol are implemented 2 FLASH and HOLD keys or pre programmed SUPP HOLD are needed for this feature SUPP HOLD key can be made by Code TRNAS PGN 75 3 ISDN Broker Call is available during conversation 4 The ISDN CO line which is associated with this ISDN Broker call can not be transferred to the other station And the held channel can be retrieved only by the station which held the channel 5 ISDN Broker Call is associated with ISDN 3 Party Conference and Call Waiting Programming ISDN Service ISDN Program Main Menu 4 ISDN Supplementary Service Sub Menu 13 Terminal Menu 1 ISDN Hold Code ISDN Program Main Menu 4 ISDN Supplementary Service Sub Menu 13 Terminal Menu 2 ISDN Retrieve Code ISDN Program Main Menu 4 ISDN Supplementary Service Sub Menu 13 Terminal Menu 3 Hardware 5 ISDN 3 Party Conference Description Th
183. eless Telephone Unit 15 FAX TRANSFER CO LINE SUB MENU 15 DCO DKTU SLT Q O lt MUSIC MUSIC2 WHTU gt r m N N N c ct fe 5 O 5 h Q c Q 5 ul o lt o e D 3 Q 5 e c 5 c uh o lt o m gt m U A A gt SYS FAX TRANS LIN 1 Press flex button 15 to select FAX Transfer CO Line menu 3 DIAL DIGIT 1 8 SYS PGM FAX TRANS CO LIN 2 Dial new CO Line 1 8 4 DIAL DIGIT 1 8 SYS PGM FAX TRANS S Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently 4 DIAL DIGIT 1 8 203 GDK 20W Programming Manual 16 EXT PAGE STATION SUB MENU 16 SYS PGM EXT PAGE STATION 1 Press flex button 16 to select External Page Station menu 104 DIAL STA NO SYS PGM EXT PAGE STATION 2 Dial new station no 105 DIAL STA NO SYS EXT PAGE STATION 3 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently 105 DIAL STA NO SYS DID DISA FWD TO DVU 1 Press one of the flex button 1 3 to select terminal menu of DID DISA PRESS FLEX KEY 1 3 Fwd to DVU DID FWD TO DVU BUSY CASE 2 Current assigned setting is displayed on LCD YES Press flex button to change setting DID FWD DVU BUSY CASE 3 Press HOLD SAVE button fo
184. eless terminal to GDK 20W system Operation 1 Attendant station TRNAS PGM Flex Button1 StationNumber Phone Type HOLD SAVE If you press the TRNAS PGM button TRNAS PGM LED will flash 60 IPM Flash and ON OFF LED will be turned on Then you can enter then user program mode Dial Press Flexible Button 1 Enter the station number Enter the phone type LG GAP for GDK system or standard GAP for any other system In case of LG GAP terminal press 1 button Otherwise press 2 button Press HOLD SAVE button and confirmation tone is heard succeeded the attendant station will display SUBSCRIBED SUCCESS on the LCD display If failed either at attendant or at Wireless Terminal repeat 3 6 steps of the attendant 2 At the wireless terminal Function 0 PARK code Redial code Function Press Function 79 button Press 0 Enter system ID PARK Press Redial button Enter AC code Press Redial button 1 234 are displayed on the LCD A number means FT number that it is not occupied yet The under bar means the wireless terminal is already subscribed to the system Therefore the number of means the number of subscribed system If 4 under bar are displayed on the LCD that means no subscription is allowed any more Enter FT number by pressing numeric key if any number exists After selecting it is possible to re
185. endant station TRANS PGM Flex Button2 Station Number HOLD SAVE If you press TRNAS PGM button TRNAS PGM LED will flash 60 IPM Flash and ON OFF LED will be turned on Then you can enter then user program mode Dial THf Press Flexible Button 2 Enter the station number Press HOLD SAVE button and confirmation tone is heard Success or failure of the subscription is notified with confirmation tone to the attendant and the wireless terminal succeeded in de subscription the below LCD message will be displayed Power off the wireless terminal Condition 1 Only attendant can de subscribe wireless terminal 2 Attendant can de subscribe wireless terminals those were subscribed already If attendant try to de subscribe un subscribed wireless terminal it will be heard error tone 3 Attendant can de subscribe another wireless terminal after one de subscribing procedure 4 Attendant can do de subscribing procedure only when wireless terminal s power is off and idle state Notes If you want to do de subscribe procedure at wireless terminal and attendant station each other Follow the procedure that described below 143 GDK 20W Programming Manual 1 At attendant station lt To erase all data those were subscribed TRNAS PGM Flex Button Password 147 HOLD SAVE Press the TRNAS PGM button TRNAS PGM LED will flash 60 IPM Flash and ON OFF LED will be turned on Then
186. ent PARK value will be displayed in LCD In case of changing system ID 1 Atattendant station TRNAS PGM Flex Button6 System ID PARK HOLD SAVE CAUTION Normally you should not change the system ID If you should change it please contact LG or local dealer in your country If you press the TRNAS PGM button TRNAS PGM LED will flash 60 IPM Flash and ON OFF LED will be turned on Then you can enter then user program mode Dial HF Press Flexible Button 6 Enter the system ID PARK code After entering the PARK code press HOLD SAVE button Then you can hear confirm tone The key sequence of the PARK LLP PC LL Two digits decimal representation of PARK length Bit count 11 octal digits representation of PARK Check digit It is calculated sum of each digit in the input stream multiplied by its position in the input stream modulo 11 if the result if 10 this is represented by the Conditions 1 You must program for system ID when you install the system 2 If you program system ID all data that were related to wireless features will be erased 3 The initial PARK value is 00000000000000 So the value will be display in LCD at first 140 GDK 20W Programming Manual 2 Authentication Code Description Authentication Code is entered at only attendant station before you begin to subscribe wireless terminal GAP to GDK 20W system Operation lt In case of c
187. entification CLIl of the incoming call will be displayed on the internal called station s keyset if PX provide CLI information Calling line identification CLI or name which is matched with the speed dial list is displayed to original called party extension First The system search station speed dial buffer to find out the programmed name and if there is not matched then search system speed dial buffer Not implemented Yet CLI information will be printed in SMDR record through RS 232 port 5 COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation Each station user can send CLI information to called party through ISDN line if PX service this supplementary service 132 GDK 20W Programming Manual There are 8 type of calling party number But at this moment GDK only support four kinds of type UNKNOWN NATIONAL TYPE INTERNATIONAL SUBSCRIBER COLP field determines what is used to generate my CLI information in setup message it indicate entry of CO Base Program Main Menu3 ISDN Line Attribute Sub Menu2 OLP 00 Terminal Menu When a internal user seize a ISDN DID line which is programmed for COLP system will make calling party number using ISDN COLP TABLE and extension number in setup message UNKNOWN TYPE Insert the calling station number at calling party number information field in setup message NATIONAL TYPE Insert my area code if exist ISDN Program Main Menu4 My Area Code Sub Menu6
188. er 030 000 300 Determines the amount of time before call sec 3 Digits recalls the attendant 5 Attendant Recall 01 00 60 Determines the amount of time before system Timer min 2 Digits disconnects the call igits CO Ring Detect Timer 2 1 9 The CO Ring Detect Timer controls the time 1 Digit to detect an outside line as ringing 3 1 100ms into the system This timer is to secure time interval between 5 incoming ringing signals so that the active 2 Digits ringing can be lasted in the system until this timer is expired CO Ring Stop Detect Timer 6 sec Pause Timer 1 1 9 Determines the length of the pause for use with sec 1 Digit automatically sent digits or other speed dialing CO Release Guard 01 01 15 Timer igi m CO Dial Delay Timer 00 99 connection to the outside party will be 2 Digits made after this timer This can be used to prevent illegal dialing in case of slow response from the Central Office Line or PBX 00 99 Determines the amount of time an outside line 2 Digits will ring before being forwarded to a predetermined station This entry works with Preset Forward Assignments in station attributes More than one station can be forwarded to the same destination 12 Forward Busy No 10 00 99 Determines amount of time to forward call Answer Timer 2 Digits after a predetermined
189. er analyzing LCR If there is no idle CO line in the group get the alternative DMT Index and follow it 9 Toll restriction will be checked after finishing LCR analysis after seizure of CO line 9924 E 101 GDK 20W Programming Manual 10 Billing code on a basis of extension FLASH in DMT table will be used to indicate Billing code When repeating a digit stream to PX this FALSH will be replaced by the extension number used for an outgoing call 11 Size of LCR elements Day Zone of week routing 3 zones Programmable Time Zone for each Day Zone 3 zones Programmable Number of Dialed code bins 100 bins Number of Modification code bins 100 bins Maximum number of Dialed digits 12 digits Maximum number of Added digits 25 digits Alternative DMT Index None 1ea 12 When LCR Access Main Menu 10 Sub Menu 1 is programmed as ALWAYS if user dials after direct CO key or LOOP key then system searches LDT table entries with LCR type in LDT table BOTH and COL 13 When user presses REDIAL key then system searches all LDT table entries BOTH COL and INT 14 Selected by CO key or LOOP key is used instead of programmed CO Group in DMT table 15 After DKTU user presses TRNAS PGM key during CO conversation LCR works as when off hook state And after SLT user presses Hook Switch briefly HF during CO conversation LCR works as when off hook state 99924929 Programming lt LC
190. es are deleted automatically the LCD is displayed as follows The count of day is decreased for messages and when it comes to zero the messages of all stations will be deleted After the messages are deleted the number of deleted message is displayed on the LCD Conditions 1 The messages in all stations will be deleted But non retrieved or non saved message will not be deleted 2 The messages will be checked at 12 05 05 AM night and be deleted in a day 3 When all DVIB ports are busy auto delete is not operated and waits until a DVIB port becomes available 4 The available range is 000 300 days When it is set to 000 this feature will not be operated The station user should delete the messages by CONF key 5 This feature will not be operated in SLT Since the retrieved message is deleted automatically after on hook in SLT 6 After auto delete feature is operated the result will be displayed on the LCD of the station XXX MESSAGES DELETED and off hook to recover the LCD state 25 GDK 20W Programming Manual 7 10 When the number of days for Auto Delete is changed all saved and retrieved messages will be counted again with this new value If the user make off hook while auto delete status the auto delete operation is stopped and user may make other operation in the keyset The non deleted messages will be deleted in the next day If the station is in use including ringing state in the auto delete ti
191. ess SPEED button without entering any data ISDN PGM COLP TABLE 3 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently 01 1234E DIAL NO 190 GDK 20W Programming Manual 3 ISDN MSN TABLE SUB MENU 10 By default ISDN MSN Tables are not assigned at all PROCEDURE ISDN PGM MSN TABLE 1 Dial 2 digit entry number DIAL ENTRY NO 01 24 MSN 1 C1 D 112 0 N 111 3 2 Press one of the flex key 1 4 to select entered data type TEL 543665E e Flex key 1 CO line number 1 8 e Flex key 2 Day Destination Station number 2digit or 3digit Group no 61 64 DVU e Flex key 3 Day Destination MSN no 1 8 e Flex key 4 Night Destination Station number 2digit or 3digit Group no 61 64 DVU e Flex key 5 Night Destination MSN no 1 8 e Flex key 6 Telephone number max 20digit MSN TBL 1 3 If you press flex key 1 in step 2 you select CO line number Dial CO line DIAL 1 8 number 1 8 MSN TBL 1 DAY STA112 e f you press flex key 2 in step 2 you select Day Destination Station number DIAL STA GRP DVU Aa number 2digit or 3digit Group no 61 64 or Dial to select the MSN TBL 1 DAY 5 1 e f you press flex key 3 in step 2 you select Day Destination MSN number Dial DIAL MSN NO 1 8 MSN number 1 8 MSN TBL 1 NIGHT STA112 e f you press flex key 4 in step 2 you select Night Destination Station number DIAL STA GRP DVU Dial Station number 2digit or 3digit Group no 61 64 or Dial 7 to select
192. etrieval Order will be stored If Attendant station goes on hook LCD will return to idle To confirm the available recording time 1 2 Press the programmed key for DVIB Management and dial code 3 or TRNAS PGN key 7 3 If Attendant station goes on hook LCD will return to idle 115 GDK 20W Programming Manual To confirm the available number of messages 1 2 Press the programmed key for DVIB Management and dial code 4 or TRNAS PGM key 7 4 The following LCD will be displayed If Attendant station goes on hook button the LCD will return to idle To delete all messages in a certain station In Attendant station Press the programmed key for DVIB Management and dial code 6 or TRNAS PGNM key 7 6 2 following LCD will be displayed 3 Next Attendant station selects the station range Press HOLD SAVE button 4 When deleting is completed the following LCD will be displayed 5 LCD will return idle attendant station goes on hook In Station 1 While deleting is in progress 2 When all message in the station is deleted XXX shows the number of deleted messages 3 LCD will return to idle when user goes on hook Conditions 1 DVIB management feature is only available in Attendant station If another station user attempts to use this feature error tone will be heard 2 DVIB must be installed to operate this feature 3 Date
193. existing feature DISA Operation To enable this feature 1 line should be set as DISA type 2 DISA Delay timer should be programmed as the specific time To disable this feature DISA without delay 1 CO line should be set as DISA type 2 DISA Delay timer is set to 0 second If this feature is enabled 1 When the CO line is DISA type and the call comes all ring assigned station will be received the CO ring 2 caller will hear DISA system announcement after DISA Delay Timer And the stations will stop ringing If this feature isn t enabled Normal DISA 1 CO line is DISA type and the DISA CO call comes 2 Thecaller will hear DISA system announcement without the specific delay Conditions If the DISA Delay timer set 0 the system will behavior as the normal DISA 2 When there is no available DVIB port ring assigned stations will be continuously received the CO ring after DISA Delay Timer expires When there is an available DVIB port ring assigned stations will stop ringing and the caller will hear the DISA system announcement 3 Before DISA Delay Timer expires the incoming call is routed to ring assigned station or group So Hunt group has the precedence for ring assignment 4 lf DISA Delay timer expires during group announcement group announcement will be end and system announcement will be presented 5 Admin Programming 1 DISA Type CO
194. eyset 1 Liftthe Handset or press the MON button 2 Press the desired CO Line or Loop button 3 or Dial the CO Line or Group code lt To access a CO Line from a Single Line telephone 1 Liftthe Handset 2 Dial the CO Line or Group code Programming lt Line Group Access Station Base Program Main Menu2 Sub Menu4 lt Line Group Assignments CO Line Base Program Main Menu3 Sub Menu3 Hardware A Keyset must have an idle appearance CO Line or Loop button to access an outgoing CO Line Also the Keyset must have an idle appearance to access an incoming CO Line call 97 GDK 20W Programming Manual 17 FLEXIBLE CO LINE RING ASSIGNMENTS Description Each station in the system can be programmed to provide an audible signal when the system detects an incoming call on assigned CO Lines Separate ring assignments are made for day and night mode operation Operation Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed Conditions 1 The keyset which has LOOP button will receive Incoming CO ring as well as Transferred CO ring Programming lt Line Ring Assignments CO Line Base Program Main Menu3 Sub Menu7 Terminal menu Hardware None 18 FLEXIBLE CO LINE RING DETECTION Description The customer database can be set to allow the system to detect unusual ring cadences from a CO Line Two timers Ring Detect and Ring Stop allow for flexible ring detection on an incoming CO Li
195. ference mode If a master presses the flashing CONF button in idle status the conference is dropped To reenter the conference lifts handset or presses the MON button and presses the flashing CONF button 4 Station can disconnect the conference by going idle status To establish a conference the originator must have a CONF button 6 conference master hangs up during conference setup the CONF LED continue to flash and the master can retrieve the waiting member by off hook and pressing CONF button 7 Wireless Terminal can not be a conference master Programming m Unsupervised Conference Timer System Timers main menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu14 B Multi Line Conference System Base Program main 5 System Attributes Sub Menu Terminal menu4 Related Features Hardware None 10 3 CONFERENCE UNSUPERVISED Description The system will allow maximum 2 CO lines in an unsupervised conference The internal station will exit a conference and leave the conference unsupervised Operation 30 GDK 20W Programming Manual Station A leaves the multi line conference unsupervised by pressing the CONF button and going idle status The CONF LED flashes at 120 ipm rate If Station A goes idle status without pressing the CONF button the conferees are dropped and the conference is canceled To reenter the conference 1 Station A lifts the handset and
196. for the desired zone Upon entering the page zone a warning tone is provided over the stations and ICM boxes The originating station receives paging confirmation tone At the end of the tone the originator speaks in a normal voice and the voice announcement is transmitted to the telephones and ICM boxes When announcement is completed originator hangs up Conditions 1 When dialing the Internal Zone code and the page zone is in use the originator receives busy tone 2 can not access paging while on hook status If a user pages without lifting the handset programmed activity will be initiated and display will show LIFT HANDSET TO PAGE Stations in DND or busy will not receive a page announcement Stations not assigned a zone will not receive any page announcement Pages can be answered by dialing the Meet Me Code 6 or flashing HOLD SAVE button The dialing codes for the Internal Page zones are Code 1 2 Dial Code 4 to make internal all call page 59 56 GDK 20W Programming Manual 8 Internal zone page can be flexibly assigned to Flex buttons 9 Access to paging is allowed or denied in station basis via Admin Programming Programming lt Access Station Base Program main menu2 Station Attributes Sub Menu1 Terminal menu3 lt Zone Station Base Program main 2 Sub Menu8 Related Features Hardware None 26 2 PAGE ALL CALL Description
197. haracter will be erased e 6 While entering name you may press 4 5 6 or 7 8 9 as a second digit instead of 1 2 3 Ex To enter J you may press 5 1 54 or 5 7 7 When user review programmed DSS button if the station for this DSS has programmed name then programmed name is shown instead of station number 8 Station name is removed when user initializes station database by using admin Main menu 1 Sub menu 1 31 SPEAKER PHONE Description Keysets are equipped with circuitry enabling the telephone to be used without lifting the handset hands free in two way conversations Operation lt activate a speaker phone call from the Keyset Press the MON button the MON LED lights steady lt To terminate a speaker phone call from a Keyset 63 GDK 20W Programming Manual Press the MON button the MON LED extinguishes Conditions A Wireless Terminal does not support this feature Programming lt Speaker phone Headset Station Base Program main menu2 Station Attributes Sub Menu 1 Terminal Hardware Keysets equipped with the speaker phone circuitry include all 24 and 36 button KD series keysets All other keysets are not equipped to provide full soeaker phone operation and can only monitor listen to a connected party with the handset is on hook 32 Station Language Change Description The administrator can select the two or one language for station
198. he MON button 2 Press the CO Line button 3 or Dial 8 and the CO Line number lt access a CO Line on Exclusive Hold from the holding SLT 1 Lift the Handset 2 8 3 Dial 8 and the CO Line number Programming lt Hold Preference System Base Program Main Menu5 System Attribute Sub Menu Terminal Menu lt Exclusive Hold Recall Timer System Timers Main Menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu Hold Recall Timer System Timers Main Menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu4 X Attendant Recall Timer System Timers Main Menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu5 Hardware None 20 HOLD SYSTEM w RECALL Description CO Lines can be placed in a waiting state such that other stations in the system can access the CO Line The station attempting to access the held CO Line must be assigned access to the CO Line When placed on System Hold the System Hold Recall Timer is initiated If the CO Line is on hold after expiration of the timer the station that placed the call on hold will receive a recall The station will receive the recall for the I Hold recall duration after which the attendant will also receive a recall signal If the call remains unanswered for the Attendant Recall Time the CO Line will be returned to an idle state and recalls terminated Operation lt To place a CO Line on System Hold from a Keyset Press the HOL
199. his field is set to YES then sends Address the calling extension number in calling party sub address information of setup message Incoming Zero Yes No Insertion qom Insertion Digit 6 MyAreaCode NotAssigned 7 MyNationCode 2 NotAssigned International 4 Digits Not Assigned Code Table B d Entry No Not Assigned 10 digit 01 10 MSN Table STA No Not Assigned Key 1 CO line no 1 8 61 64 Flex key 2 Day 1 a no 2 digit 3 digit or Station Group 61 64 Flex key 3 Day MSN no 1 8 Flex key 4 Night destination Station no 2 digit 3 digit or Station Group no 61 64 Flex key 5 Night MSN no 1 8 DEJEN eoo 6 Telephone no max 20 digit DID Digits 1 DID Conversion from PX 2 DID First Two DID Received b nore Dia Digits Conversion Digit No 9 9 ee received digit Second DIGI sap pedis 1234567890 Conversion Transfer Code 2 L BED Supplementary 1 Service Type Functional Conferentia Functional 2 Hold Code 10 Digits Not Assigned 3 Retrieve Code 10 Digits Not Assigned 4 3 Party 10 Digits Not Assigned Conference Code Loopback 2 Yes No 166 GDK 20W Programming Manual TABLE 11 1 6 4 SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM MAIN MENU 5 SUB MENU ps TERMINAL MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK System 1 Hold Preference SYS EXC Attributes YES NO 2 3 External Night
200. hunt group receives ring signal as a station Not as a member by dialing the station number of group member then DND FOR button is operated as normal DND feature not as station group DND The ring stops but the ring is not rerouted to other members 16 When pressing DND FOR button in a member station during ringing and if there is no available member at that time then the call is queued And when a member becomes available then it rings again in the station 17 Because there is no DND button or programmed flex button in SLT so SLT member can not use group DND feature Pressing DND button during group ringing to re route ring to other member And VM group member can not use group DND feature also 18 In the case of 2 8 button keyset the user can use group DND feature using programming the flex button as DND 19 When a user tries to transfer CO call to the group Circular Terminal UCD and Ring group when all the members are in use or all the members are not available for this call then transferred CO call is queued until there is an available member 20 When a Ring Group member becomes available and if there is an intercom call or CO call for the Ring Group it rings again in the station 21 21 When all the Ring group members are busy or ringing intercom call or CO call is queued When a member becomes available then the first queued call rings in the station 22 Programming 1 Group Type Assignment Station Group P
201. ia station flexible button programming and admin programming And LOOP key via both station flexible button programming and admin programming can be changeable for other function via station flexible button programming For SLT and ISDN station user they can have direct CO keys for all CO lines in default So direct CO keys are recommended rather than LOOP keys 10 2 Button DKTU has two LOOP keys in default as follows LL R BIN 2Button LOOP Programming Group Access Station Base Program Main Menu 2 Sub Menu 4 Flexible Button Assignment Station Base Program Main Menu 2 Sub Menu 6 5 Override 1 CO Group System Base Program Main Menu 5 System Attributes Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 6 Hardware 1 None Note To use this feature software must be applicable for BASIC III version 2 x or B x 26 MUSIC ON HOLD MOH Description When a CO Line call is placed in a holding state system exclusive transfer conference etc the CO Line will be connected to the assigned music channel In this way the CO party can determine that the connection is still established 104 GDK 20W Programming Manual Operation Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed Programming Type System Base Program Main Menu5 Sub Menu13 Hardware None 27 NIGHT DVU Description DISA CO lines can be programmed as they are disconnected in night mode after
202. ice message after Record Start Prompt and Beep tone 3 To finish record hang up 4 When user hangs up before valid record time then record is cancelled and station number message wait is saved To leave a message wait to a station in DND 1 Make an ICM call to a station which is in DND DND Tone is heard 2 Press CALL BACK L key User can record his voice message after Record Start Prompt and Beep tone 3 To finish record hang up 4 When user hangs up before valid record time then record is cancelled and station number message wait is saved To leave a message wait to a station in busy Make an ICM call to a station which is in busy Busy Tone is heard Press CALL key User can record his voice message after Record Start Prompt and Beep tone To finish record hang up When user hangs up before valid record time then record is cancelled and call back is activated when Station 101 goes to Idle N I Conditions 1 If there is no available DVIB port when user presses CALLBK key then confirm tone is heard and station number message wait is saved 2 If there is no available recording time or DVIB message number then confirm tone is heard and station number message wait is saved 3 If called station does not have DVIB Access then confirm tone is heard and station number message wait is saved 81 GDK 20W Programming Manual Programming DVIB Access Station Base Prog
203. igit station number to program station number Then press the SPEED button to delete current assigned button data FLEXIBLE STA NUMBERING 6 If you want to program other station number press other flex button 1 24 and 01 100 FLX KEY STA NO dial 3 digit or 2digit station number FLEXIBLE STA NUMBERING 7 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently 02 101 FLX KEY STA NO FLEX TERMINAL DEFAULT MENU RANGE NO key RANSE aep REMARK 1 MM Extension Basic Basic OFF When the user changed the Plan Type setting Extension to Basic the station number is initialized according to station number digit size e 2 Digit Station number 10 43 e 3 Digit Station number 100 133 There is no initialization when the setting is changed Basic to Extension 2 Number ier Size uus 3 2 When the station number digit size is changed station number is initialized always 3 Flexible Station Numbering Flex number of Basic 10 49 2digit User can select any station station 1 24 100 499 3digit by pressing appropriate flex Flex number of Extension 10 99 2digit key Ex 2nd flex key 219 station 25 34 100 999 3digit Station TABLE 11 2 35 Button Configuration For Flexible Numbering Plan 213 GDK 20W Programming Manual 11 2 10 LCR PROGRAM MAIN MENU 10 PROCEDURE LCR PROGRAM 1 Press flex key 10 to enter LCR PROGRAM menu PRESS
204. ign supplementary service type for 2 cases One is Hold Retrieve the other is 3 party conference By default 2 case service types are all keypad ISDN PROGRAM PRESS FLEX KEY 1 14 ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY 2 PRESS FLEX KEY 1 4 ISDN SUPPLEMENT SVC TYPE 3 PRESS FLEX KEY 1 2 ISDN SVC TYPE HOLD RETRV 4 KEY PAD ISDN SVC TYPE HOLD RETRV 5 FUNCTION Press flex button 13 of the 1 14 Press flex button 1 to select ISDN Supplementary Service User has to select which case service type he wants to assign Current assigned Service Type is displayed on LCD Press flex key to change Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently Hold Retrieve SVC Type Functional Keypad Keypad On 3 Party Conference SVC Type Functional Keypad Keypad On i Ol TABLE 11 2 16 Button Configuration for ISDN Supplementary SVC Type Sub Menu 13 of ISDN PROGRAM 2 ISDN 3 Party Conference Code Max digit no of ISDN Hold Code is 10 By default ISDN Hold Code is not assigned at all The same is for ISDN Retrieve Code ISDN 3 Party Conference Code PROCEDURE ISDN PROGRAM PRESS FLEX KEY 1 14 ISDN PGM SUPPLEMENTARY 2 PREE FLEX KEY 1 4 ISDN HOLD CODE MAX 10DGT 3 9988 ISDN HOLD CODE MAX 10DGT 4 5577 Press flex button 13 of the 1 14 Press flex button 2 to select ISDN Hold Code Current assigned ISDN Hold Code is displayed on LCD Dial digits to enter new ISDN Hold Code Press HO
205. ime 1 hour late at attendant Press TRNAS PGM Code 2 Conditions 1 Code TRNAS PGM 1 and TRNAS PGM 2 can be programmed to a flexible button 2 Current date is not subject to change when Code TRNAS PGM 1 or 2 are dialed Programming 1 System Date Time System Program Main Menu 5 Sub Menu 3 Hardware None 9 WAKEUP FAIL RING TIME OUT Description This feature allows system to erase wake up fail ring on attendant station automatically after a defined time This time Wake up fail ring time can be programmed by Admin program Operation This feature is automatically activated by system 118 GDK 20W Programming Manual Conditions 1 If system ATD dial to wake up fail station to erase wake up fail ring then the fail ring disappears with confirmation tone but when erase wake up fail ring timer expires system ATD does not hear confirmation tone Just the fail ring disappears After the erase wake up fail ring timer expires the wake up fail station will be printed through RS 232C Format 3 100 07 12 97 Erase Time 16 24 AUTO ERASED FAIL RING FOR THE STATION 4 gt System attendant is also programmed to register wake up time But although the extension is fail to wake up the extension does not ring wake up fail ring 5 Ifthe timer is 0 then this feature doesn t work 6 Ifthe timer is 99 then the fail ring does not exist on Attendant Programming Wake Up Fail Ring Timer Sy
206. ing When user dials forward type 7 and if there is recorded User Greeting already then user may not record User Greeting again and recorded User Greeting is used Note 2 User Greeting should be recorded before Call Forward to DVIB port When user hangs up after the forward type 7 and if there is no recorded User Greeting then forward is not activated Note If a station is forwarded to DVIB port Call Forward is canceled after deleting User Greeting Note 4 Only Call Forward to DVIB port is canceled and recorded User Greeting is not deleted User can delete User Greeting by IMON DND FOR 7 Note 5 COLR CLIR has a double function It is used to restrict both for the CLI for outgoing call and Connected Line number for incoming call 13 GDK 20W Programming Manual 1 3 BASIC AND EXTENDED NUMBERING PLANS Station Intercom Number CO Line Access Group Line Access Loop 11 _CO Line Access Individual Retrieve a Held CO Line Attendant COL ne Access First Accessible Group Al Ca Page Internal Zone External Page Meet SLT Last Number Redial LNR SLT WHTU SLT Speed Dial Program 00 SLT Speed Dial Access Aarm PickUp c p 0 EMEN Request 218 Bin Message Wait Answer SLT Flash SLT Call Waiting SLT Message Wait SLT CO H
207. ion 5 Calls to an overflow destination of group works the same as intercomm or CO line calls to the group 6 If overflow destination is set as non programmed station group the call is dropped 7 When an overflow destination is DVU number a call will be dropped if DVU announcement doesn t exist 8 When an overflow destination is DVU number if all DVU ports are busy the DVU announcement will be played as 9 soon as any DVU port is available When an overflow destination is system speed bin it should have an outgoing CO button for a station to call 10 In a group of Cir Ter type if the last station ringing presses DND button then the call is directed to the group again and the overflow timer is reset 11 In a group of UCD type if ringing station presses DND button then the call is directed to the group again and the overflow timer is reset Admin Programming 1 Overflow Destination Type STA 5 Group Z Speed Dial Number DVU Station Group Program Main Menu 11 Hunt Group Program Sub Menu 1 Hunt Group Attribute Terminal Menu 3 Overflow Timer 000 600 sec Default 180 Station Group Program Main Menu 11 Hunt Group Program Sub Menu 1 Hunt Group Attribute Terminal Menu 3 22 Hunt Group Circular Terminal UCD and Ring Description The stations in the system can be grouped into up to 4 hunt station groups Each hunt group can have at most 10 stations A hunt group is assign
208. ion number will be displayed on LCD The attendant number cannot be deleted SYS PGM ATTENDENT ASSIGN 2 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently 102 DIAL STA NO 3 SET SYSTEM DATE TIME SUB MENU 3 Date format is Year Month Date YYMMDD and Time format is Hour Minute HHMM in military form Whenever System Clock sets second set to 0 PROCEDURE SYS SET DATE TIME 1 system clock enter Date YYMMDD and Time HHMM serially 98 04 22 13 21 10DIGIT SYS PGM SET DATE TIME 2 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently 98 04 23 18 45 10 197 GDK 20W Programming Manual aT Ty Two LCD Date Formats are Day Month Year DDMMYY or Month Day Year MMDDYY Mode Two LCD Time Formats are Ordinary 12 hour Military 24 hour Mode By default LCD Date Format is DDMMYY and LCD Time Format is Ordinary 12 hour PROCEDURE SYS PGM LCD DISPLAY MODE 1 Current LCD DISPLAY MODE is displayed on LCD To change LCD 12 DDMMYY DIAL MODE 1 4 Time Format and LCD Date Format dial digit To program refer to Table 11 2 19 SYS LCD DISPLAY MODE 2 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently 12 MMDDYY DIAL MODE 1 4 NO DISPLAY REMARK 24 HOUR DD MM YY 24 HOUR MM DD YY Td 12 HOUR DD MM YY DEFAULT 12 HOUR MM DD YY E TABLE 11 2 19 Button Configuration for LCD DISPLAY MODE Sub Menu 4 of SYSTEM BA
209. is disabled from Attendant Press a busy LED lit steady CO Line button the Attendant station is connected to the conversation Conditions 1 With Automatic Privacy disabled privacy is still assured of all intercom conference CO to CO ISDN CO Off Net Forward calls 2 Attendant station must have a direct CO line appearance for this feature to operate Programming lt Privacy System Base Program main menu5 System Attributes Sub Menu Terminal menu2 Hardware None 7 BACKGROUND MUSIC BGM Description A Keyset can receive audio generally music from an internal or external source while idle Music from the source is received over the keyset speaker and will be shut off during ring pages or when the station is off hook 27 GDK 20W Programming Manual Operation activate or deactivate Background Music to Keyset Press the TRNAS PGM button Dial 73 background music is activated and music from first Source is received Press the TRNAS PGM button Dial 73 music from 2nd source is received if selected Doc qe um Otherwise background music is deactivated lt deactivate when 2nd source is selected 1 Press the TRNAS PGM button 2 Dial 73 Background music is deactivated Conditions 1 This code can be assigned to a Flex button When the station lifts handset or presses the MON button or dials a digit the music is discontinued The speaker volume is adjustabl
210. is feature allows the user to make 3 party conversation with one ISDN CO channel 135 GDK 20W Programming Manual Operation To make a 3 party conversation Press FLASH CONF or SUPP CONF when a call is in Supplementary Hold and a call in conversation To hold a party during 3 party conversation Press FLASH HOLD or SUPP HOLD during 3 party conversation Conditions 1 Only Keypad protocol is implemented 2 FLASH HOLD and CONF or SUPP HOLD SUPP CONF keys are needed for this feature SUPP CONF key can be made by Code TRNAS PGM 77 3 The other stations or CO lines in the system can not be a member Programming ISDN Service Type ISDN Program Main Menu 4 ISDN Supplementary Service Sub Menu 13 Terminal Menu 1 ISDN Hold Code ISDN Program Main Menu 4 ISDN Supplementary Service Sub Menu 13 Terminal Menu 2 ISDN Retrieve Code ISDN Program Main Menu 4 ISDN Supplementary Service Sub Menu 13 Terminal Menu 3 ISDN 3 Party Conference Code 1 ISDN Program Main Menu 4 ISDN Supplementary Service Sub Menu 13 Terminal Menu 4 Hardware None 6 ISDN CLI with No Answer CLI Message Wait Description When a call exists through DISA or DID calling line identification CLI of the incoming call will be displayed on the LCD of the station And if the DID or DISA external party hangs up before an Attendant or called extension answer the CLI provided b
211. ised 30 DAY NIGHT MODE CHANGE AUTOMATIC uo Tex ve ead reor 31 DATA LINE SECURITY amp BRARER CAPABILITY 3 1 2 32 DIAL BY NAME SPEED DIAL AND ICM GALL ot i oe aree bae descen ben 33 DIFFERENTIAL RING DIGITAL KEYSET ONLY Joret ea a oa Eaa aE O a ETE 35 DE LAYE DDIS c 36 cem CE 37 OOR ee ag ahs at 38 PEE ct RP 38 DVIB SYSTEMCOGREETINGS SPRONMIE TES US 38 DVIB VOICE ANNOUNCEMENT WITH DID DISA 40 DVIB USER GREETING amp VOICE MESSAGE WAIT 2 0 11 66 42 VOICE ANNOUNCEMENT WITH STATION 46 VOICE ANNOUNCEMENT WITH STATION OFF NET CALL 0 0000 00 46 BIEN OU ORC RUNE Tcr ene meee 47 DVIB DVU ANNOUNCEMENT WITH RING 48 TB MU NER RUN T eth ca eat pec 49 AONT GRR OVE RV Ses ac ted re ese ind 49 HUNT GROUP CIRCULAR TERMINAL UCD
212. ition Programming Hardware None 10 CONFERENCE 10 1 CONFERENCE ADD ON Description A station user can establish a call with one station and one CO Line Operation lt establish a conference 1 With the first call established press the CONF button the existing call is on hold and intercom dial tone is received 2 Place call to internal party 3 When answered press the CONF button 4 When all parties have been called press the CONF button again all parties can converse Conditions 1 CONF button will remain lit on the initiating station throughout the duration of the conference 2 There is no limit on the number of 3 way conference 3 conferee hangs up in a 3 way conference the conference is dropped and the other two parties are connected as normal 2 way conversation 4 conference master hangs up after pressing CONF during conference the CONF LED will flash at 120 ipm If a master presses the flashing CONF button in idle status the conference is dropped To reenter the conference lifts handset or presses the MON button and presses the flashing CONF button 5 Ifthe master receives error or busy tone from an internal party while setting up the conference can receive ICM dial tone again by pressing the CONF button 6 The conference master while setting up an internal conference can not Camp on to a station when he has dialed and received ICM busy tone 7
213. k lt English Character Set gt 14 DIFFERENTIAL RING DIGITAL KEYSET ONLY Description The user of a proprietary digital keyset can program the frequency of the ring signal sent to the speaker of the keyset Four frequency settings are available to allow users to distinguish which telephone in a given area is ringing The setting will affect all ringing signals sent to the speaker of the keyset while idle including intercom signals The ring cadence is not changed by this setting Operation To set the ring type from digital keyset onl TRANS PGM 50 Ring 1 4 HOLD SAVE Conditions 1 Each time user dials digit 1 to 4 speaker will receive appropriate ring signal Pressing HOLD SAVE button stores the last selected ring frequency 2 This setting affects ICM ring and CO ring Programming Related Features Hardware None 35 GDK 20W Programming Manual 15 Delayed DISA Description When the line is DISA type the system can respond immediately or after the DISA Delay timer expire for incoming CO call according to DISA Delay timer setting So if the timer is not 0 the incoming DISA CO call is first routed to ring assigned stations or group and the caller can hear the DISA system announcement in case the programmed timer expires If not the incoming DISA CO call is route to DVU and the caller will hear the DISA system announcement without delay This is an enhancement of the
214. ke an ICM call to a station which is idle Ring Back Tone is heard 2 Make Hook flash and dial 56 User can record his voice message after Record Start Prompt and Beep tone 3 To finish record hang up 4 When user hangs up before valid record time then record is cancelled and station number message wait is saved 80 GDK 20W Programming Manual To leave a message wait to a station in DND 1 Make an ICM call to a station which is idle Tone is heard 2 Make Hook flash and dial 56 User can record his voice message after Record Start Prompt and Beep tone 3 finish record hang 4 When user hangs up before valid record time then record is cancelled and station number message wait is saved To leave a message wait to a station in busy 1 Make an ICM call to a station which is idle Busy Tone is heard 2 Make Hook flash and dial 56 User can record his voice message after Record Start Prompt and Beep tone 3 To finish record hang up 4 When user hangs up before valid record time then record is cancelled and call back is activated when Station 101 goes to To retrieve saved voice message 1 When there is saved voice message 2 Press CALLBK key Saved voice message will be heard Wireless Terminal User To leave a message wait to an idle station that does not answer 1 Make an ICM call to a station which is idle Ring Back Tone is heard 2 Press CALL key User can record his vo
215. l Description The system will allow station users to dial extension numbers by entering a name that has been programmed for the station intercom Also each station may be assigned with a name up to 7 characters and speed dial system and station number may be assigned with a name of up to 16 characters When the names are programmed in the digital display keyset the user may select a station or speed dial number by the name The user selects from one of three directories intercom user speed dial or system speed dial and enters alpha numeric data with 2 dial pad keystrokes per character The system finds and displays the first matched name based on the characters entered The user may at any point scroll using buttons through the names in the directory and select a name to call If user wants to display the matched phone number to the selected name press FLASH button Operation To store a Speed Dial number with name Press TRNAS PGNM button a keyset at the attendant station for System Speed Dial Press SPEED button Dial the station system speed bin If desired press the CO line or group button Dial the desired phone number up to 24 digits Press HOLD SAVE button Enter the name by dialing 2 digit for each character up to 16 characters Refer to the English Character Set Press HOLD SAVE button gi vem SOM dur m To access Dial By Name User Speed bin System Speed bin Press the SPEED
216. ll the holding station If the recall is unanswered the call will also be directed to the appropriate attendant station The attendant will receive the recall signal for a period equal to the Attendant Recall Timer after which the system will return the CO Line to idle Operation Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed Conditions 1 Recall to the attendant appear on the direct CO button If there is no CO button the call is presented to the LOOP button 2 Exclusive hold changes to system hold when recall is activated to the attendant 3 I Hold Recall Timer is programmable and No Recall is available if this timer is set to 0 Programming Attendant Recall Timer System Timers main menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu5 lt Attendant Assignment System Base Program main 5 Sub Menu2 Hardware 4 DATE TIME DISPLAY FORMAT CONTROL Description The System Attendant can change the LCD Time and Date Display Format so that the time is displayed as a 12 or 24 hour clock and the date is displayed as day month year or month day year Operation lt change date display format from the System attendant 1 Press the TRNAS PGM button 2 Dial 5 the format will toggle between day month year and month day year lt change time display format from the System attendant 1 Press the TRNAS PGM button 2 Dial 6 the format will toggle between 12 and 24 hour
217. llowing digits after pause command after Pause Time Main menu 6 Sub menu 1 Terminal menu 8 If the pre programmed CO line is ISDN CO line or CO line is selected among ISDN CO lines the system will send the following digits after pause command as DTMF tone Not INFO message after receiving CONNECT message from the network If the system doesn t receive CONNECT message from the network the following digits after pause command will not be sent to the network Programming Speed Dial Access Station Base Program Main Menu2 Station Attribute Sub Menu1 Terminal Menu2 lt Line Signal CO Line Base CO Line Attribute Sub Menu1 Terminal Menu2 lt Flash Type CO Line Base Program Main Menu3 CO Line Attribute Sub Menu1 Terminal Menu4 107 GDK 20W Programming Manual lt Flash Timer CO Line Base Program Main Menu3 Sub Menu5 4 Override 1 CO Group System Base Program Main Menu5 System Attribute Sub Menu1 Terminal Menu6 lt Pulse Dial Speed Ratio System Base Program Main Menu5 Sub Menu9 lt Pause Timer System Timers Main Menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu8 Hardware None 31 2 SPEED DIAL LAST NUMBER REDIAL LNR Description The last number dialed is stored up to 24 digits in the station s Last Number Redial buffer The user may request the system redial the last number without the need to redial the entire number
218. lls to off net the incoming CO call is re routed to outside line 3 When the attendant is in off net forward mode it cannot leave a message wait to a station Programming Call Forward Access Station Base Program Main Menu 2 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 4 Unsupervised Conference Timer System Timer Main Menu 6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 14 Hardware None 72 GDK 20W Programming Manual 6 CALL WAITING CAMP ON Description Call Waiting is employed to signal a busy station user of a call waiting in queue The busy station off hook or on speaker phone is notified of the call waiting by a camp on tone and flashing LED on the HOLD SAVE button Operation lt gt To activate Waiting when receiving intercom busy tone Dial the last station digit press the busy DSS Flexible button or Call Wait Flexible button Then the waiting station will hear ring back tone or music It can be programmable to listen to music instead of ring back tone in the waiting station System Program Main Menu 5 System Attributes Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 8 To answer a Call Waiting Press the HOLD SAVE button the active CO Line is placed on Exclusive hold and the call waiting connected If the station is SLT the user press HF Hook Flash before pressing or the last station digit Conditions um c This feature be flexibly assigned to a flex button TRNAS PGM 85
219. ly The Off net Call Forward Announcement is fixed for station off net call forward To play the Off net Call Forward Announcement the system must have the DVIB If a station connected CO party presses the TRNS PGM Key and calls the station in off net call forward the station user will hear the Off net Call Forward Announcement and the CO party will hear the MOH If the station user goes on hook while hearing the announcement the user will immediately receive the co recall ring for transferred CO party 47 GDK 20W Programming Manual Programming Hardware 1 DVIB is needed 18 6 DVIB Description Attendant can record DVIB MOH announcement And this announcement can be used as system MOH source Operation To use recorded DVIB MOH as system MOH source oet MOH Type Main Menu 5 Sub menu 13 as DVIB MOH 3 When you set DVIB MOH there should be an available DVIB port channel and there should be recorded DVIB MOH announcement Type 3 can not be set When MOH type 3 is set then one DVIB port channel is reserved for MOH and DVIB MOH announcement is played DVIB MOH is used with CO Hold Wakeup and Conference To hear DVIB MOH on CO party Press HOLD key during CO conversation then outside party will hear DVIB MOH announcement DVIB MOH has been played since MOH type is set as DVIB MOH outside party may not hear DVIB MOH announcement from the beginning To hear DVIB MOH
220. m at any moment As a default the Attendant is set as station 100 Operation Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed Conditions 1 Wireless Terminal cannot be an attendant station Programming lt Attendant Assignment System Base Program main 5 Sub Menu2 Hardware 2 ATTENDANT CLOCK SET Description The attendant can set the system date and time Operation lt set system clock from the attendant 1 Press the TRNAS PGM button 2 Dial 1 3 Dial 6 digit date 2 digits each for month day year If only time needs to be changed do not dial current date and go to step 4 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button 5 Dial 4 digit time military format In case only date needs to be changed do not dial current time and go to next step 6 Press the HOLD SAVE button Conditions 1 Date Format is Month Day Year MMDDY Y and Time format is Hour Minute HHMM in military form Whenever System Clock sets second set to O When the feature is dialed Confirmation tone is heard 3 When the correct date and time is entered a confirmation tone is heard and station goes to idle status automatically 4 The clock set can be changed by Admin programming also Programming lt Setting System DATE TIME System Base Program main menu5 Sub Menu3 Hardware 112 GDK 20W Programming Manual 3 ATTENDANT RECALL Description Unanswered or abandoned CO Line calls will reca
221. main menu3 CO Line Ring Assignment Sub Menu7 Terminal menu 1 8 DO NOT DISTURB WIRELESS TERMINAL Description A telephone user allowed DND can place his telephone in DND Operation lt To activate 1 Press ON OFF button and dial the Code 53 receive confirmation tone lt To remove 1 Press ON OFF button and dial the Code 53 receive confirmation tone 149 GDK 20W Programming Manual Conditions 1 If not allowed to set the station into then an error tone is presented when attempting to invoke 2 When in DND the station will receive a DND warning tone when lifting handset 3 Attendant can override the DND in the telephone by initiating Camp on Programming lt Access Station Base Program main menu2 Station Attributes Sub Menu1 Terminal menu1 Hardware 9 ICM RINGDOWN Hot Warm Line Description Station can be programmed so that when pressing ON OFF button Idle line selection can be activated Hot Line or when pressing ON OFF gt button and user takes no further action for warm line timer then idle line selection is activated Warm Line Hot warm line can be programmed as access to CO line access to CO group or station number Operation When a user takes no further action for warm line timer after pressing ON OFF e button Idle Line Selection Feature is activated as programmed Conditions
222. me it will be retried after the station becomes idle This feature will be operated regardless of DVIB Access mode Admin Programming Auto Delete of Retrieved and Saved Messages System Base Program Main Menu 5 DVU Setting Sub Menu 20 Terminal Menu 3 Hardware DVIB 5 Automatic Fax Transfer Description The system can determine if an incoming call from the preprogrammed LCO line is for FAX facsimile or for speech terminal by detecting the tone of the call 1100Hz 0 55 ON 3s OFF repeated When the system detects a FAX tone from the incoming line within predetermined time the system transfers the call to the station that is a Fax machine If the FAX tone is not detected within predetermined time system gives rings to stations that are programmed to ring Operation Conditions 1 Only one LCO line can be programmed as a FAX CO line If the FAX CO line is not programmed Automatic Fax Transfer will not be activated Station 104 first SLT port is used as the FAX Station of GDK 20W So FAX machine should be connected to the port for station 104 to use this feature If the FAX tone is not detected within the FAX tone detection time the system will give rings to the stations that are programmed to ring If the FAX CO line is not answered within the FAX CO call time line will be released Outside caller connected to the FAX CO line can hear the ring back tone while system is detecting a FAX tone
223. mer System Timers main menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 20 lt enable System Base Program main menu5 SMDR Attributes Sub Menu8 Terminal menu lt for All Call System Base Program main menu5 SMDR Attributes Sub Menu8 Terminal menu2 60 GDK 20W Programming Manual lt Print Incoming Call Records System Base Program main 5 SMDR Attributes Sub Menu8 Terminal menu3 lt 5 232 baud Rate System Base Program main 5 SMDR Attributes Sub Menu8 Terminal menu4 lt SMDR Save System Base Program main menu5 SMDR Attributes Sub Menu8 Terminal menud lt Record in detail System Base Program main menu5 SMDR Attributes Sub Menu8 Terminal Hardware An ASCII compatible serial printer with proper data communication and an RS 232C connector must be connected to the RS 232C port 29 SMDR Records Save Description The system will save the SMDR information by admin program setting So the attendant will can print the saved SMDR Records and delete the saved SMDR Records Operation The SMDR Save can be set by admin program SMDR PRINT TRNAS PGM 8 1 SMDR DELETE gt TRNAS PGM 8 2 ABORT PRINTING gt TRNAS PGM 8 3 To assign the programmed key for SMDR Print Press the TRNAS PGM button Press specific flexible Button to be programmed as SMDR Print Cod
224. mer value 000 300 then entered data will be displayed 010 10ms TIME 0 300 on LCD CO PGM 1 4 FLASH TIME 4 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently 300 10ms DIAL TIME 0 300 GDK 20W Programming Manual 6 CO LOOP SUPERVISION TIMER SUB MENU 6 The system can recognize the status of a CO line normally open or closed by loop supervision timer Default of CO Loop Supervision Timer is 0 PROCEDURE 1 Enter CO line range Ex 1 4 ENTER CO RANGE 1 8 CO 1 4 2 Press flex button 6 to enter CO LOOP SUPERVISION TIMER menu PRESS FLEX 1 7 LCD shows the current timer value 1 4 LOOP SUPR TMR 3 Enter Loop Supervision Timer value 00 20 then entered data will be 00 100ms DIAL TIME 0 20 displayed on LCD CO PGM 1 4 LOOP SUPR TMR 4 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently 20 100ms DIAL TIME 0 20 187 GDK 20W Programming Manual 7 RING ASSIGNMENT SUB MENU 7 The system can assign the status of CO rings PROCEDURE Ring Assign to Station 1 Enter CO line range 1 4 ENTER CO RANGE 1 8 CO PGM 1 4 2 Press flex button 7 to enter CO RING ASSIGNMENT menu of CO LINE PRESS FLEX KEY 1 7 BASE PROGRAM CO PGM 1 4 RING ASSIGN 3 Press flex button 1 to assign to station and enter station range PRESS FLEX KEY 1 2 COPGM 1 4 STA RING ASSIGN 4 If you pressed flex button1 enter station range to assign ri
225. min software Menu item you can use PC admin is Admin Sys Speed or Keyset Adm in menu bar All Admin features are the same as Local PC Admin 7 f you want to upload or download the Admin database you can use Upload or Download in 155 GDK 20W Programming Manual Transfer menu bar Upload means send Admin DB from PC to GDK 20W Download is the reverse 8 When you upload the Admin database you should reset the system for proper operation with changed admin values 9 Refer to GDK Admin Manual Conditions 1 ISDN card installed inside the PC must support CAPI 2 0 which is the standard interface spec to use ISDN channel in PC In addition it must support HDLC as channel protocol And CAPI2032 DLL should be found in the System directory of Windows which means that driver for Windows 95 is properly installed 2 GDK 20W PC Admin software for PC is needed for this feature 3 After the user entered Admin mode via Key phone the PC Admin isn t available And the reverse case is the same 4 This feature does not affect any other operations of GDK 20W as the keyset admin doesn t 5 Remote access is available only for BRI 6 If the line is of type DID call any station or station group except ISDN station S port GDK 20W accepts the call only in this case In other cases the line connection will be rejected by GDK 20W 7 When the line is released during thi
226. ming Manual Conditions 1 Station A on a ICM call with Station B Station A presses FLASH button receives ICM Dial tone Station B will receive error tone in off hook status or will go to idle status in on hook status 2 Station A on a page announcement Station A presses FLASH button receives ICM Dial tone and the page announcement is terminated 3 When Station A is holding a CO line to transfer and is talking with Station B if Station A presses FLASH button then held CO line is transferred to Station B Programming Hardware None 10 ICM SIGNAL MODE SELECTION Description Each Keyset can set the signaling mode for incoming intercom calls Keysets equipped with the Speaker Phone can select from the 3 signaling modes below Call announce with Hand Free answer back lt TN Tone ringing lt PV Call announce with privacy Stations which are not speaker phone equipped keysets can select between call announce with privacy or tone ringing Operation lt assign the signaling mode 1 2 3 4 Press the TRNAS PGM button Dial 49 confirmation tone is received Dial signaling mode code 1 HF 2 PV 4 Press the HOLD SAVE button confirmation tone is received Conditions 1 answer ICM call in tone mode user should lift handset press MON button 2 Message Waiting Callback Calls Forward will ring in the tone mode regardless of ICM
227. minimize call collision glare Operation Operation of this feature is automatic as programmed Conditions 1 system has 4 groups available with all 4 groups available with a predefined dial code These groups CO line groups 1 through 4 2 Group 1 through 4 lines can be accessed by dialing the Code 8 and the CO line group number Programming lt Group Access Station Base Program Main Menu2 Sub Menu4 Line Group Assignment CO Line Base Program Main Menu3 Sub Menu3 Hardware None 11 CO LINE RELEASE GUARD TIME Description When a station releases from a CO Line the CO Line is held busy to all stations to allow the Central Office equipment time to return the CO Line to an idle condition During the guard time the system sends an idle condition to the CO and busy status is provided to system users Operation Operation of this feature is automatic as programmed Programming lt Line Release Guard Timer System Timers Main Menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu9 Hardware None 93 GDK 20W Programming Manual 12 CO Line Queuing Description The CO Line Queuing allows stations when CO lines are busy to be placed on a list awaiting that CO line line base or a CO line in the same group group base to become available When a CO line becomes available the system calls the waiting station on a first in first out basis Operation To request to b
228. n The system attendant can direct the system to re route forward incoming CO Line calls to a directory telephone number outside the system When a call is received the system will access an outgoing CO Line and dial the telephone number entered by the attendant Note that the system will automatically disconnect the call after the Conference timer has expired Operation To activate CO Line Off Net Call Forward from the attendant 1 Lift handset or press MON button Press DND FOR button Dial Call Forward Code 6 Dial CO Line Group Access Code 9 81 84 881 888 or 8 for all CO lines Dial the Speed Dial bin number with the desired telephone number Replace the handset to go on hook To deactivate CO Line Off Net Call Forward from the attendant 1 2 3 Lift handset or press MON button Press DND FOR button Dial Code Conditions 1 CO to CO call by this feature Incoming CO line Off Net Call Forward is controlled by the Unsupervised Conference Timer if all the CO lines are analog lines So the call is automatically disconnected after the Unsupervised Conference Timer has expired But if CO to CO call includes at least one ISDN CO line the call is not controlled by the Unsupervised Conference Timer So the call is disconnected when ISDN CO line hangs up 2 This feature is activated when a CO call comes in from DISA line and outside caller dials the attendant If the attendant is set to forward ca
229. n Sta HUNT DVU SYS SPD 4 Overflow Timer 000 600 UCD 1 First Announcement 0 99 Timer 2 Second Announcement 0 99 sec Timer 3 Announcement Repeat 0 99 sec Timer 4 Overflow Destination Sta HUNT DVU SYS SPD 5 Overflow Timer 000 600 C VM 1 Ring Timer 0 99 sec 2 Put Mail Index 1 4 If this timer expires after call comes in the group the system announces the greeting if exists tables tables Destination Type 1 STA 2 HUNT 3 DVU 4 SYS SPD 180 Ring 1 Ring Announcement 0 99 sec The second announcement can be Timer provided if the call continues to wait beyond the queue to the 27 announcement timer 2 Overflow Destination Sta HUNT Destination Type DVU SYS SPD 1 STA 2 HUNT 4 SYS SPD 3 DVU TABLE 11 2 39 Button Configuration For Station Group Program Main Menu 11 Sub Menu 1 1 3 Get Mail Index 1 4 2 4 Overflow Destination Sta HUNT DVU SYS SPD 5 Overflow Timer 000 600 218 GDK 20W Programming Manual 11 2 11 2 VOICE MAIL DIALING TABLE HUNT GRP PGM VM TBL 1 Press flex button 2 to select Voice Mail Dialing Table PRESS FLEX KEY 1 2 VOICE MAIL DIALING TBL 2 Press one of the flex button 1 7 to select table you want to change PRESS FLEX 1 7 VM TABLE PUT MAIL 3 Press one of the flex button 1 2 to select between prefix and suffix PRESS FLEX KEY 1 2 PUT MAIL PREFIX MAX 12 4 LCD displays the current Prefix P DIAL DIGIT Dial
230. n converse outside party again O When an held line is seized by other user Then the LOOP key LED turns off and this LOOP key become available and can be used for other call When an incoming CO ring to DKTU via LOOP key The first available LOOP key LED will start flashing 103 GDK 20W Programming Manual Conditions 1 When user presses one of the programmed LOOP key LED Off to make an outgoing call an available idle CO is selected among the first available CO group for that station If there is no available CO line in that group system will search the next available CO group if Override 1 CO Group is programmed as YES When user presses LOOP key LED Off if there is no available idle CO line then busy tone is heard When user presses LOOP key LED Off to make a new outgoing call if there is a direct CO key for the selected line then the direct CO key is used first When user presses one of the programmed LOOP key to make a new outgoing call if there is no direct CO key for that line then the first available idle LOOP key is used first When there is an incoming CO ring if there are more than two available LOOP keys then the first LOOP key is used first LOOP key is used for one CO at a time LOOP key LED is recovered if it has been flashing as direct CO key LED is recovered when station goes to idle state after station flexible button programming LOOP key can be made v
231. n press a flex key 1 8 or A W PRESS FLEX KEY 1 8 STA PGM 100 133 ATTRIBUT 4 Press flex key 1 The user can press a flex key 1 11 or AT W PRESS FLEX KEY 1 11 e Press one of flex key 1 11 to enter a sub program of STATION ATTRIBUTES next LCD e A Change to the next sub menu ISDN STATION ATTRIBUTES e V Change to the previous main menu PAGE ZONE STA 100 133 DND 5 To change the value press the 1 flex key as Table11 2 2 The 1 flex key YES acts as toggle setting STA PGM 100 133 DND 6 Press HOLD SAVE or A YES HOLD SAVE Confirm and update the status of the station the range then LCD displays the current DND status A V Change the current menu to the next previous terminal menu e TRANS PGM Go to the start of the Admin program e REDIAL Go to the 1 level upper menu 175 GDK 20W Programming Manual LCD Display of Terminal Menu in STATION ATTRIBUTES LCD Display FLEX KEY STA 100 133 DND 1 Do Not Disturb DND YES STA PGM 100 133 SPEED 2 Speed Dial Access YES STA PGM 100 133 PAGE 3 Page Access YES STA PGM 100 133 FWD 4 Call Forward Access YES STA PGM 100 133 PLA 5 Preferred Line Answer PLA YES STA PGM 100 133 SPEAKER 6 Speaker Phone Headset YES STA PGM 100 133 AUTO SP 7 Auto Speaker Selection YES STA PGM 100 133 ICM BOX 8 ICM Box Signaling YES STA PGM 100 133 A HOLD 9 Automatic Hold STA PGM
232. n protection from override and camp on which could cause errors in data being transmitted The same Admin programming field Data Line Security previously controlled data line security and 3 1KHz audio bearer capability In BASIC version 2 x or B x new Admin field for 3 1KHz audio bearer capability is added for the users to be able to program each feature as desired Operation A station assigned Data Line Security can not be intruded by an attendant or camped on during conversation Stations or an attendant attempting to camp on or intrude will receive error tone Conditions 1 Rings on station with Data Line Security can not be picked up 2 Rings on station with Data Line Security via DID MSN DISA are not re routed to attendant station 3 During SLT port with Data Line Security is connected to CO line the outside party releases first DISCONNECT message or Loop Disconnect detection signal SLT port will hear silence This feature is able an answering device to release as soon as CO party hang up Programming B Data Line Security Station Base Program main menu2 Station Attributes Sub Menu Terminal menu10 32 GDK 20W Programming Manual B Bearer Capability 3 1KHz Station Base Program Main Menu 2 Station Attributes Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 14 Note In Norwegian version Terminal Menu is 14 for Bearer Capability 3 1 KHz Related Features Hardware None 13 Dial By Name Speed Dial and ICM Cal
233. ncy Description All the messages from line are transmitted to S port transparently Operation Conditions 138 GDK 20W Programming Manual Programming Hardware None 9 Zero Insertion in the CLIP presentation on LCD Description With incoming zero insertion Yes incoming CLI information will be shown with leading 0 Operation Conditions Programming CLIP Station Base Program Main Menu 2 ISDN Station Attributes Sub Menu 2 Terminal Menu 6 Incoming Zero Insertion ISDN Program Main Menu 4 Sub Menu 3 Hardware 139 GDK 20W Programming Manual 8 SUBSCRIPTION DE SUBSCRIPTION WIRELESS TERMINAL 1 SYSTEM ID Description system ID is given to the GDK 20W system attached the wireless terminal GAP for identification system ID which is PARK Potable Access Rights Key is written on MBU Authentication Code is entered at only attendant station before you begin to subscribe wireless terminal GAP to GDK 20W system You should get AC code PARK from a system manager In addition to the above you should get station number of the wireless terminal to be subscribed from a system manager Operation In case of confirming system ID 1 At attendant station TRNAS PGM Flex Button 4 If you press the TRNAS PGM button TRNAS PGM LED will flash 60 IPM Flash and ON OFF LED will be turned on Then you can enter then user program mode Dial HE Press Flexible Button 4 Curr
234. nditions 1 If all the members of UCD group are busy the calling party is inserted to the waiting queue and ring back tone is heard 2 When CO call comes to Circ Term UCD hunt announcements will be provided when DVU Annc 3 1 7 is YES Programming 1 Station Group Program Main Menu 11 2 DVU Announcement 3 CO Base Program Main Menu 3 CO Attributes Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 7 Hardware 1 DVIB is needed 2 18 5 DVIB DVU Announcement with Station Off Net Call Forward Description When the external and internal call is ringing to the station which is programmed to station off net call forward the system can provide the DVU announcement about off net call forward to the caller Operation To record the Off net Call Forward Announcement Refer to DVIB System Greetings and Prompts feature 1 With pressing announcement type Dial 1 Announcement Type1 System Greeting and DVIB MOH 2 Dial announcement number 9 About DVU Announcement In Station Off net Call Forward 1 When the station in off net call forward is called by internal or external user the internal or external user can hear the Off net Call Forward Announcement 2 system dial outside party number automatically Conditions If the Off net Call Forward Announcement is not recorded or there is no available DVIB port the system can not provide the DVU announcement and off net call forward is operated immediate
235. ne 7 CO LINE TRANSFER SLT Description CO Lines may be transferred by single line telephones Operation To perform an unannounced CO line transfer 1 While connected to a Co line briefly press and release Flash the telephone hook witch at Station A Intercom dial tone is received The CO line is placed on Exclusive Hold Transfer Recall Timer is activated Dial the intercom number of idle Station B Intercom ring back tone is heard Station B received intercom ringing Station A goes On Hook status Station B receives CO ringing Transfer recall timer starts Station B answers the transferred CO line by lifting the handset Station A will be recalled if the CO line is not answered within a programmed period of time If Station A is busy or doesn t answer within the programmed time period the transferred CO line will recall the attendant lt To perform an announced line transfer to an idle station 1 While connected to a CO line flash the hook witch ICM dial tone is received The CO line is placed on Exclusive Hold Transfer recall timer is activated 2 Dial the intercom number of idle Station B Intercom ring back tone is heard 3 Station A informs Station B of a transferred call 4 Station A hangs up Station B is connected to the transferred CO line Conditions 1 When the user is in the supervised transfer mode and he wishes to converse with both the new station party and th
236. ne call Operation Operation of this feature is automatic as programmed Programming lt J Ring Detection Timer System Timers Main Menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu6 lt Stop Detection Timer System Timers Main Menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu7 Hardware None 19 HOLD EXCLUSIVE w RECALL Description CO Lines can be placed in a waiting state such that other stations in the system will be unable to access the CO Line Only the station placing the CO Line on Exclusive Hold can access the held CO Line When placed on Exclusive Hold the Exclusive Hold Recall Timer is initiated If the CO Line is on hold after expiration of the timer the station that placed the call on hold will receive a recall The station will receive the recall for the Hold Recall duration after which the attendant will also receive a recall signal If the call remains unanswered for the Attendant Recall Time the CO Line will be returned to an idle state and recalls terminated Operation lt To place a CO Line on Exclusive Hold from a Keyset Press the HOLD SAVE button only when Hold Preference is set as Exclusive Hold lt To place a CO Line on Exclusive Hold from an SLT Make Hook flash and dial 5 9 only when Hold Preference is set as Exclusive Hold 98 GDK 20W Programming Manual lt To access CO Line on Exclusive Hold from the holding Keyset 1 Lift the Handset or press t
237. ng from the ENTER STA RANGE dial fad ex 101105 and press HOLD SAVE button CO 1 4 gt STA 100 105 RING 5 Press flex button 1 to change ring assignment of the stations FLEX 1 The flex button acts 4 way toggle No ring Day ring Night ring All ring CO 1 4 gt STA 100 105 RING 6 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently DAY FLEX KEY 1 PGM 1 Enter CO line range Ex 1 4 ENTER CO RANGE 1 8 CO PGM 1 4 2 Press flex button 7 to enter CO RING ASSIGNMENT menu of CO LINE PRESS FLEX KEY 1 7 BASE PROGRAM CO PGM 1 4 RING ASSIGN 3 Press flex button 2 to assign ring to Hunt Group PRESS FLEX KEY 1 2 1 4 HUNT GRP RING 4 Select Hunt Group by pressing flex1 4 FLEX KEY 1 4 CO 1 4 HUNT GRP RING 5 Then LCD will display current ring assignment of Hunt Group 61 NO FLEX KEY 1 4 If you want to change the CO ring assignment press the flex button 1 The flex button acts in 4 way toggle No ring Day ring Night ring ring CO 1 4 HUNT GRP RING 6 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently 61 DAY FLEX KEY 1 4 FLEX KEY TERMINAL MENU DEFAULT REMARK 1 Ring assignment to Station 1 ALL RING To change ring assignment press Station Station 2 34 NO RING appropriate flex button The flex button acts in 4 way toggle No ring Day ring Night Hunt Group 1 NO RING ring All ring Hunt Group 2 0 NO RING Hunt Group 3 1 DAY RING Hunt Group
238. ng intercom calls and CO lines transferred to unattended key or SLT station may be retrieved by other SLT station Operation lt pickup call 1 An unattended keyset or SLT receives ringing signal 2 Any other SLT in GDK 20W may intercept the call by going off hook and dialing the Pick up code 66 3 The calling party will automatically be connected to the pick up station and the called station will cease all audible and visual signals Conditions Programming None Related Features Hardware None 4 CALL WAITING SLT Description Call Waiting is used to notify a busy station that another station is waiting for him The busy station is notified of the call by a camp on tone Operation lt With Station A SLT Station Key station or SLT 1 Station A dials the station B number in conversation Station A receives ICM busy tone Station A makes hook flash and dials to camp on Station A receives ICM ring back tone Station B will receive a camp on tone via the handset or through the speaker N 121 GDK 20W Programming Manual Conditions 1 Single line telephone can receive call waiting and answer it by making Hook Flash and dialing Code 59 Programming None Related Features Hardware None 5 CO FLASH SLT Description While on a CO Line a user can request new dial tone to place a new call or when behind a PABX activate a PABX feature The sys
239. ng specified CO Lines connected to the system Upon answering the outside call the system will provide the user intercom dial tone and the user may then access the desired resource using dial codes Programming allows the assignment for night and day mode operation and required use of authorization codes limiting CO Line access by DISA callers 95 GDK 20W Programming Manual Operation DISA is typically configured by assigning a special non published Central Office line number to the programmed DISA line which provides automatic answer immediately upon ring detection When the correct authorization code is dialed the system provides ICM Dial tone to the outside party thus providing access to the system resources Dialing an ICM number will result in CO line ring and LED flash of the DISA line to that station The station then answers the ringing DISA line and is connected to the DISA caller Dialing authorization code and a CO access code will access a CO line connected to the system and provide dial tone of that line to the DISA party who may then dial out of the system on that line Conditions 1 Each DISA line will be assigned in programming as a full time DISA line or as night time operation only Night time only DISA will function as normal lines on the system in the day mode of the operation 2 Ifthe CO line is busy when a DISA caller tries to access it busy tone is received for 5 seconds before ICM Dial tone is again presented to
240. nswer in 30 seconds a message wait will be left at that Station If the station s message queue is full the call back request will be canceled Conditions 1 The call back will always ring in the tone mode regardless of the intercom signaling mode switch 2 A station can leave only one of callback or message A new request overrides a previous 3 CALLBK LED will continue to flash until all the call back requests have been serviced 4 A station attempting to leave a message at a station which has 5 messages already left and one of those is not equal to an attempting station will receive ICM busy tone 5 A station receiving message waiting can be given a message waiting reminder tone of 0 5 second duration at prescribed interval The interval of the message waiting reminder tone is system programmable from 00 to 60 minutes When a reminder tone is not desired 00 is entered 6 Thereminder tone will continue until all messages have been retrieved 7 Station that forwards his station to another station cannot leave a message wait In the case of unconditional forward 8 Station that forwards his station to another station with unconditional mode cannot leave a call back With other forward types except unconditional type he can request call back 9 Call back to a station in a conference or paging is allowed 10 A station may call back to station s that left messages in any desired order by calling station which he
241. ntinuously ring in the assigned stations 4 When there is no available DVIB port the call will be queued to the station after Normal Ring DVIB Timer expires And the call will not be forwarded to DVIB until there is an available DVIB port 5 Exception When a station in forward type 7 is the only ring assigned station for that incoming Co line CO Ring Assignment to Station then outside caller hears recorded user greeting for that station after DVIB Station Forward Answer time So the caller can leave his voice message to the ringing station In this case Normal Ring to DVIB timer is not started 117 GDK 20W Programming Manual Programming Normal Ring to DVIB Timer Station Base Program Main Menu 6 Station Attribute Sub Menu 2 Terminal Menu 5 DVIB Access Station Base Program Main Menu 2 Station Attribute Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 11 DVIB User Record Timer System Timer Main Menu 6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 24 DVIB Valid User Message Timer System Timer Main Menu 6 System Timer 2 Sub Menu 2 Terminal Menu 2 8 TO SET CURRENT TIME 1 HOUR EARLY LATE Description Attendant station can set the current time 1 hour early or late by TRNAS PGM Code 1 or Code 2 This feature will be used when the current time is changed for Day Time Saving Operation To set current time 1 hour early at attendant Press TRNAS PGM Code 1 O To set current t
242. nu 1 Terminal Menu 1 Group Member Assignment Station Group Program Main Menu 11 Hunt Group Program Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 2 Hardware None 100 GDK 20W Programming Manual 23 LCR Least Cost Routing Description Least Cost Routing LCR is a system programmable feature that automatically selects the least expensive route available at the current time of the day and an outgoing CO call is made This programming eliminates the necessity for the user to dial the access code of the least expensive carrier If a user dials a number which is the same as leading code programmed and is not in exception table the programmed CO group is selected and the dialed number is changed deletion addition or alternation before the number is dialed out Operation These Examples shows operation steps Example 1 If dialed digit is 123456789 and it is not in Exception Table search the LDT Leading Digit Table Assume that code 12345 is in bin 03 of LDT and the index of DMT Digit Modification Table for the current day zone and time zone is 24 In DMT if removal position of index 24 is 2 and the number of removal digit is 2 then 123456789 is to be 1456789 If added digit is 0 567890123456 and added position is 2 then the added digits will be inserted in the gng position of changed code 145 So the sent digit will be 10P567890123456456789 Example 2 If dialed digit is 80235 and it i
243. o be Removed 4 Add Position 01 01 13 Determine the position of CD stream after removal where the A stream will be inserted CO group Determines which CO group is used for LCR dialing Alternative NONE 00 99 Determine alternative DMT index when there is no idle DMT Index CO line in CO group TABLE 11 2 38 Button Configuration For DMT Table Main Menu 10 Sub Menu 5 216 GDK 20W Programming Manual 11 2 11 HUNT GROUP PGM VM TABLE MAIN MENU 11 11 2 11 1 HUNT GROUP PROGRAM Stations in the system can be grouped so that incoming calls will search hunt for an idle station in the group Three hunting processes can be assigned Circular Terminal or UCD Or 2 extra methods are also available Ring VM PROCEDURE HUNT GRP PGM VM TBL 1 Press flex button1 to select Hunt Group Program PRESS FLEX KEY 1 2 HUNT GROUP PROGRAM 2 Press one of the flex button 1 4 to select group no Flex button 1 4 means PRESS FLEX KEY 1 4 GRPNO Munt group 61 64 HUNTGROUP61 3 Press one of the flex button 1 3 to select terminal menu of Hunt Group PRESS FLEX KEY 1 3 4 LCD displays the current type Dial digit 1 5 to select Hunt Group NONE DIAL DIGIT 1 5 we Gare eni pes HUNT GROUP 61TYPE 5 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently UCD DIAL DIGIT 1 5 LCD Display of Terminal Menu in Hunt Group Program LCD Display FLEX KEY HUNT GROUP 61 TYPE 1 Hunt Group Type TERM DIAL DIGIT 1 5 6
244. o be removed Flex key 4 Add Position Flex key 5 CO Group Flex key 6 Alternative DMT Index DMT ADDED DIGIT 25DGT A Added digit stream 12345678901234567890E Dial the Added Digit Stream 25digit DMT REMOVE POSITION RP Removal Position 01 DIAL DIGIT 01 12 Dial Remove Position 01 12 DMT REMOVE NO OF DGT RN Removal number of digits of CODE in each table 01 DIGIT 00 12 Dial Remove No of Digit 00 12 DMT ADD POSITION AP Add Position 01 DIAL DIGIT 01 13 Dial Add Position 01 13 DMT CO GROUP C CO group 1 DIAL DIGIT 1 4 Dial CO group number 1 4 TO delete CO group number press SPEED Key DMT ALT DMT INDEX ALT Alternative DMT index 01 DIAL DIGIT 00 99 Dial DMT Index 00 99 FLEX 9 1 Access Disable 3 way toggle DISABLE Disable LCR DISABLE OVERRIDE LCR whose attribute is COL can be OVERRIDE accessed only through Common CO Access Code ALWAYS 90 ALWAYS Dial after seizure of CO line with dialing with Common CO Access Code 9 0 and Dial internally without seizure CO line 2 Day Zone Belongs Zone to Zone 1 Day 1 7 3 Time Zone Belongs Zone 3 GDK accepts it as same value for 00 and 24 and changes to to Zone 1 Time 00 24 00 if input is 24 as starting value and vice versa note The time not belonging to any zone will be 4 considered as zone 1 note 10 13 means 10 00 00 12 59 59 LDT 00 99
245. ogramming Manual NO TONE RING DEFAULT SPAIN KOREA 1000Hz 1 WU M 11 MCN M 18 DIFFERENTIAL RING 1 REMINDER TONE 4 CO RING 19 INTERCOM RING 20 ALARM RING 21 CALL WAIT BURST RING 22 QUEUE RING 23 _SINGLE ALARM RING 24 _ DIAL TONE 11 DIAL WARNING TONE 12 _ RING BACK TONE 5 BUSY TONE 1 ERROR TONE 2 DND TONE 3 CONF TIMEOUT TONE 13 Reserved HOLD TONE 15 ICM PAGE TONE 7 HFTB WARNING TONE 8 OHVA TONE 14 SINGLE ERROR TONE 10 _ ADMIN ERROR TONE 18 LCR Dummy CO Dial Tone Reserved DUAL HOWLING TONE dL d EI 1260Hz i1 ro DIFFERENTIAL RING 2 DIFFERENTIAL RING 3 _ DIFFERENTIAL RING 4 Reserved Reserved 5 Reserved Reserved 5 620Hz 950Hz naana 425Hz 1260Hz T70Hz 1020Hz 1633Hz 1280Hz 425Hz 425Hz i lt lt QOL RING BACK 29021 E SIUE HN S 425 2 ee ee ee ee ee m ALL CALL PAGE TONE 6 ee ee ee 17 GDK 20W Programming Manual 1 7 GDK 20W CONFIGURATION 2 Basic Base WTIB SLOT SLOTI CO SLOT2 TOTAL Station Base Station 4 2slt 1
246. old Station Pilot Number Door Open 1 B Button program is available Individual Retrieve Held CO Line 10 49 100 499 85 0 881 888 0 8u su ss EHE LL cL G qM 3 69 56 Hook Flash 51 Hook Flash 156 Hook Flash 59 2 WHTU Wireless Handset Telephone Unit 10 99 or 100 999 MM s cl 6 HOLD SAVE ee 86 HOLD SAVE uc 98 E io 69 IPGM 56 T Hook Flash 51 NN Hook Flash Hook Flash 56 Hook Flash 59 Remark Extension Numbering Plan will be selected by Admin Program 1 4 LCD MONTHS 2 or 3 digit station numbers by CUL Aa ee ee ee eee 881 888 BH1 8HB 00 SOT B S E RETIRER 2 8 Button 2 8 Button SLLIeMBusyTone SLT Italian Finnish 0t 02 o4 o7 08 09 to n 2 A E A Spanish FEB MAR Finnish example of date 30 07 98 In case of DDMMYY order System Base Program Main 5 PR German o o2 os o4 os oe or o 10 12 BR 14 LCD Display Mode Sub Menu4 GDK 20W Programming Manual 1 5 AUDIBLE SIGNALS TONE RING CADENCE Alarm Ring Continuous 0 2 sec ON 0 2 sec OFF Repeat Alarm Ring Single All Call Page Tone 1 sec O
247. on not allowed to access DND will receive an error tone when the DND FWD button is pressed 2 Pressing the DND FWD button while the telephone is ringing eliminates the ringing when DND is allowed 3 Pressing the DND FWD button while Call Forward is activated cancels Call Forward 4 AnlCM calling station will receive tone when dialing a station 5 DND allowance is programmable for ICM Box 6 Attendant can override the stations in DND by using camp on Attendant does not have DND service 7 Station is Preset Forwarded to Station B If Station B is in then the incoming call will bypass Station B and forward to the next station in the Preset Forward chain If Station B is the last station in the chain then the incoming call will ring at Station A until answered 99 Recalling Wake ring Alarm ring can override 9 A station in is out of service for calls to a station and will be bypassed by calls forwarded to the station Programming lt DND Station Base Program main menu2 Station Attributes Sub Menu1 Terminal Menu1 Hardware None 9 ICM DIAL TONE REORDER ICM FLASH Description While on an intercom call with another station or during a page a station may terminate the call and receive new Intercom dial tone using the FLASH button Operation lt To request new Intercom dial tone while on an intercom call Press FLASH button 75 GDK 20W Program
248. onfirming AC code 1 At attendant station TRANS PGM Flex Button 3 If you press the TRNAS PGM button TRNAS PGM LED will flash 60 IPM Flash and ON OFF LED will be turned on Then you can enter then user program mode Dial Press Flexible Button 3 Current AC code will be displayed in LCD In case of changing AC code 1 Atattendant station TRNAS PGM Flex Button3 Code Max 8 Digits HOLD SAVE The key sequence of the AC code D D D 0 Up to 8 digits decimal representation If you press TRNAS PGM button TRNAS PGM LED will flash G60 IPM Flash and ON OFF LED will be turned on Then you can enter then user program mode Dial Press Flexible Button 3 Enter the AC code If you press the HOLD PGM button you will be heard confirm tone Condition 1 AC code is must be programmed for user subscription 2 AC code must be programmed one time after system was installed If you change AC code under system operation it may not operate properly Ex Subscribed terminal may not receive the incoming call or not make an outgoing call 3 If PARK code are changed you must enter the AC code again 4 Theinitial AC code is 000000 5 AC code change will not affect the system operation except subscribing new wireless terminal Programming Hardware 141 GDK 20W Programming Manual 3 User Subscription Description This procedure is for subscribing the wir
249. or No Answer Case 18 System Base Program Main Menu 5 DID DISA Destination Sub Menu 17 Terminal Menu 2 19 DID DISA Forward To DVIB for Attendant No Answer Case 20 System Base Program Main Menu 5 DID DISA Destination Sub Menu 17 Terminal Menu 3 21 DID DISA No Answer Timer 22 System Timer Main Menu 6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 13 23 DVU User Record Timer 24 System Timer Main Menu 6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 24 25 Valid User Message Timer 26 System Timer Main Menu 6 System Timer 2 Sub Menu 2 Terminal Menu 2 Hardware 1 DVIB is needed 2 18 3 DVIB User Greeting amp Voice Message Wait Description the access to the DVIB port is allowed a user can record User Greeting and then his her calls will be forwarded to DVIB port after DVIB Station Forward Answer time programmable And caller can leave voice message wait at this station after user greeting Recording time of each voice message is bounded by the DVIB User Record Time which is 20 seconds by default programmable Operation DKTU Users To record user greeting from a Station Off Hook DND FOR Code 7 Code Voice On Hook User greeting is stored permanently and Call Forward to the DVIB is activated To delete user greeting from a Station Off Hook DND FOR Code 7 Code On Hook User greeting is deleted and Call Forward to the DVIB is cleared
250. ote2 TABLE 11 2 14 ISDN Program Main Menu 4 Note 1 Above version 3 0 MSN destination can be either a station a station group or DVU Note 2 The switch SW7 2 must be turned on to enable Loop Back feature Otherwise it is no use setting Loop Back ON in Admin 189 GDK 20W Programming Manual 1 TEI SUB MENU 1 PROCEDURE ISDN PROGRAM 1 Press flex key 1 to select Type menu of ISDN PROGRAM PRESS FLEX KEY 1 10 ISDN TYPE 2 LCD will show the current status To program TEI Type press the flex key AAAA PRESS FLEX 1 4 1 4 for toggle setting Each flex key means each ISDN port FIXED LED On AUTO LED Off ISDN TYPE 3 LCD will show again the changed status AFAA PRESS FLEX 1 4 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently A Move to the next sub menu CALLING SUB ADDRESS V Move to the previous sub menu DID DIGIT CONVERSION NOTE After you change TEI type press RESET button on to operate with the new TEI type 2 ISDN COLP TABLE SUB MENU 9 If COLR is not activated the will send information to PX when a called party the incoming call according to the type of calling party number PROCEDURE ISDN PGM COLP TABLE 1 Dial entry number 01 10 to program a table DIAL ENTRY NO 01 10 ISDN PGM COLP TABLE 2 Dial COLP number max 10digit 01 1234E DIAL NO e To delete installed COLP number pr
251. oup member presses DND FOR button during ringing The ring stops and the member pressing DND FOR button is in DND mode Other ringing members continue ringing If there is no other member ringing the ring will start ringing again when a member is available When a CO call is transferred to hunt group Unscreened Transfer Transferred CO call rings the station which receives intercom call for transferring the call with hunt process by the hunt type as Circular Terminal UCD or Ring So the CO line party can hear associated hunt announcement also Hunt Announcement for Circular Terminal group the1 and the 274 Announcement for UCD group Conditions 1 B W GDK 20W does not have wrap up time and supervisor for UCD group which is different from other GDK series 4 Station groups and 10 members in each group are available Astation can be a member of only one station group Astation in DND is temporarily removed from the hunt group A station in Call Forward mode is temporarily removed from the hunt group A direct call to that station will be forwarded A hunt pilot number can not be a member of another hunt group Circular and Terminal Hunt Group have an announcement Circular and Terminal Hunt Group Greeting This announcement is provided after Ring Timer is expired UCD Hunt Group has two announcements UCD Group First and Second Announcement These announcements are provided if all
252. ow Entry no 01 10 2 Canned Toll Table Entry no 01 10 Authorization Code Table Entry no 01 30 TOLL TABLE AUTHORIZATION CODE TABLE AUTHOR CODE TABLE FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN Numbering Plan Type Extension Basic Station Number Digit Size 3 2 Flexible Station Number Assignment Flexible number for port 1 24 flex 1 24 Flexible number for port25 34 flex 1 10 LCR Access Mode Day Zone LCR PROGRAM Time Zone of Day Zone LDT Table DMT Table amp N amp 162 GDK 20W Programming Manual FLEX KEY MAIN MENU FLEXKEY SUBMENU STATION GROUP HUNT Group Program 1 4 PROGRAM 1 Group Type Cir Term UCD VM Ring None 2 Group Member 3 Attribute of Hunt Group type Cir Term 1 No Answer Timer 2 Ring Timer UCD 1 First Announcement Timer 2 Second Announcement Timer 3 Announcement Timer VM 1 Ring Timer 2 Put Mail Index 3 Get Mail Index 2 VM Dialing Table 1 Put Mail 2 Get Mail 3 Busy 4 No Answer 5 Error 6 DND d 7 jDiseonect 2 22222 12 PRINT DATABASE 1 Station Database Print 2 CO Line Database Print 3 ISDN Database Print 4 System Feature Database Print 5 System Timer Database Print 6 Toll Table Print T Authorization Code Table Print 8 Flexible Station Number Print 9 LCR Database Print 10 Hunt Group Voice Mail Table Print 11 Database Print 11 1 6 DEFAULT VAL
253. ow Battery Description This feature indicates information for battery amount Operation Refer to wireless terminal user guide Condition 1 When the battery are empty user will hear beep sound every 20sec and LOW BATT will be displayed 145 GDK 20W Programming Manual 9 Wireless Terminal Features 1 CALL FORWARD WIRELESS TERMINAL Description This feature allows single line telephones to direct intercom calls and transferred CO lines to be forwarded to another station Operation 5 To activate the call forward condition on Wireless Terminal 1 Press ON OFF button and dial the Code 54 2 Dial call forward type 1 unconditional 2 busy 3 no answer 4 busy no answer 5 off net 3 Dial the station number where the call is to be forwarded lt To deactivate call forward condition 1 Press ON OFF button and dial the Code 54 2 Dial Conditions 1 Call Forward will remain engaged until manually released 2 Acall cannot be forwarded to a telephone in DND 3 The telephone will give Call Forward warning tone when the ON OFF button is pressed to indicate the telephone is in the Call Forward mode 4 A station denied the use of FWD in programming will receive error tone when the Code 54 is dialed 5 A call forwarding station cannot initiate a message wait Programming lt Forward Access Station Base Program main menu2 Station Attributes S
254. pace is allocated to store up to 79 telephone numbers with up to 24 digits each These numbers are available for easy access by all stations allowed in system database The system can be programmed to apply the Station COS for assigned stations using specified System Speed Dial numbers Operation lt To place a call using System Speed Dial from a Keyset 1 Lift the Handset or press the MON button 2 Press the SPEED button 3 Dial the System Speed Dial bin 21 99 lt store System Speed Dial numbers from Keyset Press the TRNAS PGM button 1 2 Press the SPEED button 3 Dial the System Speed Dial bin 21 99 4 If desired press the CO Line button 5 Dial the desired telephone number max 24 digits 6 Press the HOLD SAVE button Conditions 1 If restricted from access to system speed dial error tone will be received when the speed bin number is dialed 2 Ifall CO Lines in the group are busy busy tone will be received when the bin number is dialed 3 There can be 24 digits in a system speed bin including pause button pulse to DTMF switch over 109 GDK 20W Programming Manual flash commands FLASH button and no display as first digit If dialing an empty system speed bin error tone will be received The last 39 bins bin 61 99 system speed bins will not be monitored by toll restriction except for station w COS 5 6 When using LNR this telephone num
255. programmed flexible button flashes at a rate of 120 IPM while a call is parked in the corresponding parking location 5 The associated LED of the parked CO line is steadily turned on while the corresponding call is parked And the call can not be retrieved by directly pressing the CO line button since it is not flashing When a user tries to park outside call to a location that is already occupied ICM busy tone is heard Parked calls can be retrieved only until the Call Park Recall timer expires after being parked Station cannot initiate call park feature if it has intruded the corresponding CO call Programming Park Recall Timer System Timer Main Menu 6 System Timer 2 Sub Menu 2 Terminal Menu 4 Hold Recall Timer System Timer Main Menu 6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 4 Attendant Recall Timer System Timer Main Menu 6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 5 5 CALL FORWARD Preset Description The system database can be configured so that incoming CO Lines which are programmed to ring to station can be forwarded to an assigned station if the call is not answered in a predetermined time Preset Forward Timer Operation Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed Conditions 1 busy station programmed in the database to receive CO ring will receive muted ringing an incoming CO call and the CO line is forwarded to the predetermined station 2 P
256. ptional feature which permits the system to route calls based on caller s input just one digit rather than having the call routed to an operator System Greetings and DVIB MOH Announcement type 1 CCR Seventh Announcement CCR Eighth Announcement CCR Ninth Announcement Operation To activate CCR 1 When call is answered by a system programmed with CCR the caller is presented with a DVU announcement which give a choice of destinations 2 According to the guide message the caller uses dial pad of a DTMF telephone to select one of the destinations 3 Basedon caller input the call can be routed to a telephone system extension Hunt group speed dial page or system greeting Conditions 1 If a caller dials full destination number the call will be routed to the destination according to numbering plan 2 Ifa caller dials only one digit and some period expires GDK system will compare the digit with CCR table If the digit is matched with CCR table the call will route to a destination extension hunt group a system greeting Speed Otherwise the call will be routed to DID DISA error destination ADMIN 5 6 2 3 feature is supported only for DID or DISA 4 fthe caller presented with a system announcement then the caller can retry 3 times for CCR 5 the caller dial during CCR the first DVIB announcement will be played again 6 Ifthe caller before next DVIB announcement the
257. queued CO line will ring on the station regardless of the station signal mode 5 Ifthe waiting station is busy and the queued CO line is available that station is placed at the bottom of the queued list The available CO line will then be directed to the next station that is idle 6 If the waiting station is idle and the queued CO line signals the station for 15 seconds the queue is canceled and the next station in the queue is signaled 7 Incase of line base requesting the queued line will be presented when idle 8 case of group base requesting any line in a queued group can be presented when idle 9 When the waiting station is received the callback ring from queued CO line and then the incoming call exists through the CO line the callback ring will be canceled and the station will receive the incoming CO ring 10 When the user dials code 9 and request the co queuing the request will be regarded as group base queuing request 94 GDK 20W Programming Manual 13 DID MSN DAY NIGHT DESTINATION Description MSN table has two destinations station number and or station group for system day mode and night mode respectively When DID call is received with MSN number it rings at the destination station or station group according to the current system mode Day or Night mode Operation Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed Conditions 1 The CO line should be programmed as DID Line 2 call
258. r greeting is recorded user greeting is announced after DVIB Station Forward Answer time expires In case of DID DISA call the DID DISA No Answer Timer is not started If a station that has user greeting is in P or H mode the answering modes are ignored and the station works as if it is in T mode If CALLBK is pressed at the calling station before user greeting is played the message wait only with station number is saved to the called station 45 GDK 20W Programming Manual 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Record Start Prompt Prompt 9 and then Beep tone are provided after user greeting Caller can record voice message after Beep tone If the caller hang up within Valid User Message Time after Beep tone then voice message wait is not saved If a station with user greeting is in use the calling station of an incoming call can not hear the user greeting However the calling station can still leave a Call Back request by pressing CALLBK button If all the ports of DVIB are in use when the user greeting of a station needs to be provided Ring Back tone is provided And system starts DVIB Station Forward Answer timer to retry to answer Code DND FOR 7 can be programmed to a flexible button For 2 8 button keyset Code 5 4 7 can be programmed to a flexible button While user greeting is announced for an intercom incoming call called station continues ringing for a user to answer
259. r tone will be heard when recording is tried 4 If there is a recorded announcement already the recorded announcement will be played after user dialed the announcement number 5 When the attendant station records or deletes any of the System Greetings and Prompts all the DVIB ports should be idle Otherwise busy tone will be heard 6 When the call is being transferred to attendant station Transfer to Attendant Prompt is announced to the caller and Ring Back Tone will be heard after the announcement 7 there are no recorded greetings or announcements the corresponding tones will be heard 39 GDK 20W Programming Manual 8 External caller hears Ring Back Tone for a few seconds until the System Greeting announcement is started 9 At most 400 voice messages are available with the optional memory installed on DVIB Among these there are only 20 messages that are used for system s purpose They are for example System Greetings Announcements for station group DVIB MOH and etc Only 6 of them are being used now and the remaining 14 are reserved for future 10 When DVIB MOH is used as the source of system MOH 1 port of DVIB should be always reserved for MOH feature even when is not used 11 If DVIB is not installed in the system or there is no channel available DVIB error tone is heard when MOH type 3 DVU is selected in Admin programming 12 Programming 1 DVU Access Station Base Program Main Menu
260. r updating database permanently YES FLEX KEY TERMINAL MENU RANGE DEFAULT LED Fwd to DVU Busy Case No OFF Fwd to DVU No Answer Case No OFF Fwd to DVU Attendant No Answer Case No OFF TABLE 11 2 28 Button Configuration For DID DISA Fwd to DVU Sub Menu 17 of SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM 204 GDK 20W Programming Manual 18 CCR TABLE SUB MENU 18 PROCEDURE SYS PGM CCR TABLE 1 To select DAY NIGHT or OTHER CCR Table press Flex BTN 1 2 PRESS FLEX KEY 1 2 Flex 1 DAY NIGHT CCR Flex 2 OTHER CCR OTHER CCR TABLE 2 Toselect CCR Table number dial 1 9 DIAL ENTRY 1 9 CCR TABLE 1 ANNC 11 To select each entry number of CCR table press Flex BTN 1 10 then the PRESS FLEX KEY 1 10 entered data will be displayed on the LCD CCR TABLE 1 ANNC 11 To program call routing destination dial destination type as follow INDEX 1 NOT ASSIGNED 1 5 2 3 DVU 4 DVU DROP 5 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL 6 INTERNAL PAGE 7 EXTERNAL PAGE 8 ALL CALL PAGE CCR TABLE 1 ANNC 11 To program station number dial the station number Ex Dial station INDEX 1 STA 100 number 100 CCR TABLE 1 ANNC 11 To program Hunt Group dial a hunt group number Ex Dial Hunt group INDEX 1 HUNT GRP 62 62 CCR TABLE 1 ANNC 11 To program system announcement dial a DVU system announcement INDEX 1 DVU 11 number Ex Dial sys announcement 11 CCR TABLE 1 ANNC 11 To program system drop the CO line af
261. ram Main Menu 2 Station Attribute Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 11 Hardware 1 Access 82 GDK 20W Programming Manual 4 CO LINE FEATURES 1 Auto Call Number Redial ACNR Description This feature allows a station user to press REDIAL button and put him into an Auto Redial mode to automatically redial a busy number or no answer number Operation To use ACNR in LCO Line 1 The LCOB board with CPT should be installed 2 The CPT TN Detect should be set YES To activate ACNR 1 station user places a CO call and receives busy or no answer then the user presses the REDIAL button and goes on hook 2 station is then placed in Auto Redial mode and ACNR Pause Timer is invoked Then the REDIAL button of the station start flashing until ACNR feature is canceled 3 To deactivate ACNR 1 Press flashing REDIAL button to deactivate ACNR in the idle state 2 Or lift the handset or press the MUTE button during the station seizing CO line is performing auto redial 3 is deactivated automatically when ACNR retry counter expires When the ACNR feature is performed 1 When the ACNR Pause Timer expires the ACNR will be performed Then the station is considered on hook dialing mode and the CO line is seized and the last dialed number is automatically dialed 2 During dialing MUTE button and MON is lit Upon completion of dialing the automatic redial tone detector will be attache
262. rd window Then dial the Admin Password 4 Digits Press the OK button the admin password is matched the program will start the flash upload If not the Remote Flash Upload program will NOOO gt not start and the ISDN line will be disconnected immediately If admin password isn t programmed 1 Press the OK button without entering the admin password in 4 step 2 The program will start the flash upload 23 GDK 20W Programming Manual Conditions 1 For Local Flash Upload the system doesn t compare admin password So the user can perform flash upload without entering the admin password regardless of the programmed admin password 2 Admin password is supported from PC Admin version 2000 Sep 18 Admin Programming 1 Admin Password System Base Program Main Menu 5 Sub Menu 19 2 ALARM SIGNAL REPEATING Description The system can be programmed to recognize the status of an external contact normally open or closed from a relay When activated the system will signal programmed stations with a single tone repeated at 1 minute intervals or continuous tone This capability is commonly employed to provide remote alarm signals When used as an Alarm the assigned stations receive the programmed signal To stop the signal the Alarm must be deactivated reset from a station assigned to receive the alarm signal Operation At detection of the Alarm contact the system responds by sending
263. re on a flex button as if pressed On the other hand Idle Line Selection for a station which is assigned to warm line is activated when takes no action for Warm Line Timer after going off hook Warm Line Operation Lift handset or press MON button and takes no action then Idle Line Select Feature is activated as programmed Conditions 1 Any flexible button may be assigned as the Idle line selection When lifting handset or pressing the MON button the system will act as if the user presses the programmed button 2 If the user selects an another feature prior to going off hook Idle Line Selection is not activated Si SLT also allows Idle Line Selection except Flex Button Feature 4 User takes no action after lifting handset or pressing the MON button and warm line timer is expired then idle line selection is activated 5 If Warm Line Timer is greater than Dial tone Timer 10 seconds Idle Line selection for warm line cannot activated Programming Warm Line Timer System Timer main menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu19 Warm Line Selection Station Base Program main menu2 Sub Menu Auto Speaker Selection Station Base Program main menu2 Attributes Sub Menu Terminal Menu7 Related Features Hardware None 54 GDK 20W Programming Manual 24 INTERCOM ICM BOX Description A convenient ICM Box can be connected to the system The ICM Box can receive page announcements intercom
264. reset Call Forward is chainable only to other predetermined preset forward stations specified in the database up to a chain of 5 stations If a CO line forwarded by Preset Call Forward encounters a station in DND or manual forward then the incoming CO line will by pass that station and forward to the next in the chain If that station is the last in the chain then the call will not forward any further and will continue to ring at that station until answered or termination 3 Chainable Preset Call Forwarding will force the incoming CO line to ring at each station pre assigned in the database for the Call Forward Ring Time specified in the database before forwarding 4 When a CO line is forwarded via Preset Call Forward the station programmed to ring will stop ringing however will continue to flash incoming on the CO line until the call is answered or terminated 5 The preset forward line will only forward to a programmed station that has a CO or LOOP button for that line If no direct appearance button or button that station is bypassed 6 Preset Call Forward can be chained up to 5 stations Programming Preset Forward Station Base Program Main Menu2 Sub Menu5 Preset Forward Timer System Timers Main Menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu11 Hardware None 87 GDK 20W Programming Manual 6 CCR Custom Call Routing for DID or DISA Description Custom call routing CCR is an o
265. rm tone is heard 3 Press HOLD SAVE button 4 Then the saved SMDR Record print will stop Conditions 1 This feature can be enabled after setting SMDR print attribute of admin program as YES B The maximum of SMDR is 500 So later SMDR records will not be saved B stage of station range dialing function code but station number will cause error tone B stage of station range if start station number is larger than end station number error tone will be heard B At the stage of station range it is applied to only one station by pressing start station number and end station number as the same value or pressing after start station number B to CO calls such as DISA CO access will not be saved You can t delete SMDR records while it is B 4 printed Then error tone will be heard B Another printing requests while printing SMDR will be queued B station number assignment is done while saved SMDR is printed then printing job will be aborted B This feature is only used by Attendant If stations dial this function code error tone will be heard B lfastation number is changed thereafter the SMDR records corresponding to the station will be printed B Trying to save another SMDR records when SMDR is full will produce this message through RS 232C port B Error SMDR Record buffer is full B When amount of remained SMDR buffer comes to 200 100 50 30 20 10 this message will be appeared B Warning
266. rmal Ring to DVIB Timer CCR Inter Digit Timer DISA Delay Timer ACNR Pause Timer ACNR Delay Timer ACNR Tone Detect Timer ACNR No Answer Timer ACNR Retry Counter ACNR Retry No Tone Added Admin Program in HUNT Group Voice Mail Program Main Menu 11 Overflow Destination Overflow Timer are added for Cir Term UCD VM and Ring Group Ring Announcement Timer is added in Ring Group GDK 20W Programming Manual CONTENTS WINTRODUC TION Ocean 11 Td SYSTEM CAPACI TIES Reb i ewe E e eden te 11 T2 NUMBERING PEAN 12 1 3 BASIC AND EXTENDED NUMBERING PLANS 2 0 44 4 14 a 14 129 A O ky RR TERME 15 1 6 FREQUENCIES AND TONES 0 16 SGDKeZOVV CONFIGURATION waa eee ten a Se te 18 1 8 GDK 20WATION CONFIGURATION WITH LKD 2B 0 18 1 9 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF STATIONS GDK 20W 34PORTS 2 2 0 18 1 10 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF CO LINES IN GDK 20W 8PORTS 002 2 18 1 11 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF PORTS STATION IN GDK 20W 38PORTS
267. rmat Time is displayed with the 24 hour format If retrieved CLI number is matched with a speed dial bin and the speed dial bin has a name the name will be shown But if it is not matched or saved without name then only CLI number will appears 4 To see the number of shown name press CALLBK key again 5 When retrieved CLI number is not matched or saved without name only CLI number is shown And it is not toggled by CALLBK button 6 If you want to return a retrieved press HOLD button Conditions 1 The CLI number and CLI name is toggled by pressing CALLBK key during retrieving CLI message wait The system checks station speed bins first and then checks system speed bins So if the same number exists in both station 2 speed bin and system speed bin then name of station speed bin will be displayed as CLI name 3 If other station picks up a incoming call then displayed name is from the station which is picking up Of course the CLI names of directed called station and picking up station can be different for a incoming call Programming CLIP Station Base Program Main Menu 2 ISDN Station Attribute Sub Menu 2 Terminal Menu 6 CLI Name Display Station Base Program Main Menu 2 ISDN Station Attribute Sub Menu 2 Terminal Menu 8 Print Incoming call System Base Program Main Menu 5 SMDR Attribute Sub Menu 8 Terminal Menu 3 90 GDK 20W Programming Manual 8 CO LINE ACCESS De
268. rminal Menu 7 Music on Camp on Main Menu 5 Terminal Menu 8 1 Revised Numbering Plan 2 Revised Call Forward Incoming CO Line Off Net Off Net Added GDC 340H wireless terminal 1 Features are added in software version 3 0 Admin password Auto delete of DVIB message Day Night mode change Automatic Dial by name Delayed DISA Direct call pick up DVU announcement with station off net call forward DVU announcement with ring group Hunt group overflow SMDR records save Station name display To leave DVIB message by CALLBK key during ICM call Auto Call Number Redial Call Park CCR for DID or DISA CLI name display print CO line Queuing Station Language change DID MSN day night destination Keypad facility service Trunk to Trunk CO to CO transfer DVU management and Normal ring to DVIB GDK 20W Programming Manual ISSUE DATE DESCRIPTION ISSUE 3 0 2002 05 2 Admin programs for software version 3 0 are added Added Admin Program in Station Base Program Main Menu 2 CLI Name Display Keypad Facility Changed Admin Program in Station Base Program Main Menu 2 Language Code Added Admin Program in CO Line Base Program Main Menu 3 CPT Tone Detect Added Admin Programs in System Base Program Main Menu 5 SMDR Save Record in Detail CCR Table Admin Password DVU setting Weekly Time Table ACNR Tone Cadence Added Admin Program in System Timers Program Main Menu 6 Call Park Recall Timer No
269. rocess will not be started 10 If there is any station that is not idle or there is any DVIB port that is not idle system rejects this feature so that software upgrade is not started So MOH Main menu 5 sub menu 13 must not be set as DVIB digit 3 Therefore system accepts this feature only when all stations are idle and all DVIB ports are idle Programming Hardware 1 Standard ISDN Card supporting version 2 0 or later and HDLC as a channel protocol is needed in the remote PC 158 GDK 20W Programming Manual 11 ADMIN PROGRAMMING 11 1 GENERAL 11 1 1 INTRODUCTION The GDK 20W Key Telephone System can be programmed to meet each customer s individual need All programming is done at station 100 DKT 1 using KD 24D KD 36D or LKD 30D digital key telephone Upon entering the program mode the key telephone at station 100 cannot operate as a normal telephone but as a programming instrument with all of the buttons redefined The keys of the dial pad are used to enter the various data fields and to enter numerical information The 24 buttons located at the top of the phone Flex Buttons are used to indicate the specific data field and to enter information Sometimes SPEED button is used to delete the data See TABLE 11 1 6 1 11 1 6 10 for default data If this pre programming suits the customer additional Admin program is not necessary To change admin data the user enter the admin programming mode and sele
270. rogram Main Menu 11 Hunt Group Program Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 1 2 Group Member Assignment Station Group Program Main Menu 11 Hunt Group Program Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 2 3 Hunt Group Attributes Station Group Program Main Menu 11 Hunt Group Program Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu Hardware 1 DVIB is needed Test of Circular Terminal UCD and Ring group CIRC TERM Preset Forward Ring Is the call ringing and hunting Queue Can the group queue calls 53 GDK 20W Programming Manual UCD TYPE OF CALL Msg 1 Msg 2 Repeat Internal call OK OK OK CO Ring directly on a Group OK None OK None OK None DID MSN call to Station that is OK None OK None OK None forwarded to a Group MSN call directly to a Group OK None OK None OK None DID DISA Busy No Answer Preset Forward 5 OK None The first one is for DVU Annc 3 1 7 YES the second one for DVU Annc NO Even if DVU Annc YES if announcement is not recorded then no announcement is provided 1 Call is routed to DID DISA Busy Destination 23 IDLE LINE SELECTION WARM LINE Only Description This Feature lets a station perform a pre assigned feature as soon as going off hook as if a station selects that feature Idle Line Selection can be programmed as one of the following 1 Toseize CO Line 2 Toseize a CO Group 3 an another station 4 activate a featu
271. rompt System Greeting No Answer DID DISA Forward To DVIB Call goes to attendant station for No Answer Case 5 17 2 No Answer Prompt Transfer To Attendant Prompt RBT No Answer Prompt Record Start Prompt Beep Tone Recorded message is saved for this station After all busy DID DISA Busy Destination retries Call goes to attendant station Busy Prompt Transfer To Attendant Prompt RBT After all error DID DISA Error Destination retries Call goes to attendant station Invalid Prompt Transfer To Attendant Prompt No Answer at DID DISA Forward To DVIB No Answer Prompt Record Start Prompt Beep Tone Attendant for Attendant No Answer Recorded message is saved for attendant station _ Continuous ringing at attendant station Access DISA Account Code 3 1 5 DISA Caller is connected to a new outside line Code Authorization Code Prompt DT 1 DT means Dial Tone 2 means Ring Back Tone Conditions 1 This feature DVIB Voice Announcement with DID DISA Line is enabled by Admin field DVU Annc 3 1 7 YES If DVU Annc is set to NO no announcement is provided DID DISA feature works as if no DVIB with GDK 20W 2 Transfer to Attendant Prompt is provided when the call is being transferred to the attendant station When there is no recorded announcement the corresponding tone is provided 4 External caller hears Ring Back Tone for a few seconds until the Sys
272. round Music Type MOH Music On Hold Type System Gain Control Fax Transfer CO line External Page Port DISA DID Forward to DVU CCR Table Admin Password DVU Setting Weekly Time Table ACNR Tone Cadence 161 GDK 20W Programming Manual FLEX KEY MAIN MENU FLEXKEY SUBMENU 6 1 System SYSTEM TIMERS System Timer 1 SYS TMR Exclusive Hold Recall Timers System Hold Recall Timer Transfer Hold Recall Timer Timer Attendant Recall Timer CO Ring Detect Timer CO Ring Stop Detect Timer Pause Timer CO Release Guard Timer CO Dial Delay Timer Preset Forward Timer Call Forward Busy No Answer Timer DID DISA No Answer Timer Unsupervised Conference Timer MSG Wait Reminder Tone Timer Hook Switch Flash Timer Door Open Timer Enhanced Inter Digit Timer Warm Line Timer SMDR Timer Wake up Fail Ring Timer FAX Tone Detect Timer FAX CO Call Timer DVU User Record Time CONDO FP WN DVU Forward Answer Timer Valid User Message Timer Hunt Disconnect Timer Call Park Recall Timer Normal Ring To DVIB Timer CCR Inter Digit Timer DISA Delay Timer ACNR Pause Timer ACNR Delay Timer ACNR Tone Detect Timer ACNR No Answer Timer ACNR Retry Counter ACNR Retry No Tone Toll Exception Table Allow A Entry no 01 20 Toll Exception Table Deny A Entry no 01 10 Toll Exception Table Allow B Entry no 01 20 Toll Exception Table Deny B Entry no 01 10 1 Canned Toll Table All
273. rward Station 10 A Wireless Terminal can not receive a call from the ICM Box Programming lt ICM Box Signal Alarm Signal Station Base Program main menu2 Station Attributes Sub Menu Terminal menu8 Hardware None 55 GDK 20W Programming Manual 25 LOUD BELL CONTROL LBC Description The LBC contacts are activated when the assigned station receives ringing from an incoming CO Line if assigned ring transferred CO Line or intercom call In GDK 20W the system is equipped two external control contacts The LBC can be programmed to operate as an external night ring contact as well as a LBC contact In this case in the Night mode LBC will follow UNA assignments An external ringing device must be attached to the contacts Operation Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed Programming lt CO Line Base Program main menu3 CO Line Attributes Sub Menu Terminal menu3 lt Line Ring CO Line Base Program main menu3 Sub Menu7 External Night Ring System Base Program main menu5 System Attributes Sub Menu1 Terminal menu3 lt External Control Contacts System Base Program main menu5 Sub Menu11 Hardware An external ringing device must be attached to the contacts 26 PAGE 26 1 INTERNAL ZONE Description Any station can make voice paging announcements to any of the 2 internal zones Operation A station lifts handset and dials the code
274. s are provided over the speaker of the keyset while using the handset While using the speaker phone a camp on tone is provided over the speaker Operation Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed Conditions Off Hook Ring is not adjustable with Ring Volume switch Activating the DND feature will turn off Off Hook ringing When a CO ringing line is released or seized by other station ringing at the station is stopped If the station goes to idle status normal ring is presented Ring LED on LKD keyset will be flashing when Off Hook Signaling Muted Ring gt Programming Line Ring Assignments CO Line Base Program Main Menu3 Sub Menu7 Hardware None 29 PREFERRED LINE ANSWER PLA Description A station can be programmed in the system database so that by lifting the handset or pressing the MON button an incoming call is automatically answered and connected to the station Operation Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed Programming lt Preferred Line Answer Station Base Program Main Menu2 Station Attributes Sub Menu 1 Terminal menu5 Hardware None 30 PULSE TONE CO LINE SIGNALING Description Each CO Line is programmed to provide the appropriate signaling to the Central Office A CO Line can be programmed to send DTMF signals or pulses at 10 pps with a break make ratio of 60 40 or 66 33 Digits dialed by the 106 GDK 20W Programming
275. s feature just dial the phone number again If the line was properly disconnected the line will be connected immediately Users need not exit from software in order to dial again 8 For PC application there is another document for this feature This document will be released when ready 9 After using PC admin software for remote administration you should reset the system to use the base station on the MBU During the remote PC admin processing the system can t use the base station on MBU 10 Programming Hardware 1 Standard ISDN Card supporting version 2 0 or later and HDLC as a B channel protocol is needed at the remote PC 2 3 Software Upgrade Local Description GDK 20W MBU software can be updated through RS 232C interface in PC Operation 1 Connect the RS 232C cable between GDK 20W and PC 2 Run GDK 20W PC Admin software Configure the COM port from the Settings of COM port menu Set the port type as Direct The serial baud rate of GDK 20W and PC must be the same Select Flash Upload menu Select 2 binary files you want to send Follow the instructions of upgrade program For more information refer to the GDK Admin User s Manual p DUUM IE 156 GDK 20W Programming Manual Conditions 1 When program upgrade is in progress all function of GDK 20W except for upgrade doesn t work 2 S W upgrade is being done successfully 39 and 4 LED of GDK 20W will toggle continuously 3 LED
276. s in this case Refer the followings e A main menu has several sub menus MAIN MENU e To select a sub menu press a flex key responding to the sub menu number Y e sub menu may have several terminal menus but some sub menus may not e To select a terminal menu press a flex key responding to the terminal menu number TERMINAL MENU Enter data at the terminal menu with dialing digits or flex keys Hi 159 GDK 20W Programming Manual 11 1 3 1 Example of Admin Program PROCEDURE ADMIN PROGRAM START 1 When the user enter Admin mode LCD displays the first message PRESS FLEX KEY 1 12 2 Press a flex key to select a main menu among 12 main menus 3 If the user program does not include LCR package the user cannot enter main menu 10 STA PGM 4 The user selected the 2nd main menu STATION BASE PROGRAM by ENTER STA RANGE pressing the 2nd flex key in step 1 5 Dial station range The second station number must be more than or equal to the first station number STA PGM 100 100 6 And then press a flex key 1 8 or A V PRESS FLEX KEY 1 8 STA PGM 100 115 ATTRIBUT 7 PRESS FLEX KEY 1 10 STA PGM 100 115 DND 8 YES D Flex key 1 8 Select a sub menu of STA BASE PROGRAM 2 Move to the next main menu CO LINE BASE PROGRAM V Move to the previous main menu INITIALIZATION If the user press a flex key 1 the LCD displays as the left side If the user press a flex key 1 the LCD displays as
277. s not in Exception Table search the LDT Leading Digit Table Assume that code 80 is bin number 02 of LDT Leading Digit Table and the index of DMT Digit Modification Table for the current day zone and time zone is 05 In DMT if removal position of index 05 is 1 and the number of removal digit is 2 then 80235 is to be 235 If added digit is 0 12345678901234 and added position is 1 then the added digits will be inserted in the j position of changed code in this case the changed code is NULL So the sent digit will be 0 12345678901234235 Conditions 1 LCR is only applied to the following cases lt If it s a dialing after seizure of CO line it should seize CO line only by dialing common CO group Access Code 597207 Dialing without seizure of CO line Speed Dial Off net Call Forward Redial if the previous call is LCR applied 2 Dialing after seizure of CO line directly CO group access like 81 CO line access like 881 CO button access overrides LCR table that is the digits dialed by a subscriber will be bypassed to CO line without any modification Displayed LCD digits must be dialed digits not sent digits There must be a way to enter pause P P will be presented by CALLBK key LCR always has the high precedence over the flexible numbering table The simulated CO dial tone will be provided The conflict between each LEAD TBL is allowed 0 vs 02 Actual CO line is given aft
278. s ringing 1 Maximum table entry 24 2 The CO line should be programmed as DID Line CO Base Program Main Menu ISDN Attribute Sub Menu 2 DID Use Terminal Menu 4 3 called party number is not matched with MSN table then GDK 20W will treat the call like as DID 4 the called CO line number is not programmed then search all tables 5 If there is matched CO line number in MSN address table then search only matched entry of the table 6 Maximum 8 device can be connected to a SO port 7 MSN Table ISDN Program Main Menu 4 MSN Table Sub Menu 9 CO Line Number Telephone Number Station Number ELEM ep o p Range Max 20 Digits 2 or 3 Digit Number Default None None None None 3 D I D Direct Inward Dialing The system operates DID CO if ISDN CO assigns DID CO through CO Base Program Main Menu3 ISDN Attribute Sub Menu2 DID Use Terminal Menu 4 If you want to call to a ISDN station which assigns sub addressing of DID or DISA you should dial station numbers and sub address or MSN number 1 8 If your PX send full called party number area code prefix number of DID real DID number for station number and then please set CO Base Program Main Menu3 ISDN CO Attribute Sub Menu2 DID RN Terminal Menu2 to length of area code prefix did number 4 CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation When call exists through DISA or DID Calling line id
279. scription As with all stations in the system single line telephone stations are allowed or denied access to the CO line by groups Additionally for the convenience of SLT users the user may indicate which individual CO Line is desired through dial codes Operation access a CO line using dial codes 1 Lift the Handset and receive Intercom dial tone 2 Dial the CO access code any CO Line in the first accessible group 9 for the individual CO Group 81 84 for the individual CO Line 881 888 lt terminate the outgoing call Replace the Handset Conditions 1 A telephone user denied access to CO Line receives error tone when code is dialed CO line button is pressed Telephones denied access can receive a transfer from another station But cannot flash 3 A telephone denied access to a line but assigned to have that CO Line ring will receive ringing CO LED illumination and can answer the line the telephone user can transfer the line but cannot flash 4 If a user accesses a CO line by using dial access at a station without CO button or a LOOP button error tone will be presented If it has a LOOP button the CO line will be placed on the LOOP button 5 CO lines on hold cannot be accessed by using these dialing codes 88 8 But CO lins on hold be accessed by dialing 8 1 8 8 or code 6 Before inter digit timer is expired the telephone who seizes a CO line for outgoing is m
280. select FT number by pressing Flash R button to cancel selection Press Function 79 button Success or failure of the subscription is notified with confirmation tone to the attendant and the wireless terminal If succeeded the wireless terminal goes to an idle state and its station number is displayed If failed repeat 3 6 steps of the attendant and 1 8 steps of wireless terminal The key sequence of the PARK LLP PC LL Two digits decimal representation of PARK length Bit count P P 11 octal digits representation of PARK C Check digit It is calculated as the sum of each digit in the input stream multiplied by its Position in the input stream modulo 11 if the result if 10 this is represented by the 142 GDK 20W Programming Manual The key sequence of the AC code D D D D AC value Up to 8 digits decimal representation FTID 1 4 Condition 1 Wireless terminal must be subscribed to system for normal service 2 Only attendant can subscribe the wireless terminals GAP 3 Attendant can subscribe another wireless terminal after one subscribing procedure 4 If attendant want to subscribe wireless terminal that was subscribed already it will be heard error tone Program Hardware 4 User Desubscription Description This procedure makes a wireless terminal loose access right to the GDK 20W system To de subscribe the wireless terminal it should be in an idle state Operation 1 Att
281. seseesecsesecsusucsuceesucsucersucssucsucecsatsuceesucsucsesucsussesacssensacsesetsecseseeseeee 127 PSIG Ce A Lei UL Mi i 128 STATION SPEED eni a EL 128 SYSTEM SPEED 129 LISDNPBATUBBSUR mix P ML ace 130 THE BASIC FEATURES OF ISDN DEVICE S INTERFACE eerte 130 THE FEATURES OF ISDN CO LINE T 0 132 ISDN CALL HOLD 1 00 0020400 134 SONE BROKER CALE ronde trem asa a LA Pu LUE cle INA a 135 ISDN 3 PARTY CONFERENCE 135 ISDN CLI WITH ANSWER CLI MESSAGE WAIT 136 ISDN LOOP BACK 0 5 55 138 ISDN TRANSPARENGY UAM Mae 138 ZERO INSERTION IN THE PRESENTATION ON LCD rtt 139 8 SUBSCRIPTION DE SUBSCRIPTION WIRELESS TERMINAL rne 140 SYSTEM MM 140 AUTHENTICATION CODE erret tet trt ttr tentes sp 141 USER SUBSCRIPTIONS eo cup Rte AM Rte EE UE 142 USER
282. ss Terminal 3 While the conversation is being recorded the RECORD button will flash at 240 IPM And after it is finished the RECORD button will be extinguished 4 This feature is not available on SLT 5 Recording operation is finished when station goes on hook or RECORD button is pressed again And if FLASH TRANS HOLD or CONF button is pressed or CO party hangs up during the recording recording procedure is also finished 6 This feature is not available during an ICM call Programming lt Two Way Recording Station Base Program main menu2 Station Attributes Sub Menu1 Terminal menu12 Hardware DVIB is needed 65 GDK 20W Programming Manual 34 WAKE UP ALARM Description The station or attendant can register a wake up or alarm time in the system When the time is reached the system will signal the station with an audible and visual signal Operation register a Wake Up time from the attendant station 1 2 3 Press the TRNAS PGM button Dial 4 1 Dial station range to be alerted if a single station is to receive alerting enter an in place of the second station Dial 4 digit hour and minute for alerting Dial for wake up alarm until cancellation if not wake up alarm is canceled automatically after the first wake up alarm ringing Press the HOLD SAVE button lt cancel a Wake Up time from the attendant station 1 2 3 4 Press the TRN
283. stem Timers Main Menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu21 Related Features 1 Wake Up Alarm Hardware None 119 GDK 20W Programming Manual 6 SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE FEATURES 1 BROKERS CALL amp CONFERENCE SLT Description This feature allows a station user engaged in an internal or external call to hold that call and originate another call internal external Once the second call is established the originating station may alternate between calls carrying on a private conversation with either party Operation 1 station A engaged in a call flashes the hook switch This places the other party on hold and gives Station A dial tone The holding party B receives music on hold if equipped 2 Station A dials a new station number and is connected When connected has a private conversation with C 3 converse with the holding station the hook switch is flashed and Station A is connected in a private conversation to B while the other party C is placed on hold 4 Station A can alternate between the stations and by flashing the hook switch Conditions 1 If either party or C disconnects then flashing the hook switch will result in dial tone to station A 2 If station A hangs up while talking to one station the talking party is disconnected And the other holding party is disconnected as well internal station or remains to be holded extern
284. t MSN numbers are treated as an error case in GDK 20W If Error Destination 5 6 2 is Tone then DISCONNECT message is sent to the network And if Error Destination is ATD then CALL PROCEEDING and ALERTING messages are sent to the network For outgoing call GDK 20W requests a B channel as channel base in case of basic BRI port B1 for CO 1 B2 for CO 2 And before GDK 20W tries to request B channel it does not know if the B channel is used by other ISDN device or not 133 GDK 20W Programming Manual 3 ISDN Call Hold Retrieve Description This feature allows the user to make another call without using other channel When the HOLD supplementary service is invoked communication on a B channel is interrupted and the B channel is released The network reserves the B channel used by the user for subsequent reuse With this feature ISDN Broker Call and Call Waiting are available Operation To hold the current call 1 Press the FLASH key during conversation 2 Press the HOLD key Or 3 Press programmed SUPP HOLD button To make a new call by using the same channel 1 Press the FLASH key 2 Press the CO key Or 3 Dial CO Access Code 9 Toretrieve the held call during conversation 1 Press the HOLD key Then current call goes on hold and the held call is retrieved Toretrieve the held call after hanging up the current conversation 1 Press the CO key that is flashing with 480 IP
285. table is sorted automatically 01 BOTH The user can press flex key 1 3 to select sub menu DMT Flex key 1 LCR Type Flex key 2 CD Code Flex key 3 DMT Index LDT LCR TYPE LCR Type BOTH Press flex key 1 for 3 way toggle setting The value will be changed like BOTH gt INT gt COL Press HOLD SAVE to save the change LDT DIAL CODE MAX 12DGT CD Code 1234567E The max digit no of code is 12 Dial the code and press HOLD SAVE to save the change LDT DAY ZONE 1DGT 6DGT DMT Index DMT 000000 000000 000000 For Day zone 1 Dial 1 and 6digits meaning of 6 digits each pair 2 digits means the index to the DMT for the each time zone 1 2 3 For Day zone 2 Dial 2 and 6digits For Day zone 3 Dial 3 and 6digits Day zone SPEED Delete appropriate day zone DMT index Press HOLD SAVE to save the change Note 1 The modified one may be stored into a different bin since GDK does ascending sort for the faster lookup 2 To check another bin then press Up Down button 3 About the index of DMT e LCR DMT TABLE 6 F5 Program Digit Modification Table DMT DIAL ENTRY NO 00 99 Select the bin number 00 99 214 GDK 20W Programming Manual The current state of selected bin will be displayed RPO1 RNO1 APO1 CG1 ALT The user have to press flex key 1 6 to enter sub menu Flex key 1 Added Digit Stream Flex key 2 Removal Position Flex key 3 Number of Digits t
286. tact Loud A Ext Page 2 Second Contact 1 None 1 Inetrnal Lll EE 3 Both 1 1 Inetrnal 3 DVU 234 GDK 20W Programming Manual NO SUBMENU TERMINAL MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 14 1 System Digital Keyset Rx Gain 00 60 1 DKTU Gain Control 2 SLT 3 co 4 DCO 5 DTMF RX 7 DVU 2 51 4 DCO 5 DTMF RX SLT Rx Gain 6 TONE 7 DVU 8 MUSIC1 9 MUSIC2 2 SLT 4 DCO 6 TONE O WHTU DKTU 3 CO Line Rx Gain 00 60 5 DTMF RX 7 DVU O WHTU 4 Digital CO Line Rx Gain 00 60 DKTU 5 DTMF RX 7 DVU O WHTU 5 DVU Rx Gain 00 60 DKTU m SLT o 1 o 0 o lt lt UO jojo lt lt OJO FIC Clic O O 0 0 Z lt 0 Cig OIO OTIO N N 235 GDK 20W Programming Manual No TERWINALMENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK TERMINAL MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK System WTU Rx Gain 00 60 4DKTU ss Gain Control 3CO 4 toeo S OTME RX DTMF RX 6 TONE 7 N E 8 amp MUSICI E 9 MUSIC2 2 0 m WHTU Fax Transfer CO 4 Line 16 ExternalPage Port Station No NENNEN SLT port ae a 1 Busy Yes No 17 ee o en 2 einen M M EL 5 CCR Table Day Night CCR Table 1 2 Input Typ
287. tation Make a hook flash and dial 56 When the receiving station returns to idle the initiating station rings When the initiating station answers the receiving station is signaled and the call back request is removed If the initiating station is busy or does not answer in 30 seconds a message wait will be left at that Station Conditions A station can leave only one of callback or message A new request overrides a previous one 2 Station which forwards his calls to another station cannot leave a message wait If a station leaves a message to the station in forward status the message is left at the forwarding station 3 Call back to a station in a conference or paging is allowed Programming MSG Wait Reminder Timer System Timers main menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu15 Hardware None 127 GDK 20W Programming Manual 14 PAGING ACCESS SLT Description From a Single Line Telephone all Internal Paging Zones may be accessed by dialing specific code See Page section Operation 1 Lift handset and dial the page 0 3 Conditions 1 Stations denied access to paging will receive error tone when the Page Access is dialed 2 Stations dialing Page Access when any page port is busy will hear ICM busy tone 3 signals from telephones can transmitted through the paging port after access 4 page announcement be answered with a Meet by dialing the
288. tation will ring during Normal Ring to DVIB Timer and the call will be routed to DVIB 03 03 ACNR Delay Timer 030 000 300 When ACNR Pause Timer expires and there is 3 Digits no available CO Line in the group this timer is invoked When ACNR Delay Timer expired 03 3 0 Invoke ACNR Pause Timer if is no available CO line Still ACNR is activated 1 sec base 10 ACNR Tone 000 300 This timer is invoked upon completion of dialing Detect Timer 3 Digits and system considers the CO party as busy in the case that CPTU cannot detect the valid tone type until this timer expires 1 sec base m 11 ACNR No Answer 10 50 Timer is invoked after system detects CO Timer 2 Digits ring back tone or voice from CO party After this timer system retries ACNR 1 sec base a oe 1 30 This is decreased every time station retries 1 Digit ACNR ACNR is canceled if set to 0 3 Retry No Tone 1 9 1 means 5 seconds GDK 16 will wait this value bsec to decide NO TONE 3 means 15 seconds Only for CIS TABLE 11 2 29 Button Configuration for System Timers Main Menu 6 NO 0 0 0 0 3 1 210 GDK 20W Programming Manual 11 2 7 TOLL TABLE MAIN MENU 7 Main menu number of TOLL TABLES is 07 Press flex key 7 in Admin starting mode Toll tables are used to have access to certain toll free calls as well as being denied certain calls for the stations assigned STATION COS
289. tem Greeting announcement is started 5 If DISA call comes and all the ports of DVIB are used at that time the call cannot be answered until any of DVIB ports becomes idle and the caller hears Ring Back Tone 6 ISDN terminal S port can not receive DVIB voice message 7 Station with Data Line Security YES can not receive DVIB voice message even though DID DISA Forward To DVIB for Busy Case and No Answer Case are YES 8 When the call is routed to Ring Group any DVIB message can not be saved for that group Programming 1 DISA Account 2 CO Base Program Main Menu 3 CO Attributes Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 5 2 DVU Announcement 41 GDK 20W Programming Manual 4 CO Base Program Main Menu 3 CO Attributes Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 7 9 DID Line Use 6 CO Base Program Main Menu 3 ISDN CO Attributes Sub Menu 2 Terminal Menu 4 7 DISA Type 8 CO Base Program Main Menu 3 Sub Menu 4 9 DISA Retry Counter 10 System Base Program Main Menu 5 Sub Menu 7 11 DID DISA Busy Destination 12 System Base Program Main Menu 5 DID DISA Destination Sub Menu 6 Terminal Menu 1 13 DID DISA Error Destination 14 System Base Program Main Menu 5 DID DISA Destination Sub Menu 6 Terminal Menu 2 15 DID DISA Forward To DVIB for Busy Case 16 System Base Program Main Menu 5 DID DISA Destination Sub Menu 17 Terminal Menu 1 17 DID DISA Forward To DVIB f
290. tem allows each CO Line to be assigned the type of Flash open loop or ground flash and a Flash duration Operation lt generate a Flash while on a CO Line from a SLT 1 Press and release the hook switch 2 Dial 51 Programming 5 Flash Type CO Line Base Program main menu3 CO Line Attributes Sub Menu Terminal menu4 lt Flash Timer CO Line Base Program main menu3 Sub Menu5 Hardware None 6 CO LINE ACCESS SLT Description Single line telephones are allowed or denied access to the CO lines Operation lt access a CO line 1 Lift Handset Intercom dial tone is heard 2 Dial the CO access code 9 81 through 84 for access of CO Line Groups 1 through 4 respectively If there is an idle CO line CO dial tone will be heard and dialing may continue If all CO lines are busy the caller receives intercom busy tone lt terminate the outgoing call 1 Replace the Handset Individual CO lines can be accessed by dialing Code 88 and the line number 1 through 6 if it can be allowed CO Individual access Conditions 1 A Single line telephone may place outgoing calls on Co Line Groups 1 through 4 depending upon the CO Line Group privileges assigned to that telephone Toll restriction is applied by station COS 122 GDK 20W Programming Manual Programming lt Group Access Station Base Program main menu2 CO Group Access Sub Menu4 Related Features Hardware No
291. tempting this will receive error tone 6 The call from ICM Box can be picked up 7 About the call back ring the direct pick up doesn t work In this case error tone amp no pick up call LCD message will be displayed 8 When ICM Answer Mode of the station is HF or PV mode the call to the station cannot be picked up 37 GDK 20W Programming Manual 17 Door Open Description At most 2 relays can be used for Door Open Operation 1 To open the door by using relay 1 Dial 1 1 To open the door by using relay 2 Dial 2 Conditions Programming 1 External Control Contact System Base Program Main Menu 5 Sub Menu 11 2 Door Open Timer System Timers Main Menu 6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 17 Hardware 1 is needed 2 3 18 DVIB 18 1 DVIB System Greetings and Prompts Description Attendant station in the system can record the voice announcements like system greetings and prompts System greetings and DVIB MOH should be recorded before use System prompts in user s language are contained as default in DVIB But users can also modify those messages Prompts for date and time are contained in DVIB to be used for date and time stamping With the help of these prompts users can understand when the voice message has arrived Prompts for date and time are also built in and recorded in user s language Operation To record system announcements from Attendant 1
292. ter providing the announcement dial INDEX 1 DVU DROP a DVU system announcement number CCR TABLE 1 11 To program System Speed Dial dial a system speed bin number Ex Dial INDEX 1 SYS SPD 99 Speed bin 99 CCR TABLE 1 ANNC 11 To program Internal Page dial a Internal page number Ex Dial 2 INDEX 1 INT PAGE2 CCR TABLE 1 ANNC 11 To program External Page dial a External page number Ex Dial 2 INDEX 1 EXT PAGE2 CCR TABLE 1 ANNC 11 To program All Call Page dial a All Call Page number Dial 8 INDEX 1 ALL CALL PAGE CCR TABLE 1 ANNC 11 To delete the content of entry press the SPEED button INDEX 1 NOT ASSIGNED CCR TABLE 1 ANNC 11 INDEX 1 Press the HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently 205 GDK 20W Programming Manual TYPE DIGIT TYPE RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Station Number Hunt Group HUNT i Hunt number 11 19 3 o 4 DVUDROP Annonuce 5 SystemSpeed 2199 02004 6 nternalPage te 7 extemalPage 1 J 8 AlCalPage Jo TABLE 12 2 28 1 Custom Call Routing Table 19 Admin Password SUB MENU 19 Admin Password can be assigned to enter Admin Programming mode for only Administrator who knows the Admin Password Admin Password is not assigned by default SYS ADMIN PASSWORD 1 After you select SYSTEM BASE PROGAM Press flexible button 19 _ DIAL
293. ters may be used simultaneously to search a name 12 When Dial By Name cooperates with LNR LCD displays the dial number not the name 13 Pressing V key while entering a phone number the last digit will be erased If you press just 1 digit to enter a character only the digit will be deleted There is no change in the LCD 14 Pressing key while entering station name the last character will be erased 15 While entering name you may press 4 5 6 or 7 8 9 as a second digit instead of 1 2 3 Ex To enter J you may press 51 54 or 5 7 16 Entering a character to search a name and then pressing V key the cursor will indicate the first letter 17 Dial by Name data System Station will be printed with Database Print feature Main Menu 12 18 Trying to access Speed Dial in a station which is not allowed to access it Main Menu 2 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 2 error tone will be heard 19 Pressing AT W key after entering a speed bin number the previous stored phone numbers are displayed with the speed bin number It will be searched station speed base or system speed base 20 For entering alpha numeric data see the English Character Set Admin Programming Speed Dial Access Station Base Program Main Menu 2 Station Attributes Program Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 2 Relate Features 34 GDK 20W Programming Manual 1 Station Speed Dial 2 System Speed Dial 1 Blan
294. the DVU MSN TBL 1 NIGHT MSN1 e f you press flex key 5 in step 2 you select Night Destination MSN number DIAL MSN NO 1 8 Dial MSN number 1 8 MSN TBL 1 TEL NO 20DGT e f you press flex key 6 in step 2 you select telephone number Dial telephone 5675543665E number max 20digit MSN TBL 1 4 To delete installed number press SPEED button without entering any CO1 CO NO 1 8 eae MSN 1 C1 D 112 0 N 111 3 b Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently TEL 543665E 191 GDK 20W Programming Manual 4 DID DIGITS CONVERSION SUB MENU 11 With Direct Inward Dialing DID a user dials through a public telephone network To complete the connection the DID trunk receives two three or four digits from the central office and routes the call to the proper corresponding station The DID dialed digits may be modified by stripping up to two leading digits by substitution of two leading digits after stripping station number size is changed the 3 terminal menu setting of DID DIGITS CONVERSION is re initialized according to the station number size automatically PROCEDURE ISDN PGM DID DIGIT TABLE 1 program DID DIGITS CONVERSION TABLE press one of the flex PRESS FLEX KEY 1 3 buttons 1 3 as Table 11 2 15 LCD shows current status of DID Digit Conversion DID TBL RECEIVE DIGIT 3 To assign Received digit number from PBX enter digit number data then 3 DIAL NO 2 4 entered data
295. the call When DID DISA call comes to a station in forward type 7 the outside caller hear recorded user greeting after DVIB Station Forward Answer time regardless of DVU Annc setting 3 1 7 A callback can be initiated when station in call forward DVIB When a voice message is left to an idle wireless terminal that has no message wait the message wait is not indicated immediately but system periodically polls the appropriate information to each terminal Until system polling is made message wait is not indicated to the wireless terminal However if the terminal is made off hook message wait information is displayed on the LCD of terminal And message icon Pes is displayed on the upper right corner of the LCD after on hook Thereby terminal users can know if there is a message left Forward to DVIB feature is not available when the DVIB memory is full So the caller only hears ring back tone if the called station in forward to DVIB is idle and DVIB memory is full In Basic III versions 2 x B x the call is routed to DVIB when the DVIB forwarded station is busy However if the DVIB memory is full at that time the caller hears busy tone Forward to DVIB feature is not available when the total number of DVIB messages in the system becomes the maximum permitted Basic is 200 400 with option board So the caller only hears ring back tone if the called station in forward to DVIB is idle and the number of messages reached the maxim
296. the stations of a group are busy when a call comes in UCD Group First Announcement is provided after First Announcement Time expires and UCD Group Second Announcement is provided after Second Announcement Time UCD Group Second Announcement is repeated until the call is answered or is released every UCD Group Announcement Repeat Time But if the First Announcement Timer is set to O the full UCD Group First Announcement is provided before the call starts to hunt If DVIB is not installed then announcement is not provided When CO ring is assigned only one station in system and the station is in call forward mode to group Circular Terminal UCD or Ring then incoming CO ring is routed to group 52 GDK 20W Programming Manual 11 When CO call is transferred to a station and the station is in call forward mode to group Circular Terminal or UCD then transfer call is routed to group 12 WHTU Wireless Handset Telephone Unit can be a member of any station group 13 For Circular Terminal Hunt Group when Hunt Ring Timer expires Hunt Announcement is provided But the CO internal call will continue to be routed until every station in the group has been tried regardless of Hunt Ring Time out The call will remain at the last tried station 14 The station should have right to use DND feature If the station does not have DND attribute YES then DND FOR button is ignored when pressing DND FOR button during ringing 15 When a member of
297. tion Tone Tone Attendant TABLE 11 2 20 Button Configuration for DID DISA Destination Sub Menu 6 of SYSTEM BASE PROGRAM _ 7 DISA RETRY COUNTER SUB MENU 7 When the DISA user fails to call a station or access CO line then DISA user can retry the other call within this retry counter If DISA user cannot access appropriately within this counter system disconnects the DISA line automatically The Default of DISA Retry Counter is 3 SYS PGM DISA RETRY COUNT 1 Dial DISA retry counter 5 DIAL DIGIT 1 9 SYS DISA RETRY COUNT 2 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently 7 DIAL DIGIT 1 9 8 SMDR ATTRIBUTE SUB MENU 8 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR will provide details on both incoming and outgoing calls An assignable data base option All Call Long Distance Only is selected incoming and outgoing local and long distance calls are all provided If Long Distance Only is selected then only outgoing calls that meet the toll check status requirements listed below are provided SYS PGM SMDR ATTRIBUTE 1 Press 1st flex button to select ENABLE PRINTING menu of SMDR PRESS FLEX KEY 1 6 ATTRIBUTE To program SMDR ATTRIBUTE refer to Table 11 2 21 SMDR ENABLE PRINTING 2 To make a change Press flex button 1 for toggle setting YES YES LED On NO LED Off SMDR ENABLE PRINTING 3 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently NO GDK 20W Programming Manual FLEX DEF
298. ton confirmation tone is received lt gt Condition Programming Hardware None 5 CALL FORWARD 5 1 CALL FORWARD UNCONDITIONAL Description A user may direct the system to immediately re route forward all calls except recalls to another station Operation lt activate Unconditional Call Forward 1 Lift the Handset or press the MON button 2 Press the DND FWD button 3 Dial Call Forward Code 1 69 GDK 20W Programming Manual 4 Dial station number to receive the calls 5 Replace the Handset go on hook deactivate Unconditional Call Forward from idle Press the DND FWD button lt deactivate Unconditional Call Forward from off hook 1 Press the DND FWD button 2 Dial Conditions 1 Call Forward will remain engaged until manually released by station 2 Calls can not be forwarded to a station in the mode An error tone will be received when this is attempted can be forwarded to a busy station Call Back requests Message Waiting request are canceled when a station is placed in forward mode 4 A forwarded call will signal to the forwarded station in the Tone mode regardless of the intercom signaling switch mode selection 5 A station in the forward mode can make outgoing calls internal or external 6 A station denied the use of call forwarding will receive an error tone when pressing the DND FWD button
299. ts No of Internal Page Zones No of System Speed Dial Bins No of Station Speed Dial Bins Per Station 20 No of SMDR Records Above version 3 0 No of External Relays 2 No of Power Failure Circuit 0 Number of Automatic Fax Transfer 1 Number of DVIB 1 Number of Channel DVIB 2 Max Record Time System 3 Minutes 68 Minutes Additional 70 minute record User 17 Minutes 30 Basic time is available with the Seconds optional board installed Total Number of User Voice Messages 250 ea 200 ea number of messages is 400 with the option Default Voice Data Prompts Prompts Battery Backup Voice Messages System All the messages All the messages are saved Announcements with the backup switch on When backup switch is set off only system greetings and prompts are saved Recorded user messages are deleted after reset Number of Station Group 8 4 Max Number of Member in Group 32 Stations 10 Stations 11 GDK 20W Programming Manual 1 2 NUMBERING PLAN Station Intercom 100 133 Programmable 100 499 _ CO Line Access Group 81 84 Line Access Individual 881 888 i Retrieve a Held CO Line Individual g V 81 88 SET Retrieve a Held CO Line rre Odi SET AMtendant Line Access First Accessible Group eee Call Waiting Camp on ICM Busy Tone Page All Call 0 ME Bannan Page Internal Zone i oS aere External Page
300. tton 2 Liftthe Handset to converse privately lt Automatic Speaker Activation for a Speed Dial Press the desired Speed Dial Flexible button or 1 Press SPEED button 2 Dial the desired Speed Dial bin 3 Liftthe Handset to converse privately Condition Programming lt Automatic Speaker Selection Station Base Program main menu2 Station Attributes Sub Menu1 Terminal Menu7 Hardware None 68 GDK 20W Programming Manual 3 CALL ANNOUNCE w HF ANSWER BACK Description Each keyset equipped with speaker phone can adjust the intercom signaling mode so as to receive call announcements and be able to respond to the announcements hands free by simply answering back in a normal speaking voice Operation lt assign Call Announce w HF Answer Back 1 Press the TRNAS PGM button 2 Dial 49 confirmation tone is received 3 Dial signaling mode code 1 for HF Answer Back Press the HOLD SAVE button confirmation tone is received lt gt Condition Programming Hardware None 4 CALL ANNOUNCE w PRIVACY Description Each keyset equipped with a speaker phone can adjust the intercom signaling mode so as to receive a voice announcement with the microphone muted for privacy Operation lt assign Call Announce w Privacy 1 Press the TRNAS PGM button 2 Dial 49 confirmation tone is received 3 Dial signaling mode code 3 for Privacy Press the HOLD SAVE but
301. ub Menu Terminal menu4 2 CALL PICK UP WIRELESS TERMINAL Description Tone ringing intercom calls and CO lines transferred to unattended station may be retrieved Operation To pickup call 1 An unattended station receives ringing signal 2 Any other Wireless Terminal in GDK 20W may intercept the call by pressing ON OFF button and dialing the Pick up code 66 3 The calling party will automatically be connected to the pick up station and the called station will cease all audible and visual signals Programming 146 GDK 20W Programming Manual 3 CALL WAITING WIRELESS TERMINAL Description Call Waiting is used to notify a busy station that another station is waiting for him The busy station is notified of the call by a camp on tone Operation With Station A Wireless Terminal Station B Key station or SLT 1 Station A dials the station B number in conversation Station A receives ICM busy tone Station A dials to camp on Station A receives ICM ring back tone Station B will receive a camp on tone via the handset or through the speaker N Conditions 1 Wireless Terminal can receive a call waiting and answer it by pressing HOLD 2 button Programming 4 CO FLASH WIRELESS TERMINAL Description While on a CO Line a user can request new dial tone to place a new call or when behind a PABX activate a PABX feature The system allows
302. uffix Suffix 2 Get Mail FIO 12 digits se 3 Busy Prefix 4 No Answer 1 2 Prefix P 4P _ 5 1 2 Prefix P 5P DND 1 2 Prefix P 6P Disconnect L m eee d 240 GDK 20W Programming Manual 3 LCD Messages NOTATION MEANING Dial Page zone etc XX CO line Speed bin etc XXX Station Time etc XXXXXXX EXT Station VM 6x GRUPO6x ENGUSHLCDMESSAGE SPANISH LCD MESSAGE BIN 01 99 XXX ABR 01 99 XXX 6 778 BUSYINO ANS FWD 1000000 DESV OCUINO CON 20000000 241 GDK 20W Programming Manual Ne ENGLISH LCD MESSAGE SPANISH LCD MESSAGE 9 nx 5 MEET WE PAGE FROON MEOWONADESDEXXK MESSAGE TO XXX MENSAJE A XXX MESSAGE WATTIGANCEL MENSAJE ESPERA GANGE so NOPIXEDUPCAL LLAMADA NO CAPTURADA NO RESPONSE NO RESPONDE 7 PAGE FROM STA XXX MEGAFONIA DESDE EXT XXX PRESSHEXBUTTON PMSATEGAREXRE 77 REGISTERWAKEUPTIME HORADESPERTADOR __ RESETALARM APAGARALARMA _ TONOLAMADA MODOTONO WAKEUPRING DESPERTADOR gt 242 GDK 20W Programming Manual ENTER COICO GRPNO NTROD NUNGRUPOUN ISON SUPP SVCREY SERV SUP RDSI RECHAZADO
303. um In Basic versions 2 x B x the call is routed to DVIB when the DVIB forwarded station is busy However if the number of messages in the system is the maximum at that time the caller hears busy tone When all the DVIB ports are busy the caller internal or external hears Ring Back Tone until any of the DVIB ports becomes idle It is impossible to make unscreened transfer to a busy station in call forward to DVIB mode As soon as the handset is placed on hook to try unscreened transfer the station is recalled the CO ring immediately Programming 1 DVIB Access Station Base Program Main Menu 2 Station Attributes Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 11 2 DVIB User Record Timer System Timer Main Menu 6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 24 3 DVIB Station Forward Answer Timer System Timer Main Menu 6 System Timer 2 Sub Menu 2 Terminal Menu 1 4 DVIB Valid User Message Timer System Timer Main Menu 6 System Timer 2 Sub Menu 2 Terminal Menu 2 Hardware 1 2 DVIB is needed 46 GDK 20W Programming Manual 18 4 DVIB Voice Announcement with Station Group Description System announcement is available for Station Hunt Group To know the different kinds of announcements used for station hunt group refer to DVIB System Greetings and prompts For details about station group refer to Hunt Group Circular Terminal UCD and Ring Operation Co
304. up access of some stations do this programming Default gives to access CO Line Group 1 4 for all stations PROCUEDURE STA 100 133 1 Select CO LINE GROUP ACCESS menu by pressing a flex key 4 PRESS FLEX 1 8 STA 100 133 CO GROUP ACC 2 Press flex keys 1 4 for toggle setting LED s of flex key 1 4 displays the 12 4 FLEX KEY 1 4 current status of the first station in the range STA 100 133 CO GROUP 3 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently 1234 FLEX KEY 1 4 TERMINAL MENU REMARK TABLE 11 2 5 Button Configuration For CO Group Access Sub Menu 4 of STATION BASE PROGRAM 179 GDK 20W Programming Manual 5 PRESET CALL FORWARD SUB MENU 5 A station can be programmed so that incoming Co lines can be forwarded to a preset station if the first station does not answer after Call Forward No Answer Timer Default assigns no stations The maximum allowed number of preset call forward chain is 5 PROCEDURE STA PGM 100 133 1 Select PRESET CALL FORWARD menu by pressing flex key 5 PRESS FLEX KEY 1 8 STA 100 133 PRESET FWD 2 Enter the station number want to forward Ex 101 LCD shows current status of the station DIAL STA NO To clear the Preset Call Forward station press SPEED button STA 100 133 PRESETFWD 3 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently current preset call forward chain number is 5 the user cannot save his 101 DIAL STA N
305. uring sequence if Station pressed the HOLD SAVE button Station would be connected to Station A and the outside line would go on hold Only the secretary assigned station can transfer a CO Line or camp on to an executive station that is in DND mode Not Implemented Yet If the transfer recall timer expires when Station A transfers a CO Line to Station the recall will ring both Station A and B If a station transfers a call which is on his LOOP button button his LOOP LED will flash at the I Hold rate If the call is picked up by another station his LOOP LED will be extinguished Transfer of outgoing CO line is not allowed when no dialing is performed to prevent a user from seizing higher COS line than his Programming lt gt lt gt lt gt Transfer Recall Timer System Timers Main Menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu3 Recall Timer System Timers Main Menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu4 Attendant Recall Timer System Timers Main Menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu5 Hardware None 92 GDK 20W Programming Manual 10 CO LINE GROUPS Description The system database provides grouping of similar types of CO Lines The groups are used for common access pools and stations are assigned access to the groups CO Lines are selected from the group based on the assigned method round robin or last line in order to
306. uted In order to say he can not transmit his voice or DTMF tone to a CO line At this time system sends a DTMF tone if that line is programmed to DTMF mode Programming lt Group Access Station Base Program Main Menu2 Sub Menu4 lt Line Group Assign CO Line Base Program Main Menu3 Sub Menu3 Hardware None 91 GDK 20W Programming Manual 9 CO LINE TRANSFER Description Keyset users may transfer calls on CO Lines to other stations in the system If the receiving station does not answer the call in the Transfer Hold Recall Time the transferring station will receive recall If the call remains unanswered the attendant will also receive a recall for the Attendant Recall Time after which the CO Line will be disconnected and returned to idle Operation lt gt To perform an unannounced line transfer 1 Press the TRNAS PGM button Intercom dial tone is received the CO line is placed on Exclusive Hold and the Recall Timer is activated 2 Dial the station intercom number to receive the transfer 3 Replace the handset go on hook To perform an announced CO line transfer 1 Press the TRNAS PGM button Intercom dial tone is received the CO line is placed on Exclusive Hold and the Recall Timer is activated 2 Dial the station intercom number to receive the transfer 3 When the station answers announce transfer 4 Replace the handset go on hook Conditions D
307. utton the selected database is initialized with default data e A Change to the next sub menu CO LINE DATABASE INITIALIZATION e V Change to the previous sub menu ALL DATABASE INITIALIZATION FLEXKEY SUBMENU REMARK DATABASE Station Database Initialization INITIALIZATION CO Line Database Initialization ISDN Database Initialization System Feature Database Initialization System Timer Database Initialization Toll Table Database Initialization Authorization Code Table Initialization Flexible Station Number Initialization Flexible Button Program Initialization LCR Database Initialization Exist only when LCR feature is included 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 Station Group VM Table Initialization All Database Initialization TABLE 11 2 1 Button Configuration of Initialization MAIN MENU 1 174 GDK 20W Programming Manual 11 2 2 STATION BASE PROGRAM MAIN MENU2 The user can enter STATION BASE PROGRAM one of main menus by pressing 2 FLEX BTN or W A at the beginning of the ADMIN PROGRAM 1 STATION ATTRIBUTES SUB MENU1 PROCEDURE ADMIN PROGRAM START 1 Select a main menu 2 by pressing 2 flex key PRESS FLEX KEY 1 12 STA PGM 2 Enter 6 digits for station range Ex 100 133 Or enter 4 digits if station ENTER STA RANGE number is 2digit The second station number must be more than or equal to the first station number STA 100 133 3 Press a flex key 1 The user ca
308. utton or LOOP button When ACNR Pause Timer expires if the station is in busy state ACNR Delay Timer is invoked During ACNR MUTE button goes on automatically to disable Tx Programming CPT TN Detect CO Base Program Main Menu CO Line Attribute Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu 8 Pause Timer System Timer Program Main Menu 6 System Timer 2 Sub Menu 2 Terminal Menu 8 Delay Timer System Timer Program Main Menu 6 System Timer 2 Sub Menu 2 Terminal Menu 9 Tone Detect Timer System Timer Program Main Menu 6 System Timer 2 Sub Menu 2 Terminal Menu 10 No answer Timer System Timer Program Main Menu 6 System Timer 2 Sub Menu 2 Terminal Menu 11 Retry Counter System Timer Program Main Menu 6 System Timer 2 Sub Menu 2 Terminal Menu 12 Retry No Tone System Timer Program Main Menu 6 System Timer 2 Sub Menu 2 Terminal Menu 13 84 GDK 20W Programming Manual Hardware LCOBE with CPTU 2 Port Spain Only with CPTU 2 Port New Board LCOB4 with CPTU 4 Port New Board 2 AUTOMATIC HOLD Description This feature enables the station user to place calls on hold when selecting one line from another i e Station A on CO 1 CO 2 incoming ring Station A depresses CO 2 and CO 1 automatically goes on Hold Operation While on a CO line the station user seizes another
309. wants to converse 11 With 2 8 Button Keyset user can request Message Wait Call Back by pressing TRNAS PGM key and dialing Code 56 And user can answer the Message Wait Request by dialing Code 57 Programming MSG Wait Reminder Timer System Timers main menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu15 Hardware None 13 MESSAGE WAIT REMINDER SIGNAL Description A station with a message waiting can receive a periodic audible reminder of the message waiting This signal is sent to Keysets only while idle and is presented over the speaker Operation Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed Condition Programming lt Message Wait Reminder Timer System Timers main menu6 System Timer 1 Sub Menu 1 Terminal Menu15 Hardware None 78 GDK 20W Programming Manual 14 MICROPHONE MUTE Description The transmit audio from a Keyset can be blocked by the user so that voice at the keyset is not sent to the connected part thus providing privacy for local discussions Operation lt remove mute the transmit audio from Keyset Press the MUTE button the MUTE LED illuminates The connected party does not hear the muted station lt restore transmission from Keyset Press the illuminated MUTE button The MUTE LED is extinguished and transmission is restored Condition Programming Hardware None 15 ON HOOK DIALING Description A station can place calls
310. will be displayed on LCD DID TBL CONVERT DIGITS To assign Converted DID digits press digits combination of 0 9 DIAL DIGITS than entered digits will be displayed on LCD The number of digits to be dialed depends on the receive digit number 1234567890 2nd DGT CONV To assign DID 2nd digit conversion table enter 10 digits 1234567890 DIAL 10DIGIT Ex 1224567890 1234567890 2nd DGT CONV 3 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently 1224567890 DIAL 10DIGIT DID Received Digit No From PX 3 2 4 2 DID Digit Conversion d d digit 0 9 ignore digits any kind of digit DID 2nd Digit Conversion 1234567890 10Digits TABLE 11 2 15 Button Configuration For DID Digit Conversion Sub Menu 10 of ISDN PROGRAM 5 ISDN TRANSFER CODE SUB MENU 12 Max digit no of ISDN Transfer Code is 2 By default ISDN Transfer Code is assigned as PROCEDURE ISDN PROGRAM 1 Press flex button 12 of the 1 14 PRESS FLEX KEY 1 14 ISDN TRANSFER CODE STA 2 Current assigned ISDN Transfer Code is displayed on LCD DIAL CODE 2DIGIT Dial 2 digits for ISDN Transfer Code to assign Press SPEED button to delete ISDN Transfer Code ISDN TRANSFER CODE STA 3 Press HOLD SAVE button for updating database permanently DIAL CODE 2DIGIT 192 GDK 20W Programming Manual 6 ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE SUB MENU 13 1 ISDN SUPPLEMENTARY SERVICE TYPE User can ass
311. y digital network will be stored in the CO message queue of the original called extension Operation To activate CLI Message Wait CLIP and CLIS should be programmed as Yes LCD Format MSG 101 CLI3 To retrieve CLI Message Press CALLBK button Then message contents will be shown on LCD 03434507902 ON 17 11 AT 01 51 136 GDK 20W Programming Manual L To delete the current CLI Message and see the next one Press CONF button Then the extension user can see the next CLI message and current CLI message will be deleted O To make call back Press HOLD button Then system seizes an available CO line in a first accessible CO group and dials it like speed dialing To see the next or previous CLI message Press UP DOWN button Conditions The total number of CLI message wait is 200 on System base 2 Station without LCD display for example SLT and LKD 2 Btn keyset can not receive CLI message wait even though CLIP is set to YES 3 The contents of message consist of date time and calling party number 4 This feature is available only with MEMU 5 CLI messages are saved against power failure 6 When the call is routed to Ring Group CLI Message Wait is not saved for none of Ring Group members 7 Zero insertion field determines whether O is inserted in CLI incoming call or not 8 System does not insert 0 in CLI message when the incoming CLI message includes leading
312. you can enter then user program mode Press Press flexible button 7 Press password Press Hold Save you will be heard confirmation tone lt erase a special wireless terminal TRANS PGM THE Flex Button8 Station Number HOLD SAVE Press the TRNAS PGM button TRNAS PGM LED will flash 60 IPM Flash and ON OFF LED will be turned on Then you can enter then user program mode Press Press flexible 8 Dial station number that you want to de subscribe Press HOLD SAVE you will be heard confirmation tone Condition 1 Wireless terminal must be subscribed to system for normal service 2 Only attendant can subscribe the wireless terminals 3 Attendant can subscribe another wireless terminal after one subscribing procedure 4 If attendant want to subscribe wireless terminal that was subscribed already it will be heard error tone Program Hardware Description This feature is switching an physical channel to another physical channel without disconnecting voice channel Operation Refer to wireless terminal user guide 144 GDK 20W Programming Manual 6 Out of Range Indication Description This feature indicate user location information to user when user location is change due to movement Operation Refer to wireless terminal user guide Condition 1 If user goes out of cell s coverage it will be heard beep sound times and OUT RANGE will be displayed 7 L

Digital Wireless Key Telephone System Programming Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents